Home

Hitachi INVERTER SJ700-2 User's Manual

1. 2 12 2 gt 7 ae A oj ej e S008 alao J NN lO i ac a 2 alle 300 E 390 5 Cable hole 41 5 MRK 641 A Chapter 7 Specifications J700 550 LFF2 LFUF2 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Ls 8 1 Precautions for Data Setting 8 1 8 2 Monitoring Mode 8 1 8 3 Function Mode 8 4 Extended Function Mode Chapter 8 List of Data Settings 8 1 Precautions for Data Setting The default display mode limits the screens parameters that can be displayed on the monitor To enable the display of all parameters specify 00 full display for the function code display restriction b037 To enable the parameters to be changed while the inverter is operating specify 10 for the software lock mode selection b031 8 2 Monitoring Mode With the default settings the monitor always displays the data output according to the output frequency monitoring d001 after power on To change the initial display content change the setting of the initial screen selection b038 as required Setting during Change during Code Function name Monitored data or setting Default
2. Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed allowed FF FUF or not or not Low current indication signal 00 output during acceleration deceleration and constant speed operation C038 01 x O output mode selection 01 output only during constant speed operation 4 69 C039 Low cument indication signal 0 0 to 2 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter O O detection level 5 00 output during acceleration deceleration and constant speed operation Go40 Overload signal output mode 01 output only during constant speed operation o1 7 2 4 40 C041 Overload level setting 0 0 to 2 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter O O C042 Frequency arrival setting for accel 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O 4 62 C043 Frequency arrival setting for decel 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O an C044 PID deviation level setting 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 x O 4 29 2 co45 Frequency arrival setting for 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o 3 acceleration 2 4 62 i i E cose Frequency arrival setting for 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o D deceleration 2 2 C052 Maximum PID feedback data 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 O 4 29 E C053 Minimum PID feedback data 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 O gej Pan 5 C055 Over torque forward driving level 0 to 200 100 x o o s
3. Figure 1 1 Location of the specifications label Inverter model gt Model J700 150HFF2 HITACHI Maximum applicable motor capacity gt kW P 15 20 Input ratings gt Input Entree 50Hz 60Hz V1 Ph A 50Hz 60Hz 380 480V 3 Ph 35A Output ratings gt output sortie 0 400Hz 380 480V 3 Ph 32A Serial number gt MFGNo 77AAT12345 A 001 Date 0707 Hitachi Industrial Equipment NE Systems Co Ltd MADE TN JAPAN Figure 1 2 Contents of the specifications label 1 1 2 Instruction manual this manual This Instruction Manual describes how to operate the Hitachi SJ700 2 Series Inverter Read this Instruction Manual thoroughly before using the inverter and then keep it handy for future reference When using the inverter together with optional products for the inverter also refer to the manuals supplied with the optional products Note that this Instruction Manual and the manual for each optional product to be used should be delivered to the end user of the inverter Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 Method of Inquiry and Product Warranty 1 2 1 Method of inquiry For an inquiry about product damage or faults or a question about the product notify your supplier of the following information 1 Model of your inverter 2 Serial number MFG No 3 Date of purchase 4 Content of inquiry Location and condition of damage Content of your question YS ma w
4. 4 61 frequency limit eeeeeeeeeeeseereeeeeeeees 4 25 frequency lower limit sseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 25 frequency matching 000 4 33 4 52 4 54 frequency operation ssseeeeseeereeeeees 4 14 frequency reached signal 00sssee 4 61 frequency scaling conversion factor 4 2 Frequency source setting 006 4 8 4 104 frequency to be added eee cceeeeeeeteeeeeeees 4 15 frequency upper limit eenen 4 25 PRO e ane E e nEaN 4 52 function code display restriction 3 4 4 74 function Mode si feccbeteei acetal poh deai ibe alesse 4 7 FUZZY re Siskel hr htt etal 4 33 4 78 EW ks sawe den cstege e sane r e AEN 2 7 4 8 EWR A E 4 69 Fl asceeaseesseatrietes a vonccea rescue a a a 2 7 2 18 heat sink overheat warning 4 4 59 4 67 heat sink temperature monitoring 000 4 4 High resolution absolute position CONMOli stesso LaeeheiA Sita aia 4 106 high torque multi motor operation 4 91 NOME SEAPCH vse ei vssdessseesizess anina E ceeeeeie 4 96 Initlal SCreGN 2svcssciseaey aves 4 76 initialiZation eoa ieee aha eeiele pees 4 73 input terminal a b selection eee 4 46 Input terminal response time 068 4 72 INSPOCUON ia nt cadet E 1 1 6 1 instantaneous power failure under voltage trip alarm enable 4 34 4 36 in
5. _ x 100 100 seconds Disabling the BRD operation Enabling the BRD operation while the motor is s running Dynamic braking 9i Disabling the BRD operation while the motor is control stopped Enabling the BRD operation regardless of whether the motor is running Dynamic braking 330 to 380 V 1 Level setting for 200 V class models activation level 660 to 760 V 1 Level setting for 400 V class models 1 The set dynamic braking activation level specifies the DC output voltage of the inverter s internal converter 2 Please refer P2 22 for minimum resistance of connectable resistor and BRD ratio 2 2 5 4 2 38 Cooling fan operation setting Related code The cooling fan operation setting function allows you to specify the b092 Cooling fan control operation mode of the inverter s internal cooling fan The cooling fan can be operated on a constant basis or only while the inverter is driving the motor Data or range of data 00 Specifying that the fan operates on a constant basis Specifying that the fan operates only while the Cooling fan b092 inverter is driving the motor control 01 Note that the fan operates for 5 minutes after the inverter power is turned on and after the inverter is stopped Note The cooling fan stops automatically when instantaneous power failure occurs or the inverter power is shut off and resume the operation after power recovered Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2
6. Braking frequency b127 PoE Pot i i 5 i lt gt 1 gt E i lt 4 gt Brake Wait Time for Stopping b123 Operation command Brake Wait Time for Release b121 _ 4 Brake Wait Time for Acceleration b122 gt Brake release signal Braking confirmation signal Pia 6 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 Note The above timing chart shows the operation on the assumption that the braking confirmation signal 44 BOK is assigned to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 If the BOK signal is not assigned to any terminal the Brake Wait Time for Acceleration b122 begins when the brake release signal is turned on and the Brake Wait Time for Stopping b123 begins when the brake release signal is turned off 4 81 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions When using the brake control function assign the following signal functions to intelligent input and intelligent output terminals as needed 1 To input a signal indicating that the brake is released from the external brake to the inverter assign the braking confirmation signal 44 BOK to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 2 Assign the brake release signal 19 BRK which is a brake releasing command to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 To output a signal when braking is abnormal assign the brake error signal 20 BER to an intelligent o
7. Multispeed CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 Speed 10 OFF By a as Frequency input from P 7th dial operator or speeds OFF oFF on on via an external analog Speed 5 OFF ON With multispeed binary operation mode you can use the multistage speed position determination time setting C169 to specify a delay to be set until the relevant terminal input is determined Use this specification to prevent the application of fluctuating terminal input before it is determined The input data is finally determined when terminal input becomes stable after the delay set as C169 Note that a long determination time deteriorates the input terminal response Determination time C169 0 Determination time C169 specified Frequency CF1 CF2 CF3 CF4 2 Bit operation mode Assign functions 32 SF1 to 38 SF7 individually to the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 to make multispeed s 0 to 7 available for selection speedo Frequency input from Specify the desired frequencies for speeds 1 to 7 SF1 to SF7 the digital operator or by setting multispeeds 1 to 7 A021 to A027 via an external analog input terminal m see er ON SF6 SFT m I a 2 If two or more input terminals are turned on at the same U SSS SSS FW time the terminal given the smallest terminal number among them has priority over others The X mark in the above table indicates that the speed can be selected regardl
8. eee 4 55 WP entire teen crete oh ers ee i tne 4 56 UU P DW Ni EE TT 4 55 User Montoto cele a eee idee ee 4 5 user PAraMelel c cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 77 user setting ce ccceee cece eee ee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 74 USP cia teats tte te tects 4 56 MMV ooo esata sete ea stenigeus stage E 4 35 4 59 VIF gain setting eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 16 A E e 4 16 4 96 4 97 VO ae E ieee aa Adie au neers 4 16 VP 1 7 pOWEF asc ates aceite eed etter a 4 16 vector control with Sensor c c 4 17 4 93 WAG Fein denied hin teenie 4 67 WAR sic hut Renee 4 68 warning fUNCTION sseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 warning Monitoring cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 WCO E asia sisi nh ec eekia whines he 4 71 WOU co dine Riedie nearer ie eiiie 4 71 W CO2s EEE EEE E A E E ae 4 71 Window comparator eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 71 wiring of control circuit terminal 00 2 12 OHz detection signal eeeeeeeeee teens 4 63 OHz range sensorless vector control 4 17 4 87 0 Hz speed detection signal 0 4 64 Zero return function eeen 4 109 ZS Sen bets N E a a eta Ae ite Pe 4 64 Index 4
9. can to Inspection item Detail of inspection Periodic Inspection method Criterion Test equipment pect Daily Annual Biennial General Environment Check the ambient temperature See Section 2 1 Installation The ambient temperature must Thermometer humidity and dust be within 10 C to 50 C without hygrometer O congelation The ambient recorder humidity must be 90 RH or less without condensation Whole inverter Check for abnormal vibrations and o Check visually and by listening There must be no abnormality noise found Power supply Check that the main circuit voltage Measure the voltage between the The measured voltage must be Tester digital voltage is normal Oo main circuit terminals R S and T within the allowable tolerance for multimeter AC power voltage Main General check 1 Check the ground resistance Disconnect all input and output cables 500 VDC class circuit between the main circuit and from the inverter s main circuit terminal megger ground terminals with a megger block detach the control circuit terminal block from the inverter and remove the jumper for switching the inverter s o internal filter function Subsequently The measured ground resistance measure the insulation resistance must be 5MQ or more between the ground terminal and the jumper connecting all the following terminals R S T U V W P PD N RB RO and TO 2 Check screws and bolts for o Retighten loose screws and bolts There must
10. 12 Reset of PID integration PIDC This reset function clears the integral result of PID operation To use this function assign function 24 PIDC to one of the terminal functions C001 to C008 The integral result is cleared each time the PIDC terminal is turned on Never turn on the PIDC terminal during the PID operation Otherwise the inverter may trip because of overcurrent Be sure to disable the PID function before turning on the PIDC terminal Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 24 Two stage acceleration deceleration function 2CH The two stage acceleration deceleration function allows you to change the acceleration or deceleration time while the inverter is accelerating or decelerating the motor Select one of the following three methods of changing the acceleration or deceleration time 1 Changing the time by the signal input to an intelligent input terminal 2 Automatically changing the time when the output frequency reaches a specified frequency 3 Automatically changing the time only when switching the motor operation from forward rotation to reverse rotation or vice versa Selecting the 3rd control system enables the change of the acceleration or deceleration time only by terminal input Not bytwo stage acceleration deceleration frequency To change the acceleration deceleration time by the signal input to an intelligent input terminal assign function 09 2CH to one of the terminal functions C001 to C008
11. A A045 V f gain setting 20 to 100 100 O O 4 15 Voltage compensation gain A046 setting for automatic torque 0 to 255 100 O O boost 1st motor Voltage compensation gain A246 setting for automatic torque 0 to 255 100 O O boost 2nd motor 4 18 Slippage compensation gain A047 setting for automatic torque 0 to 255 100 12 O boost 1st motor Slippage compensation gain A247 setting for automatic torque 0 to 255 100 12 O boost 2nd motor A051 DC braking enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 set frequency only 00 x O A052 DC braking frequency setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 50 x O A053 DC braking wait time 0 0 to 5 0 s 0 0 x O Aos4 DC braking force during 0 to 100 0 x o D deceleration A055 DC braking time for deceleration 0 0 to 60 0 s 0 0 x 12 4 20 ao o DC braking edge or level r a A056 detection for DB input 00 edge operation 01 level operation 01 x O A057 DC braking force for starting 0 to 100 x O A058 DC braking time for starting 0 0 to 60 0 s 0 0 x S A059 Sr carrier frequency 0 5 to 15 0 kHz 5 0 x Al requency upper limit settin 0 00 or 1st minimum frequency limit to maximum frequency Hz 0 x 061 Frequency upper limi g 00 or ini frequency limit to maxi frequency Hz 0 00 A261 precuency upper limit setting 0 00 or 2nd minimum frequency limit to maximum frequency 2nd motor Hz 0 00 x a one eee nae 4 24 A062 Frequency lower limit setting e
12. 6 1 2 Cleaning Always keep the inverter clean When cleaning the inverter wipe off dirt and stains on the inverter surface lightly with a soft cloth dipped in a neutral detergent solution Note Do not use solvents such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol for cleaning These solvents cause the inverter surface to dissolve or the coating on the surface to peel off In particular never use a detergent or alcohol to clean the monitor of the digital operator 6 1 3 Periodic inspection Check those inverter sections and parts which are accessible only while the inverter is stopped and which should be inspected regularly When you intend to carry out a periodic inspection contact your local Hitachi Distributor During a periodic inspection perform the following 1 Check that the cooling system is normal Clean the air filter as needed 2 Check the screws and bolts for tightness and retighten them Screws and bolts may have loosened because of vibrations and temperature changes Check them carefully 3 Check to ensure conductors and insulators are not corroded or damaged 4 Measure the dielectric breakdown voltage of insulators 5 Check the cooling fan smoothing capacitors and relays and replace them if necessary Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 2 Daily and Periodic Inspections Inspection cycle
13. Note 2 This overcurrent restraint function does not maintain the DC voltage at a constant level Therefore inverter trips due to overvoltage may be caused by the setting of the deceleration rate or by a specific load condition Note 3 When this function is enabled the inverter may requires a long time to decelerate and stop the motor if the load on the motor or the moment of inertia on the motor is under a specific condition Note 4 If a voltage lower than the input voltage is specified for b131 the motor cannot be stopped Note 5 When 01 is specified for b130 PI control is performed so that internal DC voltage is maintained at a constant level Setting a higher proportional gain b133 results in a faster response However an excessively high proportional gain causes control to diverge and results in the inverter easily tripping Setting a shorter integral time b134 results in a faster response However an excessively short integral time results in the inverter easily tripping 4 41 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 33 Start frequency setting Related code The start frequency setting function allows you to specify the inverter b082 ree Start frequency adjustment output frequency that the inverter initially outputs when an operation command is input Use this function mainly to adjust the start torque If the start frequency b082 is set too high the inverter will start the motor with a full voltage
14. R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W 4 160 Monitoring and setting items Data resolution ee 1 to 360000 1 to 360000 eewo Monitoring and setting items Data resolution 30 to maximum frequency 2nd motor 30 to 400 Inaccessible 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor Inaccessible 0 manual torque boost 1 automatic torque boost 0 to 200 0 to 500 0 VC 1 VP 2 free V f 3 sensorless vector control 4 OHz range sensorless vector Inaccessible 0 to 255 0 to 255 Inaccessible 00 or 2nd minimum frequency limit to maximum frequency 2nd motor 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor limit Inaccessible 1 to 360000 1 to 360000 0 switching by 2CH terminal 1 switching by setting 2 switching only when the rotation is reversed 0 to 40000 0 to 40000 Inaccessible Register No 1 Hz 1 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 1 0 1 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 01 sec 0 01 sec 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions i a Monitoring and setting items Data resolution D a Electronic thermal setting 200 to 1000 230Ch calculated within the inverter b212 R W 0 1 a current output 2nd motor Electronic thermal 0 reduced torque characteristic 1 220D characteristic 2nd motor pele constant torque characteristic 2 free setting 230Eh to F Motor data selection 2nd 0
15. frequency Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration i time 2 time 2 time 2 time2 i f Acceleration i i Deceleratign Acceleration tmel i i time 1 io timet time F002 A092 A093 F003 F002 A092 A093 F003 F202 A292 A293 F203 F202 A292 A293 F203 F302 A392 A393 F303 Example 3 When 02 is specified for A094 or A294 w i Sr Deceleration Deceleration Output frequency Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 25 Acceleration deceleration curve selection You can set different patterns of motor acceleration and deceleration according to the type of system to be driven by the inverter Use functions A097 and A098 to select acceleration and deceleration patterns respectively You can individually set an acceleration pattern for acceleration and a deceleration pattern for deceleration When the acceleration deceleration pattern is set other than 00 linear using analog input as frequency source is to be avoided because it prolongs the acceleration or deceleration time Related code Acceleration curve selection Deceleration curve setting Acceleration curve constants setting Deceleration curve constants setting Curvature for EL S curve acceleration 1 Curvature for EL S curve acceleration 2 Curvature for EL S curve deceleration 1 Curvature for EL S curve deceleration 2 Data or range of data 00 Linear acceleration
16. 1 This setting is valid only when the OPE SR is connected Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF FEF FuF allowed or allowed or q gt not not A041 Torque boost method selection 00 manual torque boost 01 automatic torque boost 00 x x A241 Torque Boost method selection 00 manual torque boost 01 automatic torque boost 00 x x A042 Manual torque boost value 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 A242 Manual torque boost value 2nd 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 motor A342 Manual torque boost value 3rd 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 o o 4 18 motor Adaa Manual torque boost frequency 1 9 to 50 0 5 0 o o A243 Manual torque boost frequency 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 o o adjustment 2nd motor Manual torque boost frequency A343 adjustment 3rd motor 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 O O 2 A044 VIF characteristic curve 00 VC 01 VP 02 free V f 03 sensorless vector control 04 OHz range 00 a x 5 selection 1st motor sensorless vector 05 vector with sensor oO S A244 VIF characteristic curve 00 VC 01 VP 02 free V f 03 sensorless vector control 04 OHz range 00 X x 4 16 2 selection 2nd motor sensorless vector gt VIF characteristic curve pane selection 3rd motor 00 VC 01 VP a
17. 1516h H020 low RAW EN H021 high R W ist ee constant R2 1st motor high RW to 65530 0 001 Q 1518h H021 low EGON H022 high R W an isio constant L 1st motor high Rw to 65530 0 01 mH 151Ah H022 low Ea H023 high R W 151Bn ee constant lo high Rw to 65530 0 01 A 151Ch H023 low 151Dh H024 high R W 15100 io constant J high Lew to 9999000 0 001 151Eh H024 low PRE sen Oo e p 1524h H030 high R W 1524h fauto constant R1 1st motor gh PRW 65530 0 001 Q 1525h H030 low BEZE H031 high 1526h fauto constant R2 1st motor gh RW to 65530 0 001 Q 1527h H031 low ar H032 high R W 1828 to constant L 1st motor high Rw to 65530 0 01 mH 1529h H032 low 152Ah H033 high R W Auto constant lo 1st motor high Rw to 65530 0 01 A 152Bh H033 low 152Ch H034 high R W EE constant J 1st motor high RW to 9999000 0 001 152Dh H034 low EN Reserved oo o ese ee o 153Dh PI proportional gain for 1st motor Hos0 Rw 0 to 10000 0 1 153Eh PI integral gain for 1st motor Ho51 Rw 0 to 10000 0 1 453Fh P proportional gain setting for 1st H052 Rw fo to 1000 Maven seven ies Nosed ced 1547h Zero LV Imit for 1st motor Ho60 Rw 0 to 1000 0 1 1548h zew LV starting boost current for H061 Rw fo to 50 1 96 st motor 1549h to 455th _ fetminal selection PI proportional H070 Rw fo to 10000 0 1 gain
18. 2 User setting display mode The monitor displays only the codes and items that are arbitrarily assigned to user parameters U001 to U012 except codes d001 F001 and b037 C154 to C156 3 Data comparison display mode The monitor displays only the parameters that have been changed from the factory settings except all monitoring indications d and code F001 Note that the settings of input span calibration and input zero calibration C081 to C083 and C121 to C123 and thermistor input tuning C085 are not always displayed Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 Basic display mode The monitor displays basic parameters The monitor display is the factory setting The following table lists the parameters that can be displayed in basic display mode No Code displayed Item Monitoring indication Output frequency setting Acceleration 1 time setting Deceleration 1 time setting Keypad Run key routing Frequency source setting Run command source setting Base frequency setting Maximum frequency setting AT selection Multispeed frequency setting Multispeed 1 setting Multispeed 2 setting Multispeed 3 setting VIF characteristic curve selection 1st motor V f gain setting Operation mode selection Selection of restart mode Allowable under voltage power failure time Selection of retry after trip Retry wait time after trip Function code display restriction Carrier frequency setting Initial
19. Items required for operation 1 Operation command input device External switch or relay 2 Frequency setting command input device External device to input signals 0 to 10 VDC 10 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA Control circuit terminal block r 0 al CM1 for xFF xFUF H JO L P24 for xFEF Frequency setting command eS lt Operation command input input device control FW device switch 3 Entering operation and frequency setting commands both from a digital operator and via control circuit terminals This operating method allows you to arbitrarily select the digital operator or control circuit terminals as the means to input operation commands and frequency setting commands Items required for operation 1 See the items required for the above two operating methods 3 2 Chapter 3 Operation 3 2 How To Operate the Digital Operator OPE S 3 2 1 Names and functions of components Monitor l 4 digit LED display POWER lamp FINANCIAL RUN operation lamp ALARM lamp PRG program lamp Monitor lamps RUN key enable LED RUN key FUNC function key STR storage key 1 up key 2 down key STOP RESET key Name Function POWER lamp Lights when the control circuit power is on ALARM lamp Lights to indicate that the inverter has tripped RUN operation lamp Lights to indicate that the inverter is operating Lights when the monitor shows a value set for a function PRG
20. kVA 240V 9 9 13 3 19 1 26 6 31 5 39 4 50 2 60 2 75 6 91 4 Rated input AC voltage Three phase 3 wire 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage Three phase 3 wire 200 to 240 V corresponding to the input voltage Rated output current A 24 32 46 64 76 95 121 145 182 220 k Regenerative braking Internal BRD circuit external discharge resistor External regenerative braking unit iS Minimum connectable m resistance Q 17 17 17 7 5 7 5 5 Approx weight kg 6 6 6 14 14 14 22 30 30 43 2 Specifications of the 400 V class model Model name type name 5J700 XXXXHFF HFEF HFUF 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 Max applicable motor capacity 4 pole kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 Rated capacity 400V 9 7 13 1 17 3 22 1 26 3 33 2 40 1 51 9 63 0 77 6 kVA 480V 11 6 15 8 20 7 26 6 31 5 39 9 48 2 62 3 75 6 93 1 Rated input AC voltage Three phase 3 wire 380 to 480 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage Three phase 3 wire 380 to 480 V corresponding to the input voltage Rated output current A 14 19 25 32 38 48 58 75 91 112 k Regenerative braking Internal BRD circuit external discharge resistor External regenerative braking unit co OF Mini g a Minimum connectable 70 50 50 24 24 20 5 resistance Q Approx weight kg 6 6 6 14 14 14 22 30 30 30 3 Common specifications of 200 V class and 400 V class models Model name type name 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 SJ700 XX
21. no no assignment is set in parameter C003 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Intelligent output terminals Code co21 Function name Terminal 11 function C022 Terminal 12 function C023 Terminal 13 function C024 Terminal 14 function C025 Terminal 15 function C026 Alarm relay terminal function Monitored data or setting 00 RUN running 01 FA1 constant speed reached 02 FA2 set frequency overreached 03 OL overload notice advance signal 1 04 OD output deviation for PID control 05 AL alarm signal 06 FA3 set frequency reached 07 OTQ over torque 08 IP instantaneous power failure 09 UV undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limited 11 RNT operation time over 12 ONT plug in time over 13 THM thermal alarm signal 19 BRK brake release 20 BER braking error 21 ZS 0 Hz detection signal 22 DSE speed deviation maximum 23 POK positioning completed 24 FA4 set frequency overreached 2 25 FAS set frequency reached 2 26 OL2 overload notice advance signal 2 27 Ode Analog O disconnection detection 28 OIDc Analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID feedback comparison 32 NDc communication line disconnection 33 LOG1 logical operation result 1 34 LOG2 logical operation result 2 35 LOG3 logical operation result 3 36 LOG4 logical operation result 4 3
22. ree setting V f frequency 2 b102 136Ah__ Free setting V f voltage 2 b103 j 136Bh__ Free setting V f frequency 3 b104 136Ch_ Free setting V f voltage 3 b105 136Dh b106 j 136Eh b107 i 136Fh __ Free setting V f frequency 5 b108 1370h__ Free setting V f voltage 5 b109 i 1371h__ Free setting V f frequency 6 1372h__ Free setting V f voltage 6 b111 1373h b112 i 0 i a N 1368h 1369h Po D oO AsO alaa ZIT Ps EN N E 3 5 PP Paley S S 1S Po S O a O a O O a m N lee D a a Ja e SAER fa m E a a TTi NISINISINIZIN S Oo IS 1374h Free setting V f voltage 7 b113 R W to 8000 Taran Reserves i rar 137Bh_ Brake Control Enable b120 disabling 1 enabling 0 137Ch Brake Wait Time for Release b121 0 to 500 oe 137Dh Brake Wait Time for Acceleration b122 0 to 500 0 01 137Eh Brake Wait Time for Stopping b123 0 to 500 n O fo fo n D O 137Fh Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 Rw o to 500 oo 1380h Jone Release Frequency b125 Rw o to 40000 0 01 Hz 1381h b126 0 1 1382h b127 0 to 40000 0 1383h accessible 1384h naccessible pa 0 disabling 1 enabling 2 enabl h isabling 1 enabling 2 enabling wit 1385h Overvoltage suppression enable b130 w eee 7 200 V class 330 to 390 V 1386h Overvoltage suppression level b131 R W 400 V class 660 to 780 V 1 V Acceleration and deceleration
23. ttt 4 98 4 3 5 Torque control function eee ed een a ee ee eee me ane eee ke er eee ee ne ear er eee a eerie ie 4 98 4 3 6 Pulse train position control mode 2 o s 4 a 99 4 3 7 Electronic gear function Sarata a tae ee atm Gate eR area md a ae eR a a aea a a 4 101 4 3 8 Motor gear ratio setting function ttt t ttt es 4 103 4 3 9 Position biasing function Pe ee ee ee 2 4 103 4 3 10 Speed biasing function Sahara yal A ah ece al daa de ace maar e ah moe ial Saas en ace oal abaya eh eel aay ser ante 4 103 4 3 11 Home search function ccc tcc ttt e ete ene teen eee eee eee 4 104 4 3 12 Absolute position control mode had ah ate Vad Parsee ards user fae ave a om Gael far a vey Bo nse for vm a Gal Ja amy Se 4 106 4 3 13 Operation in absolute position control mode sss sts rst tres sees es 4 107 4 3 14 Multistage position switching function CP1 CP2 CP3 sss str trttr ttre 4 108 XI Contents A P 4 3 15 Speed position switching function SPD s7s sss ttt ttt ttt ttt teeters 4 108 4 3 16 Zero return function ee ee ee ee ee 4 109 4 3 17 Forward reverse drive stop function FOT ROT s ss stss srr t tsetse eens 4 110 4 3 18 Position range specification function ssccc test crest tresses eee eens 4 110 4 3 19 Teaching function ee ee ae ee ee ee ee 4 110 4 3 20 Servo on function a ee ee ee ee ee 4 111 4 3 21 Pulse train frequency input Se ee ee ee 4 11
24. 00 4 73 C028 AM siginal selection 00 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque 04 output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 09 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature 11 output torque signed value 13 general purpose output YA1 00 C029 AMI siginal selection 00 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque 04 output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 09 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature 14 general purpose output YA2 00 4 74 C030 Digital current monitor reference value 0 20 x rated current to 2 00 x rated current A Current with digital current monitor output at 1 440 Hz Rated current of inverter O 4 73 ntelligent output terminals C031 Terminal 11 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 C032 Terminal 12 active state NO 01 NC 00 C033 Terminal 13 active state NO 04 NC 00 C034 Terminal 14 active state 00 C035 Terminal 15 active state NO 04 NC 00 C036 Alarm relay active state 00 NC 00 NC 00 NO 04 NC 00 NC 00 NC NO 01 NC 8 10 01 XIXI XXIX x ojojojojo oj o 4 61 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings
25. 440 460 or 480 When using this function follow the instructions below Selectable only for 200 V class models Selectable only for 400 V class models 1 Adjust the settings of base frequency A003 and AVR voltage select A082 to the motor specifications When motor voltage is other than the altanatives set as motor voltage A082 outputr voltage gain A045 motor rated voltage 2 This function can properly apply to only the motors in the maximum applicable capacity class of your inverter or one class lower than the capacity class of your inverter If this function is used for motors with other capacities correct constant data may not be obtained In such cases the auto tuning operation may not be completed If the auto tuning operation is not completed press the STOP RESET key The operation will end with an error code displayed 3 If 01 enabling is specified for the DC braking enable A051 motor constants cannot be measured by offline auto tuning Specify 00 disabling for the DC braking enable The default setting is 00 4 If 02 auto tuning with motor rotation is specified for the Auto tuning Setting H001 confirm or observe the following a No problem occurs when the motor rotates at a speed close to 80 of the base frequency b The motor is not driven by any other external power source 4 85 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions c All brakes are released d During
26. 5 Set the monitor mode To monitor the output frequency display the function code d001 and then press the E key once The monitor shows the output frequency To monitor the operation direction display the function code d003 and then press the E key once The monitor shows C for forward operation for reverse operation or a for stopping 6 Start the motor operation Set the FW signal at the FW terminal on the control terminal block to the ON level to start the motor The RUN lamp green LED goes on Apply a voltage across the terminals O and L on the control circuit block to output the frequency corresponding to the applied voltage from the inverter 7 Stop the motor Set the FW signal at the FW terminal on the control terminal block to the OFF level to decelerate and stop the motor When the motor stops the RUN lamp green LED goes off 3 12 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions This chapter describes the functions of the inverter 4 1 Monitor Mode eave dials T AN a close T E A EAA 4 z 1 4 2 Function Mode FRERE NES ERENER pisielaincaye EESIN NEE REPENT bine IEAA EEE 4 z 7 4 3 Functions Available When the Feedback Option Board SJ FB Is Mounted 711e 4 96 4 4 Communication Functions POTEET VAN ciate heise AE 4 113 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode 4 1 1 Output frequency monitoring Related code When the output frequency monitoring function d001 is selected the d001
27. A044 and make the inverter operate the motor Normally a positive frequency is monitored when a forward operation command is input and vice versa Related code P012 Control pulse setting A001 Frequency source setting P013 Pulse train mode setting P011 Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting P023 Position loop gain setting H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions 4 3 2 V2 control pulse setting To use the V2 control pulse setting function specify 00 ASR speed control mode or 01 APR pulse train position control mode for the control pulse setting P012 In speed control mode select a device to input frequency commands by the frequency source setting A001 In pulse train position control mode each frequency command is generated from a position command pulse train and the feedback of the position data detected by the encoder The position command is input via an intelligent input terminal to which the input of the pulse train position command is assigned You can perform the position control with the command Select one of three input formats for the pulse train position command by the pulse train mode setting P013 To use the pulse train position control mode assign function 48 STAT to an intelligent input terminal The inverter accepts a pulse train position command only when the STAT terminal is on You can clear the position deviation data by an
28. BCC Overrun framing Error check vertical parity and CRC 16 and longitudinal parity errors longitudinal parity errors lt Specifications and connections of RS485 ports gt For the RS485 communication function use the TM2 terminal block on the control circuit terminal block board Abbreviated name of Description terminal for transmission Control circuit block terminating resistor terminating resistor Control circuit block board Negative signal terminal SN nae for transmission 4 113 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Connection As illustrated below connect the inverters in parallel to the external control system and connect the RP and SN terminals with a jumper on the inverter at the end of the network Similarly jumper the RP and SN terminals when only one inverter is connected to the external control system for RS485 communication Connecting the RP and SN terminals enables the terminating resistor in the control circuit terminal block board of the inverter which suppresses signal reflections External control system SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN 2 Required settings The following table lists the inverter settings required for the RS485 communication Data or range of data Loopback test Communication speed 2 400 bps C071 selection 06 19 200bps Assignment of a station number to the inverter Node allocation Set this item when your inverter is connected togethe
29. Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Major failure signal Window comparators function 4 2 59 Intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection The intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection function allows you to specify a contact or b contact output for each of Related code C031 to C035 Terminal 11 to 15 active state C036 Alarm relay active state the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 and the alarm relay terminal The intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 are used for open collector output and the alarm relay terminal is used for relay output contact NO cost tocos contact NO p contact NC 00 contact NO b contact NC An a contact turns on the output signal when closed and turns it off when opened Ab contact turns on the output signal when opened and turns it off when closed C036 1 Specifications of intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 Intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 have the following specifications Meran N H inverter Setting of C031 to C035 Power supply Output signal 00 ON ON Electric characteristics a contact OFF Between each terminal and CM2 OFF Voltage drop when turned on 4 V or less ON Allowable maximum voltage 27 VDC 01 ON OFF Allowable maximum current 50 mA b contact OFF 2 Specifications of alarm relay terminal The alarm relay terminal uses a norma
30. E E E E 0000 Motor constant recalculation is 0001 Set data storage in EEPROM Writing to EEPROM bs Other Motor constant recalculation and set data storage in EEPROM 0901h to 1000h Unused Inaccessible 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output current at tripping DC input voltage at tripping 0044h Trip monitoring 6 factor See the list of inverter trip factors below oOo 0045h Trip monitoring 6 invert seals See the list of inverter trip factors below f d086 Note 1 Assume that the rated current of the inverter is 1000 Note 2 If a number not less than 1000 100 0 seconds is specified the second value after the decimal point will be ignored 4 142 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions List of inverter trip factors Upper part of trip factor code indicating the factor Lower part of trip factor code indicating the inverter status Name Code Name Code No trip factor 0 Resetting 0 Overcurrent protection durin eta ele operation i 1 Stopping 1 Overcurrent protection during deceleration 2 Decelerating 2 Overcurrent protection during acceleration 3 Constant speed operation 3 Overcurrent protection during stopping 4 Accelerating 4 Overload protection 5 Operating at zero frequency 5 Braking resistor overload protection 6 Starting 6 Overvoltage protection 7 DC braking 7 EEPROM error 8 Overload restricted 8 Und
31. Enabling the overvoltage suppression Overvoltage suppression 01 with controlled deceleration See enable example 1 noted Enabling the overvoltage suppression with acceleration See example 2 Overvoltage suppression b131 330 to 390 V Level setting for 200 V class models level See Note 4 660 to 780 V Level setting for 400 V class models Acceleration rate at b132 0 10 to 30 00 s Specifying the acceleration rate to be overvoltage suppression applied when the function is enabled Overvoltage suppression b134 0 to 255 Overvoltage suppression propotional gain propotional gain setting valid when b130 01 Overvoltage suppression Overvoltage suppression integral time integral time pigs a eee setting valid when b130 01 Example 1 When b130 is 01 Example 2 When b130 is 02 Voltage of the main circuit Voltage of the main circuit DC section V DC section V Overvoltage suppression llevel Ay b131 Output frequency z Time s Output frequency Time s Hz Hz E Stop of deceleration i Stop of deceleraile deceleration Restart of Acceleration according 36 deceleration the setting of b132 Time s Time s Note 1 When this function is enabled the actual acceleration time may be prolonged over the set time Note particularly that the motor may not be decelerated if the setting of b131 is too small when 02 is specified for the overvoltage suppression enable b130
32. Example 1 a FW DB C Output frequency Example 2 a Output frequency lt M55 Example 1 b FW DB C Output Example 2 b w oOo Output frequency Example 3 a Output Free running frequency x A053 A055 Example 3 b FW l Free running Output frequency n A A053 lt gt Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Internal DC braking A051 01 You can apply DC braking to the motor even without entering braking signals via the DB terminal when the inverter starts and stops To use the internal DC braking function specify 01 for the DC braking enable A051 Use function A057 to set the DC braking force for starting and use function A058 to specify the DC braking time for starting regardless of the braking mode selection edge or level mode See examples 4 a and 4 b Set the braking force for periods other than starting by using the DC braking force setting A054 Set the output frequency at which to start DC braking by using the DC braking frequency setting A052 When you set the DC braking wait time A053 the inverter output will be shut off when the output frequency reaches the setting of A052 after the operation command FW signal is turned off and the motor will run freely for the delay time set by A053 DC braking will be started after the delay A053 The internal DC braking operation to be performe
33. FF FEF _FUF or not or not P001 ePeration mode Gn expansion card 00 tripping 01 continuing operation 00 x O 4 79 P002 Silica mode onexpansion card 00 tripping 01 continuing operation 00 x O Encoder pulse per revolution P011 PPR setting 128 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 pulses 1024 x x 4 96 P012 Control pulse setting 00 ASR 01 APR 02 APR2 03 HAPR 00 x x 4 96 P013 Pulse train mode setting 00 mode 0 01 mode 1 02 mode 2 00 x x 4 99 P014 Home search stop position setting 0 to 4095 0 x O P015 Home search speed setting start frequency to maximum frequency up to 120 0 Hz 5 00 x O 4 104 P016 Home search direction setting 00 forward 01 reverse 00 x x P017 Sa completion range to 9999 1000 10000 pulses 5 x o 4 99 pors Home search completion delay 0 00 to 9 99 s 0 00 x o 4 99 ime setting poqg Electronic gear set position 00 feedback side 01 commanding side 00 x o selection P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator 0 to 9999 1 o o 4 101 setting P021 Electronic gear ratio denominator 0 to 9999 1 o o setting P022 Feed forward gain setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 0 00 O ie 4 101 P023 Position loop gain setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 0 50 O O P024 Position bias setting 204 2048 999 to 2048 0 O O 4 103 P025 Temperature compensation 00 no compensation 01 compensation 00 x O 4 87 thermistor enable P026 Over speed error detection level 0 0 to 150 0 135
34. Hitachi standard data 1 auto tuned data 2 2902h a auto tuned data with online auto tuning function 0 1 2503h Motor capacity 2nd motor H203 R W_ 1 2504h Motor poles setting 2nd motor H204 a lee 1 4 poles 2 6 poles 3 8 poles 4 o 2505h Motor speed constant 2nd H205 high RW to 80000 0 001 2506h motor H205 low 20m mote aoe fw PPM E a teeta tao Motor constant R1 2nd motor a a E Seke e o l e 253Eh PI integral gain for 2nd motor H251 0 to 10000 0 1 i 253Fh P proportional gain setting for H252 RAN lo to 1000 ai 2nd motor 2540h to asagn Reseed ae eee A 2547h Zero LV Imit for 2nd motor H260 R W_ 0 to 1000 0 1 Zero LV starting boost current 2548h for 2 d motor H261 Rw o to 50 1 ERE noes P fewest 1 The following table lists the code data for parameter H203 motor capacity selection Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Japan or U S A mode 0085 000r02 PAM OT PO ee a EU mode b085 01 0 2 kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 4 0 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Japan or U S A mode E MOOS VCR ET a a e E ead aah rede hee late alee EU mode b085 01 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 4 161 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions viii List of registers 3rd control settings Register No 3103h Acceleration 1 time setting 3rd F302 high 3104h _
35. Multistage position setting 7 P068 Zero return mode selection P069 Zero return direction selection P070 Low speed zero return frequency P071 High speed zero return frequency P072 Position range specification forward P073 Position range specification reverse P074 Teaching selection C169 Multistage speed position determination time C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to terminal 8 functions Item Function code Data range of data Description Control pulse setting P012 APR2 Absolute position control Position loop gain setting P023 HAPR High resolution absolute position control Position range specification Multistage position setting 0 P060 reverse to position range specification forward Position range specification Multistage position setting 0 P061 reverse to position range specification forward Position range specification Multistage position setting 0 P062 reverse to position range specification forward Position range specification Multistage position setting 0 P063 reverse to position range specification forward Position range specification Multistage position setting 0 P064 reverse to position range specification forward Position range specification Multistage position setting 0 P065 reverse to position range specification forward Position range specification Multistage position setting 0 P066 reverse to position range specification forward Position range specif
36. Note 6 When the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function is enabled the deceleration time may be prolonged if the motor load exceeds the inverter s rated load Note 7 If the inverter repeats acceleration and deceleration often the inverter may trip Note 8 Do not use the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function when the internal regenerative braking circuit of the inverter or an external braking unit is used In such cases the braking resistor disables the inverter from stopping deceleration at the end of the deceleration time set by the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function Note 9 When using the inverter for a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than that of the inverter enable the overload restriction function and set the overload restriction level to 1 5 times as high as the rated current of the motor Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code b120 Brake Control Enable b121 Brake Wait Time for Release b122 Brake Wait Time for Acceleration b123 Brake Wait Time for Stopping b124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b125 Brake Release Frequency Setting b126 Brake Release Current Setting b127 Braking frequency C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions 4 2 90 Brake control function The brake control function allows you to make the inverter control an external brake used for a lift or other machines To enable this function specify 01 ena
37. O NDc communication train 0034h LOG1 logical operation result 1 R 1 ON 0 OFF 1 ON 0 OFF 4 139 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 0035h__ LOG2 logical operation result 2 R 1 ON 0 OFF S 0036h_ LOG3 logical operation result 3 R 1 ON 0 OFF gt S O 0037h_ LOG4 logical operation result 4 R 1 ON 0 OFF S 0038h_ LOGS logical operation result5 R 1 ON 0 OFF gt S O 0039h LOG6 logical operation result 6 1 ON 0 OFF 003Bh__ WAF cooling fanspeed drop R 1 ON 0 OFF_ S E 003Ch FR starting contact signa R 1 ON 0 OFF _ _ S 003Dh_ OHF heat sink overheat warning R 1 ON 0 OFF S O 003Eh LOC low current indication signal R 1 ON 0 OFF S 003Fh_ M01 general output 1 R TON 0 OFF S e 0040h M02 general output 2 R T ON 0 OFF S O 0041h MO3 general output 3 R TON 0 OFF _ __ S e 0042h MO4 general output4 R T ON 0 OFF S 0043h _ MO5 general output5 R T ON 0 OFF S 0044h MO6 general output6 R TON 0 OFF _ _ S e 0045h IRDY inverter ready R TONO OFF S 0046h _ FWR forward rotation R TONO OFF S 0047h _ RVR reverse rotation R TON 0 OFF_ __ S e 0048h _ MJA major failure R T ON 0 OFF O S O 0049h_ Data writing in progress R 1 Writing in progress 0 Normal status _ __ _ 004Ah_ CRC error R T Erordetected 0 No error 2 O 004Bh_ Overrun R T Erordetected 0 No er
38. OVEM EN E E E 4 60 4 64 run command source setting cceeeeeee 4 8 FUNNING SiQNal EE e A EAS 4 61 R E Shee ven ea lee heck ast aE ea Et 4 46 RVR EAEE E EEEE 4 60 4 70 Scaled output frequency monitoring 4 2 2nd 3rd control 3 ca scesea us stee ents rxs dees cee eueeseien tee 4 49 secondary resistance compensation 4 84 sensorless vector control 4 17 4 86 SOIVO ON sis E EN E E 4 103 SET SENS eeoa aa NE 4 50 SF u ee e E e e D ee aT 4 51 SF1 SF2 SF3 SF4 SF5 SF6 SF7 4 47 sign of the frequency to be added 4 15 SINK lOGI Ces Peat AE Ee Bec ice gag deed ie eh 2 16 SJ300 lt sevictins ha area Arcee Appendix 1 slide switch SW1 cceeeeeee 2 9 Appendix 1 S ARE A E EE E heel aece cat 4 16 software lOCK eeecesceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeeaaees 4 50 SON E E E NOAT ATT 4 111 SOUICElOGICs neh aa a 2 13 SPD EEEE E 4 108 speed deviation MAX MUM 4 94 Speed biasing cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 108 Speed position SWitChing ccceeeeeeeees 4 103 STA E 4 57 Stabilization constant 4 77 start end frequency setting for external analoginputs anni ai ita nies 4 15 Start freqUeNCy ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 4 43 4 15 start frequency rate 4 15 starting contact Signal ceeeeeeseeeeeees 4 67 start with matching frequency 4 35 4 51 STAT cesses es cept ceases Soon
39. Pressing the key You cannot restore the stores the value set here display with the in the corresponding U A key parameter Chapter 3 Operation 4 Procedure for directly specifying or selecting a code You can specify or select a code or data by entering each digit of the code or data instead of scrolling codes or data in the monitor function or extended function mode The following shows an example of the procedure for changing the monitor mode code d001 displayed to extended function code A029 1 Display the monitor mode code d001 is displayed som A029 is displayed HITACHI Gi ZRT PRGO ATTACH m d00 Hep i Qo 2 1 O 6 BHO 2 Change to the extended function mode 2 1 Press the AN key eight times or the 5 Change the first digit of the code SGEE PRGO O SALIE Character d in the leftmost digit fourth digit from the right starts blinking O G VAQO 4 presethe Character 1 in the first digit is blinking key twice 2 Se Press the key HITACHI ates E A021 is displayed SePOWER Runo CY Ot AGO H ki HITACHI IE N PRGO H 3 o y mo LA Ny gt O YO Character A is blinking Pressing the STR key determines the blinking character 2 e Press the key to determine character A 3 Change the third digit of the
40. R W_ 0 disabling 1 enabling oe Reserved le Inaccessible 0 disabling 1 enabling 2 nonstop operation at Controller deceleration and stop b050 RW momentary power failure no restoration on power loss 3 nonstop operation at momentary power failure restoration to be done DC bus voltage trigger level 1338h power loss target voltage level sec Initial output frequenc deena posa 133Ah nonstop operation at momentary b055 R W 0 to 255 power failure Integral time setting for nonstop 0 001 133Bh operation at momentary power b056 R W 0 to 65535 failure en 133920 Reserved finaccessible O ee E R aon komparos o ot RW n homparo eoe RW ten leomparatoso 06S RW tan komparos or OH RW TT tin comparator f oes RW TT Sh komparos oi eoe RW 1n komparos roves eer few o OoOo 1347 komparas ovoz e ee RW 1348h_ Reserved inaccessible o o T Operation level at O Operation level at Ol 134Bh Operation level at O2 b072 R W disconnection a eo o o es 1354h Cumulative input power data b060 Rw Clearance by setting 1 a clearance Cumulative input power display 4 150 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register E R W Monitoring and setting items Data resolution 1354h 1355h Start frequency adjustment b082 R W_ 10 to 999 1356h Carrier frequency setting b083 R W _ 5 to 150 1357h Initialization mode parameters b084 0 clearing the trip history 1
41. RS485 04 option 1 05 option 2 06 pulse string input 07 02 01 01 x x 4 8 easy sequence 10 operation function result A002 Run command source setting 01 control circuit terminal block 02 digital operator 03 RS485 04 option 02 01 01 x x 48 1 05 option 2 a A003 Base frequency setting 30 to maximum frequency Hz 60 50 60 x x D A203 Base frequency setting 2nd 30 to maximum frequency 2nd motor Hz 60 50 60 x x dai z motor A A303 Base frequency setting 3rd 30 to maximum frequency 3rd motor Hz 60 50 60 x x a motor A004 Maximum frequency setting 30 to 400 Hz 60 50 60 x x A204 Maximum frequency setting 2nd 30 to 400 Hz 60 50 60 x x Jsi motor A304 Maximum frequency setting 3rd 30 to 400 Hz 60 50 60 x x motor AT selection 00 switching between O and Ol terminals 01 switching between O and O2 A005 terminals 02 switching between O terminal and keypad potentiometer 1 00 x x 03 switching between Ol terminal and keypad potentiometer 1 04 switching between O2 and keypad potentiometer 1 4 12 O2 selection 00 single 01 auxiliary frequency input via O and Ol terminals A006 nonreversible 02 auxiliary frequency input via O and Ol terminals 03 x x reversible 03 disabling O2 terminal 2 A011 OJ L input active range start 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 X o frequency e z A012 OJ L input active range end 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 H
42. VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 760 VDC in case of the 400 V class models If an instantaneous power failure lasts 15 ms or more the inverter will shut off its output When the power failure duration is long the inverter assumes a normal power off If a restart mode has been selected and an operation command remains in the inverter the inverter will restart after the power is recovered The inverter will display the error code shown on the right if the lowering of cooling fan speed is detected at the occurrence of the temperature error described below If the main circuit temperature rises because of a high ambient temperature or for other reasons the inverter will shut off its output Check whether the power supply voltage has dropped Check the power supply Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient Under V Check the power supply Check whether the thyristor has been damaged Check the thyristor CT Check whether the inverter has failed Repair the inverter Check for the noise sources located near the inverter Remove noise sources Check whether the inverter has failed Repair the inverter Check whether an error has occurred in the external equipment when the external trip function has been enabled Recover the external equipment from the error Check whether the inverter power has been turned on with an input operation signal remaining in the inv
43. allowed FF _FEF _FUF or not or not BE C111 Overload setting 2 0 0 to 2 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter O O 4 40 ee C121 O input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 Factory setting O Be 3 g C122 OI input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 Factory setting O O z S C123 O2 input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 Factory setting O O C130 Output 11 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C131 Output 11 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x C132 Output 12 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C133 Output 12 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x El C134 Output 13 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C135 Output 13 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C136 Output 14 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O 4 72 C137 Output 14 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C138 Output 15 on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C139 Output 15 off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O C140 Output RY on delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x e C141 Output RY off delay time 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 x O c C142 Logical output signal 1 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x te 3 C143 Logical output signal 1 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O era 5 7 n C144 Logical output signal 1 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o ka selection S C145 Logical output signal 2
44. and TO Example 5 b004 00 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power suppl ON Power suppl pply OFE 1 Es pply oN zl Operation command ON Operation command QN Inverter output ON Inverter output ae i i f _ AL oF AL ON a See oo IP a awa es IP ee Reet Dean Example 6 pogai While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating ower su ON ower su pply Mae Es pply oN al Operation command oN Operation command ON 7 Inverter output ON Inverter output ON A One So OFF AL OFF ae AL ON J IP oe eens IP 1 Example 7 b004 02 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power suppl ON Power suppl pply OFE Z cea pply oA ax Operation command ON Operation command ON 7 ee Inverter output oN Inverter output N Al U p AL e EES IP a Ip DR cece Ga Example 8 b004 00 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power suppl ON Power suppl pply OFF r Pply ON El m Operation command oh Operation command QN Inverter output ON Inverter output orf AN e OFF AL te AL OS ee IP OFF 1 IP oe ___ 1_ Example 9 b004 01 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power suppl ON Power suppl pply OFF ar a Pply Ne f Operation command QN Operation command ON ares Invert tput ON Invert tput Be nverter outpu nverter outpu Put BPF a H f 5 AL ON ___SU
45. b063 b066 2 0 o o 2 comparators Ol amp boss Hysteresis width of window 0 to 10 lower limit b063 b064 2 0 o o comparators Ol 4 71 oO na a F boeg Maximum limit level of window 400 to 100 lower limit b067 b068 2 100 o o E comparators Ol c Minimum limit level of window y eN 7 3 b067 comparators O OVO2 100 to 100 lower limit b066 b068 2 0 O s Hysteresis width of window ie dit a b068 comparators 0 01 02 0 to 10 lower limit b066 b067 2 0 O O Operation level at O 9 aon i b070 disconnection 0 to 100 or no ignore no x O Operation level at Ol o o j b071 disconnection 0 to 100 or no ignore no x O bo72 Operation level at O2 100 to 100 or no ignore no x o Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Default Setting during pick Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed or not allowed or _FF FEF FUF not b078 Cumulative input power data Clearance by setting 01 and pressing the STR key 00 O O clearance 4 4 b079 Cumulative input power display 1 to 1000 1 o gain setting b082 Start frequency adjustment 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 0 50 x 4 42 b083 Carrier frequency setting 0 5 to 15 0 kHz subject to derating 5 0 x x 4 43 b084 Initializati
46. command input is applied Position Teaching operation can be performed when power is input to the power supply terminals RO and TO of the inverter control circuit The current position counter also operates when an external device moves the workpiece Therefore teaching operation can also be performed when the inverter does not operate the machine Note In the case above make sure that the power supply to the power terminals R S and T of the inverter power circuit or inverter output U V and W is disconnected from the motor Performing teaching operation with the power supply and inverter output connected may result in personal injury or damage to equipment lt 3 gt Press the STR key on the digital operator when the target position is reached PS Ff s A 4 gt Ihe current position data is set in the memory area Setting of P074 Position command to be set corresponding to the position command specified by the gt Fa 00 P060 Multistage position setting 0 teaching selection P074 01 P061 Multistage position setting 1 02 P062 Multistage position setting 2 03 P063 Multistage position setting 3 04 P064 Multistage position setting 4 05 P065 Multistage position setting 5 06 P066 Multistage position setting 6 07 P067 Multistage position setting 7 4 110 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 20 Servo on function Related code A044 VIF characteristic
47. transfer data as described below 1 When the ASCII mode is selected C078 00 Use the 01 command for data transfer To transfer feedback data set the most significant byte of frequency data to 1 Example When transmitting the frequency data specifying 5 Hz The data to be transmitted consists of six bytes indicating a value 100 times as large as the set frequency value gt 000500 Change the most significant byte to 1 gt 100500 Convert the data to ASCII format gt 31 30 30 35 30 30 Note In ASCII mode the unit of setting is always frequency Hz 2 When the Modbus RTU mode is selected C078 01 Write the setting data on the assumption that 10000 indicates 100 to register address 0006h a Function name Function code Readable witable Monitored data or setting Dale resolution acne PID feedback RW 0 to 10000 0 01 Note This register is readable and writable Sasa this register can be read only when Modbus RTU has been specified as the communication mode for PID feedback It cannot be read with other settings When pulse train input is specified for PID feedback the input pulse train frequency Hz is converted toa percentage with maximum frequency corresponding to 100 and fetched as the feedback For the pulse train input frequency see Section 4 3 21 4 Feed forward selection Select the terminal to be used for the feed forward signal through PID feed forward selection A079 Eve
48. until its speed reaches carried by a lift or starting and stopping tion the set output conveyor driven by the of the motor except frequency inverter that the middle section of this pattern is linear Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Curve constant swelling degree Specify the swelling degree of the acceleration curve with reference to the following graphs Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Target Target Target frequency frequency 100 100 gt gt 96 9 82 4 es BF he ie E E EEEE A 35 4 31 6 12 5 17 6 6 25 3 1 i 0 39 i 25 50 75 N Time 25 50 75 Time 25 50 75 Time Acceleration time 100 to reach Acceleration time 100 to reach Acceleration time 100 to reach the set output frequency the set output frequency the set output frequency The acceleration or deceleration time may be shortened midway through the acceleration or deceleration according to the S curve pattern If the LAD cancellation LAC function has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal and the LAC terminal is turned on the selected acceleration and deceleration patterns are ignored and the output frequency is quickly adjusted to that specified by the frequency command 3 Curvature of EL S curve pattern When using the EL S curve pattern you can set the curvatures A150 to A153 individually for acceleration and deceleration If all curvatures are set to 50 the EL S curve pat
49. 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x Q 4 14 2 A146 Sian of the frequency to be 00 frequency command A145 01 frequency command A145 00 x A150 EL S curve acceleration 0 to 50 25 x x Es ratio 1 AA c oc S EL S curve acceleration 4 3 A151 tiga 0 to 50 25 x x fee wo z 2 S A152 EL S curve deceleration 0 to 50 25 x x 8 s ratio 1 lt EL S curve deceleration A153 ratio 2 0 to 50 25 x x 1 This setting is valid only when the OPE SR is connected Chapter 8 List of Data Settings operation Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed or allowed or _FF _FEF _FUF not not 00 tripping 01 starting with O Hz 02 starting with matching frequency 03 D b001 Selection of restart mode tripping after deceleration and stopping with matching frequency 04 00 x O 5 restarting with active matching frequency 2 ia b002 Allowable under voltage power 0 3 to 25 0 s 1 0 x o 5 failure time e b003 Retry wait time before motor restart 0 3 to 100 0 s 1 0 x O 4 33 T Instantaneous power m s A s z boo4 failure under voltage trip alarm He disabling 01 enabling 02 disabling during stopping and decelerating 00 Z o o stop 3 enable a a boos Numb
50. 0 01 1387h rate at overvoltage suppression b132 10 to 3000 Overvoltage suppression 1389h _ Overvoltage suppression Integral b134 to 65535 0 001 time sec 1390h to 3 1400h Reserved naccessible o aL N n oO O 1354h _ 1355h _ 1356h_ EA re 135Dh _ per 1360h _ jm 1363h_ ee 1366h_ 1367h _ 1368h_ 1369h _ 136Ah_ 136Bh_ 136Ch_ 136Dh _ 136Eh_ F 136Fh_ 1370h _ 1371h 1372h _ 1373h _ ivan 137Bh _ 1381h _ 1382h _ 1383h _ 1384h _ 4 151 a g 54 SON servo on 55 FOC forcing 56 MI1 general purpose input 1 57 MI2 general purpose input 2 58 MI3 general purpose input 3 59 MI4 general purpose input 4 60 MI5 general purpose input 5 61 MI6 general purpose input 6 62 MI7 general purpose input 7 63 MI8 general purpose input 8 65 AHD analog command holding 66 CP 1 multistage position settings selection 1 67 CP2 multistage position settings selection 2 68 CP3 multistage position settings selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit function 70 ORG Zero return trigger function 71 FOT forward drive stop 72 ROT reverse drive stop 73 SPD speed position switching 74 PCNT pulse counter 75 PCC pulse counter clear 255 no no assignment g g PIRJE Po SFT software lock 16 AT analog input voltage current select 17 SET3 3rd motor c
51. 11 to 244 Terminal 15 1 bit 1008h Intelligent output terminal d006 status 1009h Scaled output frequency d007 high 100Ah_ monitoring d007 low 100Bh eer d008 high T00Ch Actual frequency monitoring 008 low 100Dh Torque command monitoring 100Eh Torque bias monitoring 100Fh 1010h d012 1011h d013 1012h d014 ne a 1015h Cumulative operation RUN d016 high TOTER aore a 1018h monitoring d017 low monitoring 101Ah Motor temperature monitoring d019 IEE Reserved 101Ch Life check monitoring To Reserved Ea Inaccessible 1026h aa monitoring across d102 R i 6006 aT R 1 0 to 39960 0 RI Ea R 0 Rf 40000040000 vt tl 40000 to 40000 0 01 Hz R Hz R__ 200 to 200 1 CR EN TR ERA R ea Qa fo Q o d010 Inaccessible 200 to 200 1 0 to 6000 0 1 V 0 to 9999 0 1 kW 0 to 9999999 0 to 999900 0 1 0 to 999900 1 h 200 to 2000 0 1 C 200 to 2000 0 1 C Inaccessible 200 to 200 1 Zz e a 240 Capacitor on main circuit board 2 1 Low cooling fan speed 0 1027h BRD load factor monitoring d103 0 to 1000 0 1 Electronic thermal overload 1028h monitoring d104 R 0 to 1000 0 1 oann ee ee ce TSE User monitor 1 OOS LOWT E 2147483647 to 2147483647 1030h User monitor 1 dO26 HIGH R 2447483647 to 2147483647 1 1031h dO26 LOW R Ciam L em or 2147488647 to 2147465647 Position feedback monitor C
52. 2 Degradation of cooling fan speed 0 Normal D VO O Note 1 The inverter estimates the capacitor life every 10 minutes If you turn the inverter power on and off repeatedly at intervals of less than 10 minutes the capacitor life cannot be checked correctly Note 2 If you have specified 01 for the selection of cooling fan operation function b0092 the inverter determines the cooling fan speed to be normal while the cooling fan is stopped 4 1 20 Program counter display easy sequence function Related code While the easy sequence function is operating the inverter displays the d023 Program counter program line number that is being executed For details refer to the Programming Software EzSQ manual 4 1 21 Program number monitoring easy sequence function Related code When the program number monitoring function d024 is selected the d024 Program number monitoring inverter displays the program number of the downloaded easy sequence program Note that you must describe a program number in the program you create For details refer to the Programming Software EzSQ manual Related code d025 user monitor 0 4 1 22 User Monitors 0 to 2 easy sequence function d026 user monitor 1 d027 user monitor 2 The user monitor function allows you to monitor the results of operations in an easy sequence program For details refer to the Programming Software EzSQ Instruction Manual Related c
53. 2 Installation and Wiring 6 Installation method and position Install the inverter vertically and securely with screws or bolts on a surface that is free from vibrations and that can bear the inverter weight If the inverter is not installed vertically its cooling performance may be degraded and tripping or inverter damage may result N lt Mounting in an enclosure When mounting multiple inverters in an enclosure with a ventilation fan carefully design the layout of the ventilation fan air intake port and inverters An inappropriate layout will reduce the inverter cooling effect and raise the ambient temperature Plan the layout so that the inverter ambient temperature will remain within the allowable range Ventilation fan Ventilation fan Le 4 gt gt Inverter Inverter p Acceptable Unacceptable Position of ventilation fan 8 Reduction of enclosure size If you mount the inverter inside an enclosure such that the heat sink of the inverter is positioned outside the enclosure the amount of heat produced inside the enclosure can be reduced and likewise the size of the enclosure Mounting the inverter in an enclosure with the heat sink positioned outside requires an optional dedicated special metal fitting To mount the inverter in an enclosure with the heat sink positioned outside cut out the enclosure panel according to the specified cutting dimensions The cooling section i
54. 2 Product warranty ss ctctctcrcss esse eee e eee e tence ener ener en eneneneverenenes 1 2 Exterior Views and Names of Parts 2 1 n osen sesansnsnsasnsusnsnunnnnn 1 D 3 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring N N N Installation ccc ttt eee 2 1 2 1 1 Precautions for installation Se 2 2 2 1 2 Backing plate Se 2 4 Wiring EEEE ara sti O saving R AEE wis EA E E sata NE wht A E EET woe AIE TE AEE whoa sete lage 2 5 2 2 1 Terminal connection diagram and explanation of terminals and switch settings 2 6 2 2 2 Wiring of the main circuit Se 2 a 11 2 2 3 Wiring of the control circuit Se 2 i 18 2 2 4 Wiring of the digital operator ee 2 as 19 2 2 5 Selection and wiring of regenerative braking resistor on 5 5 kW to 22 kW models 2 20 Chapter 3 Operation Operating eSa e ac 3 1 How To Operate the Digital Operator Gk Cea a lek Greate aaa E ank wt Gees Caen eran eae Grete S 3 3 3 2 1 Names and functions of Components sss ttr tests este tee eeeeeee eens 3 3 3 2 2 Code display system and key Operations tt ttt ttt tte teens 3 4 How To Make a Test Run ctr ctr etn een ene e eee tener e eens 3 10 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions gt A Monitor Mode st ttt ene eee eens 4 1 4 1 1 Output frequency monitoring d001 ine ea R A ey a i ei J a Tg a pg i Sy A 4 or 1 4 1 2 Output current monitoring d002 sun 2 4 a 1 4 1 3 Rotation direction minitoring d003 Pe ee ee 4 1 4 1 4 Process variable
55. 3 02 8 _CRC 16 code lower digit 4C 8 Updating data upper digit 3 17 9 Updating data lower digit 3 00 10 CRC 16 code upper digit DB 11 CRC 16 code lower digit 3E 1 If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return any response 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to which the data is to be written first 3 The updating data consists of the upper and lower digits Even when updating an odd number of data bytes add 1 to the number of data bytes to make it an even number before specifying the number of data bytes If the function to write data to multiple coils cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 136 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vii Writing data to multiple registers 10h This function writes data to sequential registers Example When setting 3 000 Hz as the Acceleration 1 time F002 in the inverter at slave address 1 Since register 1103h and 1104h to store the Acceleration 1 time F002 have a data resolution of 0 01 seconds specify 300000 493E0h as the updating data to set 3 000 seconds Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 01 1 Slave address 1 01 2 Function code 10 2 Function code 10 3 Starting register address 11 3 Starting register address upper
56. 4 2 82 AM and AMI terminals C028 C029 C106 C108 to C110 sss srt ttt ttre 4 74 4 2 83 Initialization setting b084 b085 E RE VaT le Garage ata jal G GNET el ac acest 2 ANTENE age yale ANERE mde Jt a datas Bue 4 75 4 2 84 Function code display restriction b037 U001 to U012 sss sts sr steers 4 76 4 2 85 Initial screen selection selection of the initial screen to be displayed after power on b038 Bi ar Re BR 1 aR RC UR eR SRR Rc CR OL RRL BUR RO Ome ROY GA ROE A RUS a a ROO G 4 78 4 2 86 Automatic user parameter setting b039 U001 to U012 ssc ttt t trees 4 79 4 2 87 Stabilization constant setting H006 ee a a ee a a a ee ee ee eae ae ee eee 4 79 4 2 88 Selection of operation at option board error P001 POO2 sss sss ttt ttre 4 79 4 2 89 Optimum accel decal operation function A044 A085 b021 b022 sssssess 4 80 4 2 90 Brake control function b120 to b127 C001 to C008 C021 C025 sss setts scr 4 81 4 2 91 Deceleration and stopping at power failure nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure b050 to b054 TL tctCre Cte tere ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 4 83 4 2 92 Offline auto tuning function H001 to H004 H030 to H034 A003 A051 A082 4 85 4 2 93 Online auto tuning function ccc ct tte 4 87 4 2 94 Secondary resistance compensation temperature compensation function P025 b098 E E E ENTAS S SENON tat A E ay ere E se NEE tol D uy E eaaa a Yara E sayin ete sa TS a 4 87 4 2 95 Motor constant
57. Capacitor life warning signal WAC C021 to C026 sss ttt tt tt trees 4 67 4 2 68 Communication line disconnection signal NDc C021 to C026 C077 55555533 gt 4 67 4 2 69 Cooling fan speed drop signal WAF C021 to C026 b092 to d022 4 68 4 2 70 Starting contact signal FR C021 to C026 55r sss str t ttt treet teens 4 68 4 2 71 Heat sink overheat warning signal OHF C021 to C026 C064 777s rere 4 68 4 2 72 Low current indication LOC signal C021 to C026 C038 C039 5555s 77777 s se 4 69 4 2 73 Inverter ready signal IRDY C021 to C026 sss ttt t ttt tree terete sees 4 69 4 2 74 Forward rotation signal FWR C021 to C026 sss srt ttt ttt ttt etree 4 69 xX 4 2 75 Reverse rotation signal RVR C021 to CO26 sss str r ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt trees 4 70 4 2 76 Major failure signal MJA C021 to C026 oor ttt ttt treet 4 70 4 2 77 Window comparators WCO MWCOI WCO2 detection of terminal disconnection ODc OIDc O2Dc GE ae e a acetate ab assure a sb abso a Saat a ar a acura Ma Ree os a 4 71 4 2 78 Output signal delay hold function C130 to C141 sss sss ttt ttt ttre tees 4 72 4 2 79 Input terminal response time eae acta ee ae ema eee Weer eee ato oer Beeps earl e koe ato ear 4 72 4 2 80 External thermistor function TH b098 b099 CO85 s sss scr sss e ss se steers 4 72 4 2 81 FM terminal C027 b081 a NG BL Shon Spa geal ates BAENA aca E eats NATARE DELE ee aia meee ca Se IORA ete 4 73
58. Connect the control circuit power supply cables to the control circuit power supply terminal block Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 3 Wiring of the control circuit 1 Wiring instructions 1 Terminals L and CM1 are common to I O signals and isolated from each other Do not connect these common terminals to each other or ground them Do not ground these terminals via any external devices Check that the external devices connected to these terminals are not grounded Use a shielded twisted pair cable recommended gauge 0 75 mm for connection to control circuit terminals and connect the cable insulation to the corresponding common terminal The length of cables connected to control circuit terminals must be 20 m or less If the cable length exceeds 20 m unavoidably use a VX compatible controller RCD A remote operation panel or insulated signal converter CVD E Separate the control circuit wiring from the main circuit wiring power line and relay control circuit wiring If these wirings intersect with each other unavoidably square them with each other Otherwise the inverter may malfunction Twist the cables connected from a thermistor to the thermistor input terminal TH and terminal CM1 and separate the twisted cables from other cables connected to other common terminals Since very low current flows through the cables connected to the thermistor separate the cables from those power line cables connected
59. H202 Motor data selection 1st 2nd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H020 H220 Motor constant R1 1st 2nd motors H021 H221 Motor constant R2 1st 2nd motors H022 H222 Motor constant L 1st 2nd motors H023 H223 Motor constant lo 1st 2nd motors H024 H224 Motor constant J 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors H060 H260 Zero LV Imit 1st 2nd motors H061 H261 Zero LV starting boost current 1st 2nd motors The OHz domain sensorless vector SLV control function incorporates Hitachi s own torque control system and enables high torque operation in the OHz range 0 to 3 Hz This control function is best suited for driving a lifting machine e g crane or hoist that requires sufficient torque when starting at a low frequency To use this function specify 04 for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 Before using this function be sure to optimize constant settings for the motor with reference to Section 4 2 91 Motor constant selection The parameters related to the OHz range sensorless vector control are as follows 1 The Zero LV Imit for 1st 2nd motors H0O60 H260 is the parameter that specifies the output current for the constant current control in the 0 H
60. Input impedance 10kQ Maximum allowable current 24 mA Maximum allowable current 2 mA Analog monitor voltage M J a a D amp a oO o 02 gt Oo o o oO i H Analog monitor current Allowable load impedance 2500 or less Interface power supply common i J 2 iz J o e S a 8 p lt o c o gt D a 2 e N a 6 A Conditions for turning Digital contact Contact input Forward rotation Turn on this FW signal to start the forward rotation of the motor turn it off to contact input on command stop forward rotation after deceleration Voltage across input and PLC 18 VDC or more command 7 iinet Ea Operation Input impedance between Select eight of a total 60 functions and assign these eight functions to input and PLC 4 7kQ terminals 1 to 8 Maximum allowable voltage Intelligent input Note across input and PLC 27 If the emergency stop function is used terminals 1 and 3 are used VDC exclusively for the function For details see Item 3 Emergency stop function on page 2 8 Load current with 27 VDC power about 5 6 mA Function selection and logic switching Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Symbol Terminal name Electric property To switch the control logic between sink logic and source logic change the jumper connection of this PLC terminal to anot
61. On the inverter master inverter for the main motor specify either the speed control or pulse train position control mode On the inverter slave inverter for the sub motor specify the pulse train position control mode lt Example of settings gt Main motor Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting 1024 pulses Sub motor Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting 3000 pulses Ratio of main motor speed to sub motor speed 2 1 To operate the motors under the above conditions adjust the parameters on the slave inverter as follows Pulse train mode setting P013 00 90 phase shift pulse train Electronic gear set position selection P019 01 REF Electronic gear ratio numerator setting P020 3000 Electronic gear ratio denominator setting P021 1024 x 2 2048 The table below lists the examples of the ratio of main motor speed to sub motor speed according to the settings of P019 to P021 on the assumption that the encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting of 1024 should be set on both inverters FB Electronic gear set position r ieee pose ait Position feedback selection P019 F command side ae side side side Electronic gear ratio ee ee setting P020 1024 s 1024 2048 Electronic gear ratio denominator setting P021 ease 1023 2049 1024 Sub motor speed main motor speed 4 102 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code P028 Numerator of the motor gear ratio P029 Deno
62. Output frequency Hz 1 Even if 800 V is set as a free setting V f voltage 1 to 7 the inverter output voltage cannot exceed the inverter input voltage or that specified by the AVR voltage select Carefully note that selecting an inappropriate control system V f characteristic may result in overcurrent during motor acceleration or deceleration or vibration of the motor or other machine driven by the inverter Output voltage V aan Voltage that can be output by the inverter or that was specified by the AVR voltage select Output frequency Hz Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 18 Torque boost setting The torque boost setting function allows you to compensate for the voltage drop due to wiring and the primary resistance of the motor so as to improve the motor torque at low speeds When you select automatic torque boost by the torque boost selection A041 A241 adjust the settings of the motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole selection H004 H204 based on the motor to be driven Data or range of data i 00 Manual torque boost Torque boost selection A041 A241 Automatic torque boost Setting of the rate of the boost to Lo Manual torque boost value A042 A242 A342 0 0 to 20 0 the output voltage 100 Manual torque boost frequency A043 A243 A343 0 0 to 50 0 Setting of the rate of the frequency adjustment at breakpoint to the base frequency Motor capacity Pen 0 20 to 75 0 kW Selection of the
63. PV PID feedback monitoring d004 A071 A075 sss 4 1 4 1 5 Intelligent input terminal status 005 sss sess rere etter tsetse eens 4 2 4 1 6 Intelligent output terminal status d006 s sss scr s cette tsetse teens 4 2 4 1 7 Scaled output frequency monitoring d007 b086 55r sss sss strstr trees 4 2 4 1 8 Actual frequency monitoring d008 P011 H004 H204 ss ssssscrt sess eeees 4 3 4 1 9 Torque command monitoring d009 P033 PO34 sss sess e treet teens 4 3 4 1 10 Torque bias monitoring d010 PO36 to PO38 sss cts stt ttt t sss e reese 4 3 4 1 12 Output voltage monitoring d013 Pe ee ee 2 2 4 3 4 1 13 Power monitoring d014 Se ee ee ee 2 2 2 4 3 4 1 14 Cumulative power monitoring d015 b078 bO79 sss strstr ttt tsetse 4 4 4 1 15 Cumulative operation RUN time monitoring d016 sss cts sct ster settee 4 4 4 1 16 Cumulative power on time monitoring d017 s ccs scc ttt tts esse seen 4 4 4 1 17 Heat sink temperature monitoring d018 cccscct scr sss tsetse teense es 4 4 4 1 18 Motor temperature monitoring d019 b98 ssssccc scr t setters e eee teens 4 4 4 1 19 Life check monitoring d022 Pe ee ee 4 5 4 1 20 Program counter display easy sequence function d023 sss sss s strstr 4 5 4 1 21 Program number monitoring easy sequence function d024 5555555555555551 4 5 4 1 22 User monitors 0 to 2 easy sequence function scssst tts t tsetse teens 4 5 4 1 23 Pulse counter monitor
64. T eaten 4 58 Pre eXxciiation aeiiaaie ii aana nea nais 4 88 process variable PV PID feedback MONItOFING PEPPE 4 1 4 29 program Counter ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 program number monitoring cceeeeeeeee 4 5 programmable controller eeeeeeeee ees 2 13 protective FUNCTION ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 PulS6 counter sinne aes 4 5 4 59 Pulse train frequency input 000e 4 104 Pulse train position command 4 94 reduced torque characteristic electronic thermal seeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 38 reduced torque characteristic VP 4 17 4 85 reduced voltage start eeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 remote operatiOn cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 55 remote operator ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees Appendix 1 RESO tie ER chet Se at he he ot 2 8 3 3 4 9 4 53 restart with input frequency 0 4 34 4 37 retry after trip cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 34 retry selection cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 34 reverse rotation Signal eeeeeeeeeeeees 4 60 reversible arnein tna inper esty 4 13 4 28 RNT aeaaee E EIRAS 4 64 PRO a A N aa cteneanssneee eae neces seats 4 110 rotation direction MINItOFING cere tees 4 1 rotational direction restriction ee eeeeees 4 7 RSs a ea ee dite 2 9 4 54 RUN eiAtecto aaaea a n Ae as 3 3 4 4 4 60 Running time over power on time
65. The input terminal a b NO NC selection function allows you to 011 to C018 Terminal 1 to 8 active state p C019 Terminal FW active state specify a contact or b contact input for each of the intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 and the FW terminal An a contact turns on the input signal when closed and turns it off when opened An b contact turns on the input signal when opened and turns it off when closed The terminal to which the reset RS function is assigned functions only as an a contact Intelligent pulse counter 4 59 Item Function code Data Description 00 acontact NO Terminal active state C011 to C018 b contact NC i i ___ 00 contact NO Terminal FW active state C019 b contact NC 4 2 40 Multispeed select setting CF1 to CF4 and SF1 to SF7 The multispeed select setting function allows you to set multiple A019 muitispeed operation selection motor speeds and switch among them by way of signal input A020 A220 A320 Multispeed frequency via specified terminals setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors r A021 to A035 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings Multispeed operation can be performed in two modes binary C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions operation mode with up to 16 speeds using four input C169 Multistage speed position determination terminals and bit operation mode with up to eight speeds time using seven input terminals Multispeed AoTe 00 Bi
66. V f frequency 7 1096 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 gt Free setting V f frequency 1 to 6 b100 b102 b104 b106 gt b108 b110 Free setting V f frequency 2 to 6 0102 b104 b106 b108 lt Free setting V f frequency 1 b110 b100 Free setting V f frequency 1 b100 gt Free setting V f frequency 2 Free setting V f frequency 3 to 6 0104 b106 b108 b110 lt b102 11440 Free setting V f frequency 1 2 b100 b102 gt Free setting V f frequency 3 E Free setting V f frequency 4 to 6 b106 b108 b110 lt b104 Free setting V f frequency 1 to 3 b100 b102 b104 b110 gt Free setting V f frequency 4 Free setting V f frequency 5 6 b108 b110 lt b106 Free setting V f frequency 1 to 4 b100 b102 b104 b106 gt Free setting V f frequency 5 Free setting V f frequency 6 b110 lt b108 Free setting V f frequency 1 to 5 b100 b102 b104 b106 gt Free setting V f frequency 6 b108 b110 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 3 b017 b019 lt Aceh oe perma a Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b015 gt Free setting electronic thermal 11120 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 b019 lt frequency 2 b017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 2 b015 b017 p Free setting lectronic thermal frequency 3 b019 The inverter displays a warning code when the data set as a target function code satisfies the
67. VDC 12 bits in Intelligent output 5 terminals gt RS485 Frequency setting circuit For terminating 500 to 2 000Q Er TTA resistor i Q 5 10 to 10 VDC 12 bits d koi Sead J 4 to 20 mA 12 bits EO a Option 1 output voltage tO output 0 to 10 V 10 bits Option 2 Analog monitor output current output 4 to 20 mA 10 bits Type D grounding for 200 V class model Type C grounding for 400 V class model See page 2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 1 Explanation of main circuit terminals Symbol R S T Connect to the AC power supply L1 L2 L3 Main power input Leave these terminals unconnected when using a regenerative converter HS900 series a oe Inverter output Connect a 3 phase motor a DC reactor Gonhection oon the jumper from terminals PD and P and connect the optional power factor reactor P RB External braking Connect the optional external braking resistor resistor connection e erminal is provided on models wi or less capacity RB ist ti The RB terminal i ided dels with 22 kW or I it a 5 fe ioe E Connect the optional regenerative braking unit BRD G laverter around Connect to ground for grounding the inverter chassis by type D grounding for 200 V class 9 models or type C grounding for 400 V class models 2 Explanation of control circuit terminals Symbol Terminal name Analog power This common terminal supplies power to frequency command
68. You can operate the inverter in different ways depending on how to input the operation and frequency setting commands as described below This section describes the features of operating methods and the items required for operation 1 Entering operation and frequency setting commands from the digital operator This operating method allows you to operate the inverter through key operations on the standard digital operator mounted in the inverter or an optional digital operator When operating the inverter with a digital operator alone you need not wire the control circuit terminals Items required for operation 1 Optional digital operator not required when you use the standard digital operator O O Digital operator 2 Entering operation and frequency setting commands via control circuit terminals This operating method allows you to operate the inverter via the input of operation signals from external devices e g frequency setting circuit and start switch to control circuit terminals The inverter starts operation when the input power supply is turned on and then an operation command signal FW or RV is turned on You can select the frequency setting method setting by voltage specification or current specification through the input to a control circuit terminal according to your system For details see Item 2 Explanation of control circuit terminals in Section 2 2 1 on pages 2 7 and 2 8
69. ZS 0 Hz detection signal 22 DSE speed deviation maximum 23 POK positioning completed 24 FA4 set frequency overreached 2 25 FA5 set frequency reached 2 26 OL2 overload notice advance signal 2 31 FBV PID feedback comparison 32 NDc communication line disconnection 33 LOG1 logical operation result 1 34 141Bh_ FM siginal selection C027 temperature 12 general purpose output YAO 0 output frequency 1 output current 2 output torque 4 output voltage 5 input power 6 electronic thermal 141Ch_ AM siginal selection C028 overload 7 LAD frequency 9 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature 11 output torque signed value 13 general purpose output YA1 00 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque 04 output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic 141Dh_ AMI siginal selection C029 thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 09 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature 14 urpose output YA2 Digital current monitor 01m MW _ 0 NO 1 NC 1420h _ Terminal 12 active state 1421h _ Terminal 13 active state R W_ 0 NO 1 NC 1422h__ Terminal 14 active state 1423h Terminal 15 active state C035 7W_ 0 NO 1 NC 1424h Alarm relay active state C036 0 NO 1 NC 1425h_ Reserved o Inaccessible ET 0 output during acceleration deceleration and 1426h kow curant indication signal C038 R W constant speed operation 1 output only durin
70. and Er Measuring instrument Moving iron voltmeter or p rectifier type voltmeter Remarks Effective value of full waves Reference values 200 V class models 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 400 V class 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Input current lin Current at R S and T Ir Is and l7 Moving iron ammeter Effective value of full waves When input currents are unbalanced lin Ir ls l7 3 Input power Win Across R S S T and T R War W12 Wis E Electrodynamometer type wattmeter Effective value of full waves 3 wattmeter method input power factor Calculated from the measured input voltage Ein input current lin and input power or rectifier type voltmeter Pfin Win Win Pfin x100 S3 Ew lin Output voltage Across U V V W and W U Method shown in the figure Effective value of Eour Ev Ev and EW below fundamental wave Output current lour Current at U V and W lu IV and IW Moving iron ammeter Effective value of full waves Notes 1 To measure the output voltage use an instrument that reads the effective value of the fundamental wave To measure the current or power use an instrument that reads the effective value of full waves 2 Since the inverter output waveform is controlled by PWM it has a large margin of error especially at low frequencies In many cases genera
71. cable must be 5m or less b The carrier frequency must be set to 2 5 kHz or less to meet an EMC requirement c The main circuit wiring must be separated from the control circuit wiring 4 Environmental requirements to be met when a filter is used a Ambient temperature must be within the range 10 C to 40 C b Relative humidity must be within the range 20 to 90 non condensing c Vibrations must be 5 9 m s 0 6 G 10 to 55 Hz or less 5 5 22kW 2 94 m s 0 3 G 10 to 55Hz or less 30 to 55kW d The inverter must be installed indoors not exposed to corrosive gases and dust at an altitude of 1 000 m or less Safety Instructions Precautions Concerning Compliance with UL and CUL Standards Standards to be met UL508C and CSA C22 2 No 14 05 The SJ700 series inverter is an open type AC inverter with 3 phase input and output intended for use in an enclosure The inverter supplies both voltage and frequency both of which are adjustable to an AC motor The inverter can automatically maintain a constant volts Hz ratio to enhance the motor capability throughout its entire speed range 1 Only 75C CU or equivalent wires must be used for wiring 2 Inverter models with the suffix L 200 V class models are suited to circuits that transmit current not exceeding 100k rms symmetrical amperes and with voltage of no more than 240 V 3 Inverter models with the suffix H 400 V class models are suited to circuits that transmit
72. ccc tcc eens 4 5 4 1 24 Position command monitor in absolute position control mode sss ss sss 4 5 4 1 25 Current position monitor in absolute position control mode sss ss 77st ttt 4 5 4 1 26 Trip Counter d080 Pe ee ee 4 z 5 4 1 27 Trip monitoring 1 to 6 d081 d082 to d086 sss sss ttre ttre ttt treet eens 4 6 4 1 28 Programming error monitoring d090 ear ie a ere ea acre en aca area are are ee ae a 4 6 4 1 29 DC voltage monitoring d102 Se 4 6 4 1 30 BRD load factor monitoring d103 D090 sss ttt street ttt eeees 4 6 4 1 31 Electronic thermal overload monitoring d104 ss sss ccr strstr ett t rete ees 4 6 4 2 Function Mode 2 e e en s s s susususnusunusunusunusnununn 4 K 7 4 2 1 Output frequency setting F001 A001 A020 C001 to C008 sss tts strstr 4 7 4 2 2 Keypad Run key routing F004 ee ee ee ee 4 7 4 2 3 Rotational direction restriction 0035 sss sct strstr ttt teeter eee eens 4 7 4 2 4 Frequency source setting A001 ee 4 E 8 4 2 5 Run command source setting A002 C001 to C008 C019 F004 55 rrssssrsrs gt 4 8 4 2 6 Stop mode selection 0091 F003 b003 b007 b088 sss srt t ttre ttre ees 4 9 4 2 7 STOP key enable b087 iat tga Rk gah yah acme gues yy seat Seca MR ya AAE E ANAE EAE AAE 4 9 4 2 8 Acceleration deceleration time setting F002 F003 A004 P031 C001 to C008 4 10 4 2 9 Base frequency setting A003 A081 A082 sss ttt t rrr ttre eters 4 11 4 2 10
73. class inverter models 2 AVR function The AVR function maintains the correct voltage output to the motor even when the voltage input to the inverter fluctuates The output voltage maintained by this function is based on the voltage specified by the AVR voltage select Use the AVR function select A081 to enable or disable the AVR function Description 00 The AVR function is always enabled AVR function select A081 The AVR function is always disabled The AVR function is disabled at deceleration 1 1 Disabling the AVR function at motor deceleration increases the energy loss on the decelerated motor and decreases the energy regenerated on the inverter which results in a shorter deceleration time 4 2 10 Maximum frequency setting Related code The maximum frequency setting function allows you to set the A004 A204 A304 Maximum frequency maximum frequency of the motor driven by the inverter seting teva motors The maximum frequency set here corresponds to the maximum level of each external analog input See Section 4 2 12 for example 10 V output of the input of 0 to 10 V voltage To switch the maximum frequency among the st 2nd and 3rd AVR settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent voltage input terminals Use the SET and SETS signals for switching select The inverter output voltage with the frequency ranging from the base 100 frequency to the maximum frequency is that selected by the AVR v
74. code Press the opt kit key Character 0 is determined A001 is displayed e Character 2 in the second digit is blinking HITACHI mol OG D oe oe 56 Si UO 2 Character 0 in the third digit is blinking Character 0 in the second digit is Since the third digit need not be changed blinking press the STR key to determine the character 0 Press the T7 key Character 9 is determined SC A QEA Character 9 in the first digit is blinking key twice 7 Press the Arey twice 4 Change the second digit of the code 6 End the change of the extended function code Hraci siae MEIEL o A0ea Nee Selection of code A029 is completed If a code that is not defined in the code list or not intended for display is entered the leftmost digit fourth digit character A in this example will start blinking again In such a case confirm the code to be entered and enter it correctly For further information refer to Section 4 2 80 Function code display restriction on page 4 74 Section 4 2 81 Initial screen selection on page 4 76 Section 4 2 82 Automatic user parameter setting on page 4 77 and Chapter 8 List of Data Settings 7 Press the key to display the data corresponding to the function code change the data with the Ayano key and then press tl key to store the ch
75. code displayed shows the monitored data corresponding to the function code Monitor display 1 E or Pressing the E or key with the monitored data displayed reverts to the display of the function code corresponding to the monitored data With the factory setting the monitor shows initially after power on Pressing the E key in this status changes the display to Function or extended function mode Pressing the S key with a function code displayed shows the data corresponding to the function code Data display 1 Data setting Pressing the or ey key respectively increases or decreases the displayed numerical data Press the key until the desired data is shown A A Pressing the key with numerical data displayed stores the data and then returns to the display of the corresponding function code Note that pressing the key with numerical data displayed returns to the display of the function code corresponding to the numerical data without updating the data even if it has been changed on display Down to the minimum limit 141 The content of the display varies depending on the parameter type 2 To update numerical data be sure to press the key after changing the data Chapter 3 Operation 2 Example of operation in full display mode b037 00 All parameters can be displayed in full display mode The d
76. condition specified in the Condition column in relation to the data set as the corresponding basic function code Each parameter target function code is readjusted to the data set as the basic function code by updating at the inverter start up In this case the base frequency is rewritten at parameter readjustment If the base frequency is updated to an inappropriate value a motor burnout may result Therefore if the warning is displayed change the current base frequency data to an appropriate value 2 3 the Jump hysteresis frequency width minimum 5 10 These parameters are checked even when the digital operator 02 is not specified for the frequency source setting A001 The current value of the jump center frequency is updated to the current value of the jump frequency value of Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection This chapter describes the precautions and procedures for the maintenance and inspection of the inverter 6 1 Precautions for Maintenance and INSPECCION iine enata cae eds 6 1 6 2 Daily and Periodic Inspections 6 2 6 3 Ground Resistance Test with a Megger 6 3 6 4 Withstand Voltage Test ee eeeeeeeeenees 6 3 6 5 Method of Checking the Inverter and Converter CirCuitS ccccceeeeseeeeeeeettteeeeeenaes 6 4 6 6 DC Bus Capacitor Life Curve ee 6 5 6 7 Output of Life Warning eee eeeeeeeeeees 6 5 6 8 Methods of Measurin
77. ction A044 A244 04 OHz range sensorless vector control 05 Vector control with sensor not available for A244 Reverse Run protection 00 Disabling counterrotation prevention b046 enable 01 Enabling counterrotation prevention Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 102 Torque LAD stop function The torque LAD stop function is effective when 03 sensorless vector control 04 OHz range sensorless vector control or 05 vector control with sensor is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 This function temporarily stops the frequency based deceleration function LAD when the torque limitation function operates TET onou e ea i A044 A244 curve selection 00 Quaddrant specific setting mode _ _ Analog ipul mode oa O O E Torque limit 1 b041 0 to 200 Rais powering in quadrant specific setting Torque limit 2 b042 0 to 200 Reverse regeneration in quadrant specific setting mode Torque limit 3 b043 0 to 200 sony powering in quadrant specific setting Torque limit 4 b044 0 to 200 Forward regeneration in quadrant specific setting mode Torque limit oas eeo Dsabing the toraue LAG stop uncon _ LADSTOP enable Terminal function C001 to C008 4 2 103 High torque multi motor operation The high torque multi motor operation function allows you to make a single inverter operate the two motors having the same specifications that drive a single load machine Th
78. cts cae AE canta ye cea 4 96 stop operation selection ccceeeeeeeeseeeeeees 4 9 STOP RESET key selection 0 sceeeeeeeeees 4 9 SIP eaen e e neta eet 4 57 synchronous operation 4 99 4 100 PIETE pliate a2 25 es fas ecten eee ecdvataseca oa E 4 110 LOSE T R daioi dgn eane akea ee aes 3 10 thermistor rnunana e ae 4 4 4 70 THM st esccecueehes Aeee atea eatea eE Rea beste 4 38 3 wire iInpUt a 2 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 56 AA E EE EEEE E 4 92 torque bias monitoring essssssesseesserre rrenen 4 3 torque biasing cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 101 4 102 torque DOOSt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 18 4 19 torque command monitoring 0 ee 4 3 torque control ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeees 4 102 torque limitation ceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 89 4 102 torque LAD Stop ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 4 91 Torque Monitoring cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 Trip COUNTED isinisi iiaeie 4 5 trip MONIMONING x Mees cose ce edo eieeate nh Aieead 4 6 troubleshooting 2 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 TRO ceo terse tas Beers a hte eee ae 4 92 TROI TRO2 r e ne eee eaters ste es 4 92 2 stage acceleration deceleration 4 31 QGH i eect aided calcite teas Pe a eens 4 31 UDG sh either eas 4 56 UL sinc Genet tee dedi dan dies aE eiaeia 2 17 unattended start protection
79. current not exceeding 100k rms symmetrical amperes and with voltage of no more than 480 V 4 The inverter must be installed in an environment that is rated for at least Pollution Degree 2 or equivalent 5 The ambient temperature must not exceed 50 C 6 The capacitor discharge time is 10 minutes or more Caution Care must be taken to avoid the risk of electric shock 7 Each model of the inverter has a solid state overload protection circuit or an equivalent feature for the motor 8 The table below lists the tightening torque and wire range specifications for the field wiring of inverter terminals Model No Required torque N m Wire range AWG SJ700 055LFF2 2 5 8 SJ700 075LFF2 2 5 6 SJ700 110LFF2 4 9 4 SJ700 150LFF2 4 9 2 SJ700 185LFF2 4 9 1 SJ700 220LFF2 8 8 1 or 1 0 SJ700 300LFF2 8 8 2 0 or 1 0 parallel SJ700 370LFF2 8 8 4 0 or 1 0 parallel SJ700 450LFF2 8 8 4 0 or 1 0 parallel SJ700 550LFF2 13 7 2 0 parallel SJ700 055LFF2 2 5 12 SJ700 075LFF2 2 5 10 SJ700 110LFF2 4 9 8 SJ700 150HFF2 4 9 6 SJ700 185HFF2 4 9 6 SJ700 220HFF2 4 9 6 or4 SJ700 300HFF2 4 9 3 SJ700 370HFF2 8 8 1 SJ700 450HFF2 8 8 1 75degC SJ700 550HFF2 8 8 2 0 vi Safety Instructions 9 This Instruction Manual indicates the sizes of the distribution fuse and circuit breaker that must be connected to this inverter The following table lists the inverse time and current ratings of the circuit breakers with rated voltage of 600 V to be connected to t
80. date of manufacture DATE on product nameplate or one 1 year from the date of installation whichever occurs first The warranty shall cover the repair or replacement at Hitachi s sole discretion of ONLY the inverter that was installed 1 Service in the following cases even within the warranty period shall be charged to the purchaser a Malfunction or damage caused by mis operation or modification or improper repair b Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and transportation c Malfunction or damage caused by fire earthquake flood lightening abnormal input voltage contamination or other natural disasters 2 When service is required for the product at your work site all expenses associated with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser 3 Always keep this manual handy please do not loose it Please contact your Hitachi distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals Chapter 1 Overview 1 3 Exterior Views and Names of Parts The figure below shows an exterior view of the inverter model SJ700 150LFF2 HFF2 to J700 220LFF2 HFF2 Front cover POWER ee ALARM lamp Digital operator Spacer cover Terminal block cover Specification label Exterior view of shipped inverter For the wiring of the main circuit and control circuit terminals open the terminal block cover For mounting optional circuit boards open the front cover Position to mount o
81. ee on ee ee 0 5 2 4 6 8 10 12 1415 0 5 2 4 6 8 10 12 1415 Carrier frequency kHz Carrier frequency kHz If you use the inverter with settings that exceed the rated maximum carrier frequency or derated output current with a maximum carrier frequency of 15 kHz the inverter may be damaged or its life may be shortened Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 36 Automatic carrier frequency reduction The automatic carrier frequency reduction function automatically reduces the carrier frequency according to the increase in output current To enable this function specify 01 for automatic carrier frequency reduction selection b089 Related code b089 Automatic carrier frequency reduction selection b083 Carrier frequency setting Range of data Automatic carrier b089 00 01 00 invalid 01 valid frequency reduction When the output current increases to 60 72 84 or 96 of the rated current this function reduces the carrier frequency to 12 9 6 or 3 KHz respectively This function restores the original carrier frequency when the output current decreases to 5 lower than each reduction start level Carrier frequency reduction start level Carrier frequency after Restoration level reduction kHz Less than 60 of rated current 15 0 60 55 of rated current 12 0 72 67 of rated current 9 0 84 79 of rated current 6 0 96 91 of rated current 3 0 Carrier freauenc 15 0k
82. enter an operation command Voltage across main circuit Note3 Setting higher initial out put frequency decrease during powerloss terminals P and N b054 results in over current trip due to sudden deceleration VPN V Setting lower b054 orlonger deceleration time b052 BATARE E E EAN OE A during powerloss b053 results in b051 undervoltage trip due to less Undervoltage level EPONE IPATTI EIOP EEE FEELT ETETE TESES PRE ALEPO EN E TEETE e i regeneration power Output frequency Time sec Hz Time sec Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions lt 2 gt DC voltage constant control during nonstop operation at momentary power failure 0050 02 no restoration b050 03 restoration to be done If momentary power failure occurs or the main circuit DC voltage drops during inverter operation the inverter decelerates the motor while maintaining the main circuit DC voltage at the level specified as the target nonstop operation voltage at momentary power failure OV LAD stop level b052 This function starts operating when all the following conditions are met 02 or 03 has been specified for b050 The inverter is running This function does not operate if the inverter has been tripped is in undervoltage status or stopped The control power fails momentarily or the main circuit DC voltage drops to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b051 or less This function operates w
83. explosive gases corrosive gases flammable gases grinding fluid mist or salt water Otherwise you run the risk of fire The inverter is precision equipment Do not allow it to fall or be subject to high impacts step on it or place a heavy load on it Doing so may cause the inverter to fail Safety Instructions 2 Wiring Be sure to ground the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Commit wiring work to a qualified electrician Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Before wiring make sure that the power supply is off Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Perform wiring only after installing the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or injury Do not remove rubber bushings from the wiring section Otherwise the edges of the wiring cover may damage the wire resulting in a short circuit or ground fault Make sure that the voltage of AC power supply matches the rated voltage of your inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire Do not input single phase power into the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not connect AC power supply to any of the output terminals U V and W Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire Do not connect a resistor directly to any of the DC terminals PD P and N Otherwise you run the risk of fire Connect an earth leakage breaker to the power input circuit Otherwise you run the risk of fir
84. external signal Assign function 47 PCLR to an intelligent input terminal Turning the PCLR on and off clears the position deviation data in the inverter To output a speed deviation error signal assign function 22 DSE to an intelligent input terminal and specify a deviation level as the speed deviation error detection level P027 If the deviation of the actual frequency motor speed from that specified by the frequency command exceeds the error detection level P027 the inverter will output the DSE signal o TASR Speed controlmode Control pulse setting 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position control mode MDO 90 phase shift pulse train MD1 Forward reverse operation command Pulse train mode setting 2 P013 with pulse train MD2 Forward operation ee ee train with reverse operation ee ee train Encoder pulse per revolution 128 109993 07 10009 10 P011 6553 10000 to 65535 Pulse count of encoder PPR setting pulses Position loop gain setting 1 P023 0 00 to A 100 0 Position oop gain o Position oop gain o gain Speed deviation error detection P027 0 00 to 99 99 or 100 0 to Deviation level at which to output the DSE level setting 120 0 Hz signal Motor poles setting 1st motor H004 2 4 6 8 or 10 er tpos Selection of the number of poles of the motor PCLR Clearance of position deviation data Terminal function C001 to C008 7 STAT Pulse train position command input enable Terminal func
85. fields Field configuration Slave address Exception code CRC 16 code Details of the field configuration are described below The exception response in reply to a query includes a function code that is the sum of 80h and the function code specified by the query The exception code in the exception response indicates the content of the error Function codes Exception codes The data to be written to a register exceeds the range of inverter specifications The inverter restricts the execution of the specified function Rewriting a register that cannot be rewritten during the operation Issuing an Enter command during the operation in undervoltage status Writing to a register during tripping because of undervoltage Writing to a read only register coil 4 137 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 5 Enter command storing the updates of register data Neither the command 06h to write data to a register nor the command 10h to write data to multiple registers can store the updates they made in the internal memory of the inverter Turning the inverter power off without storing the updates deletes them and restores the original register settings If you intend to store register updates in the internal memory of the inverter issue the Enter command as described below If you have updated a control constant you must recalculate the motor constants In such cases use register 0900h for recalculation as describ
86. function allows you to compensate for the secondary resistance to control the motor speed fluctuations due to the changes in the motor temperature This function can operate when the control mode is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor Use the thermistor model PB 41E made by Shibaura Electronics Corporation When using this function specify 02 NTC for the thermistor for thermal protection control b098 With a thermistor other than the PB 41E or another setting of the thermistor for thermal protection control the motor temperature cannot be detected correctly Temperature compensation aoe 00 Disabling the secondary resistance compensation thermistor enable Enabling the secondary resistance compensation 4 87 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 95 Motor constants selection Adjust the motor constant settings to the motor to be driven by the inverter When using a single inverter to drive multiple motors in the control mode based on VC VP or free V f characteristic calculate the total capacity of the motors and specify a value close to the total capacity for the motor capacity selection H003 H203 When the automatic torque boost function is used the motor constant settings that do not match the motor may result in a reduced motor or unstable motor operation You can select the motor constants that are used when the control mode is the sensorless vec
87. gt A004 A204 A304 1006 1206 1306_ Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 gt 1009 Home search speed setting P015 gt 1012 1212 Fequency lower limit setting A062 A262 gt 1015 1215 Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 Frequency upper limit setting A202 A220 A320 2 A061 A261 1016 1216 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 gt 11019 lt Home search speed setting a Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 P015 1021 221 lt Fequency lower limit settin 1025 1225 Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 lt k ene i A262 Ee A202 A220 A320 2 1031 1231 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 lt 10324 1232 Fequency lower limit setting A062 A262 lt 1035 17 235 121335 Ree O F001 multispeed 0 lt Start frequency adjustment b082 1 1036 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 lt 11037 Jog frequency setting A038 lt Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 Jump center frequency settings I ALI At 085 128541385 A202 A220 A320 2 lt gt 1232 Jump hysteresis frequency width settings 1 2 3 1086 Multispeed 1 to 15 settings A021 to A035 lt gt A063 A064 A065 A066 A067 A068 3 1091 1291 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 gt 1092 1292 Fequency lower limit setting A062 A262 gt 1095 1295 Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 A202 A220 A320 2 gt Ae ii
88. in units of 1 000 hours 4 1 17 Heat sink temperature monitoring Related code When the heat sink temperature monitoring function d018 is selected d018 Heat sink temperature the inverter displays the temperature of the internal heat sink of the monitoring inverter Display 0 0 to 200 0 in steps of 0 1 C 4 1 18 Motor temperature monitoring When the motor temperature monitoring function is selected the inverter displays the temperature of the thermistor connected between control circuit terminals TH and CM1 Use the thermistor model PB 41E made by Shibaura Electronics Corporation Specify 02 enabling NTC for the thermistor for thermal protection control function b098 Display 0 0 to 200 0 in steps of 0 1 C Note If 01 enabling PTC is specified for the thermistor for thermal protection control function b098 motor temperature monitoring is disabled Related code d019 Motor temperature monitoring b098 Thermistor for thermal protection control Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 19 Life check monitoring Related code When the life check monitoring function d002 is selected the inverter d022 Life check monitoring displays the operating life status of two inverter parts output from corresponding intelligent output terminals by using LED segments of the monitor The two targets of life check monitoring are O C 1 Life of the capacitor on the main circuit board Life check
89. including 4 5 d080 Trip Counter 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 times 4 5 d081 Trip monitoring 1 Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V running time hours B Z power on time hours d082 Trip monitoring 2 Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V running time hours 2 1 5 power on time hours d083 Trip monitoring 3 Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V running time hours power on time hours 7 i F 6 d084 Trip monitoring 4 Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V running time hours power on time hours T T d085 Trip monitoring 5 Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V running time hours power on time hours T 7 i d086 Trip monitoring 6 Factor frequency Hz current A voltage across P N V running time hours E power on time hours d090 Programming error monitoring Warning code 4 6 d102 DC voltage monitoring 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 6 d103 BRD load factor monitoring 0 0 to 100 0 4 6 d104 Electronic thermal overload monitoring 0 0 to 100 0 4 6 8 3 F i 3 Function Mode Default Setting during Change during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed or allowed or FF FEF FUF not not Output frequency setting 0 0 start frequency to maximum frequency or maximum frequency F001 2nd 3rd motors Hz 0 00
90. initializing the data 2 or trip histor clearing the trip history and initializing the data 1358h Country code for initialization b085 R W_ 0 Japan 1 EU 2 U S A Zz fe H zZ Za m Q A 2 ojlo alo g Frequency scaling conversion b086 Rw l1 to 999 l 0 1 1359h factor 1 135Ah STOP key enable b087 R W_ 0 enabling 1 disabling 2 disabling only stop 0 starting with 0 Hz 1 starting with matching 135Bh_ Restart mode after FRS b088 R W frequency 2 starting with active matching frequency d Inaccessible 5 ae Hel Hele R 135Dh _ Dynamic braking usage ratio b090 R W 0 to 1000 135Eh Stop mode selection b091 R W_ 0 deceleration until stop 1 free run stop 0 always operating the fan 1 operating the fan only 135Fh Cooling fan control b092 R W during inverter operation including 5 minutes after power on and power o naccessible 1360h 1361h naccessible E zi 0 disabling 1 enabling disabling while the motor is 1362h Dynamic braking control b095 R W stopped 2 enabling enabling also while the motor is stopped 1363h Dynamic braking activation level b096 R W_ 330 to 380 660 to 760 1 V 135Ch eserve 1364h Inaccessible __ S O Thermistor for thermal protection 0 disabling the thermistor 1 enabling the thermistor 1365h b098 RW ite PTC 2 enabling TRR NTC 1366h b099 R W 1367h b100 ree setting V f voltage 1 b101
91. inverter automatically store the parameters you readjusted sequentially as user parameters U001 to U012 You can use the stored data as a readjustment history To enable this function select 01 enabling automatic user parameter setting for the automatic user parameter setting function enable b039 The setting data entered in displayed on the digital operator is stored when the STR key is pressed Also the monitor screen code d is stored at the same time User parameter U001 retains the latest update of setting user parameter U012 the oldest update A functional parameter can be stored as only a single user parameter After all the 12 user parameters have been used to store functional parameter settings new functional parameter settings will be stored as user parameters on a first in first out basis that is the next parameter will be written to U012 storing the oldest update first Related code b039 Automatic user parameter setting function enable U001 to U012 User parameters Automatic user parameter setting 00 Disabling automatic user b039 gt function enable Enabling automatic user Related code 4 2 87 Stabilization constant setting H006 H206 H306 Motor stabilization constant 1st 2nd 3rd motors The stabilization constant setting function allows you to adjust the inverter A045 v f gain setting to stabilize the motor operation when the motor operation is unstable b083 Carrier frequ
92. is limited within value of A078 from the target value Setting 0 0 for the PID variation range A078 disables the PID variation limit function This function is deactivated when 0 0 is set on A078 PID output PID output range PID target value em 2 7 28 N S 5 PID variation range A078 7 Output of inverted PID deviation PID variation range A078 Time s Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions If the inverter is under the normal PID control and the PID operation result is a negative value the frequency command to the inverter will be limited to 0 Hz However when 02 enabling the inverted output is set for the PID Function Enable A071 the PID operation result to be output to the inverter is inverted if the result is a negative value Setting 02 for function A071 disables the PID variation limit A078 described above 8 PID gain adjustment If the inverter response is unsteady when the PID control function is used try to adjust gain settings as follows If the feedback data does not quickly follow the change in the target value gt Increase the P gain A072 If the feedback data is unstable although it quickly follows the change in the target value Reduce the P gain A072 If considerable time is required until the feedback data matches the target value Reduce the gain A073 If the feedback data fluctuates unsteadily Increase the gain A073 If the inverter respon
93. motor Function name Function code F302 low 3105h j Deceleration 1 time setting 3rd F303 high 3106h motor F303 low 3107h to 3202h Reserved ix List of registers 3rd control setting 3203h Base frequency setting 3rd A303 motor 3204h Maximum frequency setting 3rd A304 motor Paaa Reserved 3216h Multispeed frequency setting 3rd A320 high 3217h _ motor A320 low 3218h to 323Bh Reserved 323Ch Manual torque boost value 3rd A342 motor 323Dh Manual torque boost frequency A343 adjustment 3rd motor 323Eh V F characteristic curve A344 selection 3rd motor 323Fh to 326Ch Reserved 326Dh Acceleration 2 time setting 3rd A392 high 326Eh_ motor A392 low 326Fh Deceleration 2 time setting 3rd A393 high 3270h motor A393 low 3271h to 330B Reserved Electronic thermal setting 330Ch calculated within the inverter from current output 3rd motor Electronic thermal characteristic S90DN 3rd motor 330Eh to 3506h Reserved 3507h Motor stabilization constant 3rd motor 3508h to Reserved become Monitoring and setting items Data resolution ee 30 to maximum frequency 3rd motor 1 Hz 30 to 400 1 Hz Inaccessible 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 3rd motor 0 01 Hz pe ooo wow e pew ooo pew ooo 200 to 1000 0 1 0 reduced torque characteristic 1 constant torque characteristic 2 free setting Inaccessible Inacces
94. or start frequency to maximum frequency 122Eh Multispeed 12 setting A032 high R W 0 01 Hz 122Fh A032 low R W 5 ein P 1230h Multispeed 13 setting A033 a RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1231h A033 low RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 1232h Multispeed 14 setting A034 high R W 0 01 Hz 1233h A034 low RAN 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 1234h Multispeed 15 setting A035 high R W 0 01 Hz 4 145 1202h 1203h 1204h Run command source setting A002 R W 1205h J AT selection A005 1206h O2 selection A006 0 01 Hz e D x A S mi D o a 5 a gt D 2 Cc 53 lt 1 0 Hz a w te o S w ry a a oS o 3 a gt ay S Oo es T N g n G 2 fo a n is oO N 2 Q 5 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register R W Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Register J 1236h 1237h 1238h og frequency setting R W _ Start frequency to 999 0 01 Hz 0 free running after jogging stops disabled during operation 1 deceleration and stop after jogging stops disabled during operation 2 DC braking after jogging stops disabled during operation 1239h Jog Stopimode Ei le ee after jogging stops enabled during operation 4 deceleration and stop after jogging stops enabled during operation 5 DC braking after jogging stops
95. restart mode to apply after resetting with the restart mode after reset C103 When C102 03 starting with 0 Hz is selected regardless to C103 setting If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it starts the motor with matching frequency increase the retry wait time before motor restart 0003 You can select the alarm reset timing with the reset mode selection C102 You can also enable the reset signal to be output only when resetting an error alarm The RS terminal can be configured only as an a contact NO Do not use the RS terminal for the purpose of shutting off the inverter output The reset operation clears the electronic thermal and BRD counter data stored in the inverter and without this data the inverter may be damaged during operation Related code b003 Retry wait time betore motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold C102 Reset mode selection C103 Restart mode after reset C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Item Function Data or range of Description code data Retry wait time See the explanations of the retry after instantaneous power before motor trest rt b003 0 3 to 100 s failure or the retry after trip due to insufficient voltage Time to wait after reset until restarting the motor Restart frequency See the explanations of the retry after instantaneous power b007 0 00 to 400 0 Hz failure or the retry after trip due to insufficient voltage Resetting the trip whe
96. restarts on power PEE 1305h failure under voltage trip events b005 Rw o 16 times 1 unlimited Ea 1306h Phase loss detection enable b006 R W 0 disabling 1 enabling 1307h b007 high 1308h Restart frequency threshold b007 low RW to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 tripping 1 starting with O Hz 2 starting with rae matching frequency 3 tripping after deceleration 1309h Selection of retry after tripping b008 R and stopping with matching frequency 4 restarting with active matching frequenc IW Selection of retry count after i 130Ah booo Raw o 16 times 1 uniimitea Selection of retry count after 130Ch__ Retry wait time after tripping b011 R W_ 3 to 1000 1 sec Electronic thermal setting 130Dh calculated within the inverter b012 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 from current output 130Eh Electronic thermal characteristic b013 Rw 0 reduced torque characteristic 1 constant torque characteristic 2 free setting a 130Fh__ Reserved Inaccessible _ o 1310h rpe camra electronic thermal b015 R W 1 H 1311h een re a ENO to Rated current A 1313h aa Sepma a T EN Rated current 0 1 A 3 R N Free setting electronic thermal 1314h frequency b019 O to 400 Free setting electronic thermal 1315h current 3 b020 0 to Rated current 0 1 A 0 disabling 1 enabling during acceleration and das A constant speed operation 2 enabling during 1316h ee restriction operation b021 W_ constant
97. scale 1 0 to 50 0 kHz Primary delay filter Block diagram for pulse train frequency input 4 112 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 4 Communication Functions eaten Frequency source setting A002 Run command source setting C071 Communication speed selection C072 Node allocation C073 Communication data length selection C074 Communication parity selection C075 Communication stop bit selection C078 Communication wait time Communication mode selection The inverter can engage in RS485 communications with an external control system that is connected to the TM2 terminal block on the control circuit terminal block board of the inverter The SJ700 series inverter shares the ASCII communication protocol with the SJ300 and L300P series inverters 1 Communication specifications ASCII mode Modbus RTU mode 2 400 4 800 9 600 or 19 200 bps Selection with the digital operator Communication method Half duplex communication et transmission Transmission code ASCII code Binay code o Transmission method __ _ Transmission beginning with the lowest order bit Applicable interface RSS No parity even parity or odd parity 1 or 2 bits Fer Initiation only by a command from the external Initiation method control system Waiting time 10 to 1 000 ms 0 to 1 000 ms Setting with the digital operator 1 to N connection N Maximum of 32 inverters with the digital operator Overrun framing
98. setting 1552h a selection PI integral gain H071 Rw fo to 10000 0 1 Terminal selection P proportional 1553h ain setting H072 Rw o to 1000 1554h Gain switching time H073 Rw 0 to 9999 1555h to 4 156 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register oe Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Register yeo PEE re ee BOOT Rw fo tripping 1 continuing operation deuzo Deere on akpaneroneat eggo Rw fo tripping 1 continuing operation 1603h to ioan Reserved e recessie O S O 160Bh Sieen pulse per revolution PPR P011 zte i 160Ch Control pulse setting P012 R W 0 ASR 1 APR 160Dh_ Pulse train mode setting P013 R W 0 mode 0 1 mode 1 2 mode 2 160Eh Home search stop position setting P014 R W 0 to 4095 1 160Fh Home search speed setting P015 R aay ee to maximum frequency up to 004 Hz 1610h Home search direction setting P016 R W_ 0 forward 1 reverse 1611h Home search completion range P017 RW l0 to 10000 setting 1612h Home search completion delay time P018 R W l0 to 999 l setting TCE a Pah S HRPE SPE PERNO P019 Rw fo feedback side 1 commanding side Electronic gear ratio numerator 1614h setting P020 R W 1 to 9999 1 160Ch _ 160Dh _ Ea ee o my D O 1615h Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 R w 1 to 9999 setting i l 1 1616h_ Feed forward gain setting P022 R W 0 to 65535 0 01 1617h Position loop ga
99. setting A392 3600 s setting A393 3600 s Changing the time by the signal input to the 2CH terminal See example 1 Related code F002 F202 F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A092 A292 A392 Acceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A093 A293 A393 Deceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A094 A294 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile 1st 2nd motor A095 A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors A096 A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Select method to switch 4094 4294 Changing the time at the two stage acceleration deceleration frequency to Acc2 Dec2 profile See example 2 02 Valid only while the inverter is switching the motor between forward and reverse operations See example 3 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency A095 A295 Valid when 01 is specified for the select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 transition point 400 0 Hz profile A094 A294 See example 2 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency A096 A296 0 00 to Valid when 01 is specified for the Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 transition point 400 0 Hz profile A094 A294 See example 2 Example 1 When 00 is specified for A094 or A294 Example 2 When 01 is specified for A094 or A294 A095 A295 Output Z Output frequency
100. speed operation 3 enabling during acceleration and constant speed operation speed increase at regeneration 1317h Overload restriction setting b022 R W_ 200 to 2000 1318h Deceleration rate at overload b023 R w 110 to 3000 restriction 0 disabling 1 enabling during acceleration and MO constant speed operation 2 enabling during 1319h Overload restriction operation b024 R W_ constant speed operation 3 enabling during mode 2 acceleration and constant speed operation speed 131Ah Overload restriction setting 2 b025 R W_ 200 to 2000 Deceleration rate at overload 131Bh restriction 2 b026 R W 10 to 3000 131Ch_ Overcurrent suppression enable b027 R W 0 disabling 1 enabling Active frequency matching scan 131Dh b028 R W 200 to 2000 0 1 Active frequency matching 131Eh ecanctine constant b029 R W 10 to 3000 sec Active frequency matching 0 frequency at the last shutoff 1 maximum T31Fh restart frequency select b030 R W frequency 2 set frequenc 0 disabling change of data other than b031 when SFT is on 1 disabling change of data other than b031 and frequency settings when SFT is on 2 Software lock mode selection R W disabling change of data other than b031 3 disabling change of data other than b031 and frequency settings 10 enabling data changes during operation 1322h_ Reserved inaccessible 1323h p Tro b034 high 1324h Run power on war
101. stopped even if the FW signal is on To restart the motor turn on the FW signal again after confirming the recovery of inverter input power 02 No b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery restoration 03 Restoration b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery to be done Note 4 Each of the values of b051 and b052 must be the undervoltage 210V 200V class 410V 400V class level or more This function does not operate when undervoltage occurs The value of b051 must be less than that of b052 When b051 is much higher proportional gain b055 results in overcurrent by rapid acceleration after this function operates Note 5 When 02 or 03 is specified for b050 PI control is performed so that the internal DC voltage is maintained at a constant level Setting a higher proportional gain b055 results in a faster response However an excessively high proportional gain causes the control to diverge and results in the inverter easily tripping Setting a shorter integral time b056 results in a faster response However an excessively short integral time results in the inverter easily tripping Setting a lower proportional gain b055 results in undervoltage trip due to a voltage drop immediately after starting this function Example 1 Example 2 Voltage across main circuit terminals P and N Voltage across main circuit terminals P and N Vpn V
102. terminal es 7 Inaccessible ih RETR Rw ov sooo a ERR pe er 120Fh A013 R W_ 0 to O L input active range end voltage 1 1210h ae aes active range end A014 RW O L input active range start voltage to 100 1 O L input active range ae start frequency selection A015 RW 1212h External frequency filter time A016 R W const 1213h EaSy sequence function A017 R w 0 disabling 1 enabling selection 1214h Reserved R W _ Inaccessible 1215h A019 R W 0 binary 1 bit 1216h na Ton RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz aa net Ton RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz a we cI aN 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 121Dh ne ch a 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz ae ee Ton RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz en na min RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz sen ne co A 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz ee wer coy a 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 1226h 028 Ton RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz seen Ka Ton RW 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 122Ah Multispeed 10 setting A030 high R W_ 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz 122Bh A030 low RAN 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 122Ch Multispeed 11 setting A031 high R W 0 01 Hz 122Dh A031 low RAN 0
103. the ON state 1 Intelligent input terminal status is independent of the a b contact selection for the intelligent input terminals Example FW terminal and intelligent input terminals 7 2 and 1 ON Intelligent input terminals 8 Jel 5 A and 3 OFF ON The segment is on indicating the ON state ar E HE oFF f The segment is off indicating the OFF state OFF g Intelligent input terminals t r t t t t i t bee Eo ae 1 When input terminal response time is set terminal recognition is delayed refer 4 2 79 4 1 6 Intelligent output terminal status Related code When the intelligent output terminal status function d006 is selected d006 Intelligent output terminal status the inverter displays the states of the outputs from the intelligent output terminals This function does not monitor the states of the control circuit terminals but monitors those of the outputs from the internal CPU Intelligent input terminal status is independent of the a b contact selection for the intelligent input terminals Example Intelligent output terminals 12 and 11 ON Alarm relay terminal AL and intelligent output terminals 15 to 13 OFF Display 4 The segment is on indicating the ON state I T A OFF The segment is off indicating the OFF state Intelligent input terminals t t E A ee 4 1 7 Scaled output frequency monitorin Related code When the scaled output frequency monitoring d007 is selecte
104. the forward direction when the value of target position current position is positive or in the reverse direction when the value is negative If zero return operation described below is not performed the motor position detected at power on is assumed as the origin position data 0 When the operation command is turned on with 0 specified as the position setting positioning is completed without running the motor Specify 03 to only reset a trip for reset mode selection C102 If a value other than 03 is specified for reset mode selection C102 the current position counter is cleared when the inverter reset terminal reset key is turned on Be sure to specify 03 for reset mode selection C102 if you intend to use the value of the current position counter for operation after recovering the inverter from tripping by turning on the reset terminal reset key If the PCLR function is assigned to a terminal turning on the PCLR terminal clears the current position counter Note that the internal position deviation counter is also cleared at the same time In absolute position control mode the ATR terminal is ineffective Torque control is disabled In absolute position control mode the STAT terminal is ineffective Pulse train position control is disabled In absolute position control the home search function is disabled Note that the ORT terminal is used for the teaching function described below 4 107 Cha
105. then set HO01 01 again to retry the auto tuning Note 5 If you cancel the auto tuning midway with a stop command by pressing the STOP RESET key or turning off the operation command the constants set for auto tuning may remain in the inverter Before retrying the auto tuning initialize the inverter and then readjust the settings for the auto tuning Perform the same procedure also when you proceed to the normal inverter operation Note 6 If an attempt is made to perform the auto tuning with a free V f characteristic selected as the control mode the inverter will soon terminate the operation with the abnormal end code displayed Note 7 Even if the auto tuning has ended normally you cannot operate the inverter with the tuning data left If you intend to operate the inverter with the tuning data left be sure to switch the setting of motor constant selection H002 to 01 4 86 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 93 Online auto tuning function The online auto tuning function allows you to compensate the motor constants for alterations caused by the rise of motor temperature and other factors to ensure stable motor operation The online auto tuning function applies only to the 1st motor and 2nd motor controls Do not apply this function to the 3rd motor control 00 Hitachi general purpose motor data Motor constant selection H002 H202 Automatically tuned data Automatically tuned data online auto tuning enabled When usin
106. to 5 Hz the station No of the inverter is 01 Transmission frame configuration p STX Station No Command Data BCC ASCII code gt 0x 02 Ox 30 31 Ox 30 31 0x 30 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D Ox The contents of Station No to Data are converted into ASCII data and the ASCII data is XORed bit by bit The final XOR result is set as the block check code BCC In the above example of transmission frame BCC is calculated as follows 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 Xor 01 Xor al Xor 00 Xor 30 Xor 00 Xor 30 Xor 05 Xor 35 Xor 05 05 This result is used as BCC Reference ASCII code conversion table ack 6 cR D o0 ooo S a Ek 2 J a a ae aes ee oe a eee ee 5 ee a a a E ee 8B Oo o B Character data ASCII code 41 4 128 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 4 2 Communication in Modbus RTU mode 1 Communication protocol The communication between the inverter slave and external control system master is based on the following protocol 1 External control system Inverter Waiting time silent interval communication wait time C078 1 3 Communication trip limit time C077 If reception timeout occurs the inverter will operate according to the setting of the operation selection after communication error CO76 1 Query frame that is sent from the external control sys
107. to remove wristwatches and metal accessories e g bracelets before maintenance and inspection work and to use insulated tools for the work Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury 5 Others Do not discard the inverter with household waste Contact an industrial waste management company in your area who can treat industrial waste without polluting the environment Safety Instructions Precautions Concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC The SJ700 series inverter conforms to the requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC However when using the inverter in Europe you must comply with the following specifications and requirements to meet the EMC Directive and other standards in Europe A WARNING This equipment must be installed adjusted and maintained by qualified engineers who have expert knowledge of electric work inverter operation and the hazardous circumstances that can occur Otherwise personal injury may result 1 Power supply requirements a Voltage fluctuation must be 15 to 10 or less b Voltage imbalance must be 3 or less c Frequency variation must be 4 or less d Total harmonic distortion THD of voltage must be 10 or less 2 Installation requirement a A special filter intended for the SJ700 series inverter must be installed 3 Wiring requirements a Ashielded wire screened cable must be used for motor wiring and the length of the
108. to the main circuit The length of the cables connected to the thermistor must be 20 m or less PLC When connecting a contact to a control circuit terminal e g an intelligent input terminal use a relay contact e g crossbar twin contact in which even a very low current or voltage will not trigger any contact fault When connecting a relay to an intelligent output terminal also connect a surge absorbing diode in parallel with the relay Do not connect analog power supply terminals H and L or interface power supply terminals P24 and CM1 to each other Otherwise the inverter may fail 2 Layout of control circuit terminals H O2 AM FM TH FW 8 CM1 5 3 1 14 13 11 AL1 O OI AMI P24 PLC CM1 7 6 4 2 15 CM2 12 ALO AL2 Terminal screw size M3 3 Switching the input control logic In the factory setting the input control logic for terminal FW and intelligent input terminals is the sink logic To switch the input control logic to the source logic remove the jumper connecting terminals P24 and PLC on the control circuit block and then connect terminals PLC and CM1 with the jumper 2 18 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 4 Connecting a programmable controller to intelligent input terminals When using an external power supply When using the internal interface power supply Remove t
109. torque boost step by step Reduce the slippage compensation gain for the load is applied to the motor automatic torque boost step by step 1 Reduce the voltage compensation gain for the automatic torque boost step by step The inverter trips due to overcurrent 2 Reduce the slippage compensation gain for the when a load is applied to the motor automatic torque boost step by step 3 Reduce the voltage setting for the manual torque boost step by step Motor torque is insufficient at low speed The motor does not rotate at low speed This function cannot be selection for 3rd moter setting Manual torque boost valid 1 Increase the voltage setting for manual torque boost Adjustment item A042 A242 A047 A247 A046 A246 b083 A047 A247 A047 A247 A046 A246 A047 A247 A042 A242 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 19 DC braking DB settin The DC braking function allows you to apply DC braking to the motor according to the load on the motor You can control DC braking in two ways the external control through signal input to intelligent input terminals and the internal control to be performed automatically when the motor is started and stopped Note that the motor cannot be stopped by DC braking if the load on the motor produces a large moment of inertia Related code A051 DC braking enable A052 DC braking frequency setting A053 DC braking wait time A054 DC braking force during de
110. unattended start protection function allows you to make the C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions inverter trip with error code E13 displayed if the inverter power is turned on when an operation command has been turned on You can recover the inverter from tripping by performing the reset operation or turning the operation command off See example 1 If the inverter is recovered from tripping with the operation command left turned on the inverter will start operation immediately after recovery See example 2 The inverter can operate normally when an operation command is turned on after the inverter power is turned on See example 3 To use this function assign function 13 USP to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 The following charts show examples of the timing of the unattended start protection operation Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 ower ower Power w e e o eh e Spal a a Sh a en m USP USP USP RS RS im RS Alarm _ a Alarm j Alarm Output Output i R Output frequency frequency frequency PA Description Terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 USP Unattended start protection 4 2 51 Remote control function UP and DWN Related code The remote control function allows you to change the inverter output 101 Up Down memory mode selection frequency by operating the UP and DWN terminals intelligent input C291 t C008 Terminal 1
111. when the power failure duration exceeds the specified time See example 2 Retry wait time Before b003 0 3 to 100 s Time to wait until restarting the motor motor restart 00 Disabling the inverter from tripping Instantaneous power failure under voltage trip Disabling the inverter from tripping when the inverter is alarm enable 2 4 stopped or while the motor is being decelerated or stopped after the operation command has been turned off N mberofrest fts on Retrying the motor operation up to 16 times after power failure under voltage instantaneous power failure trip events Retrying the motor operation an unlimited number of times after instantaneous power failure Related code b001 Selection of restart mode b002 Allowable under voltage power failure time b003 Retry wait time before motor restart b004 Instantaneous power failure under voltage trip alarm enable b005 Number of restarts on power failure under voltage trip events b007 Restart frequency threshold b008 Selection of retry count after undervoltage C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function Restarting the motor with 0 Hz if the frequency becomes Restart frequency threshold b007 0 00 to 400 0 Hz less than the frequency set here during motor free running See examples 3 and 4 00 Tripping Restarting the motor with 0 Hz at retry Starting the motor with a matching frequency at retry Trip
112. which will increase the start current Such status may trigger the overload restriction operation or make the inverter prone to easily tripping because of the overcurrent protection Specifying 04 OSLV OHz range sensorless vector control or 05 V2 vector control with sensor for the VIF characteristic curve selection A044 disables the start frequency setting function Range of data Start frequency b082 0 10 to 9 99 Hz Setting of the start frequency adjustment Output frequency Output voltage 4 2 34 Reduced voltage start function Related code The reduced voltage start function enables you to make the inverter b036 Reduced voltage start selection increase the output voltage gradually when starting the motor b082 St rtrequency adjustment Set a small value for the reduced voltage start selection b036 if you intend to increase the start torque On the other hand setting a small value will cause the inverter to perform full voltage starting and to easily trip because of overcurrent Renae cidae J of data 00 Disabling the reduced voltage starting the reduced P starting selection 01 to 255 255 a about 1 53 s Start frequency b082 i Output frequency Output voltage oO oO So O Reduced Voltage Start 0 b036 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 35 Carrier frequency setting The carrier frequency setting function b083 allows you to change the carrier freque
113. years of use as standard 10 years is not the guaranteed lifespan but rather the expected design lifespan Note that the smoothing capacitor life will be shortened significantly if the inverter is used at a high ambient temperature or with a heavy load that requires a current beyond its rated current 6 7 Output of Life Warning The inverter can output a warning based on self diagnosis when the life of a life limited part smoothing capacitor on the circuit board or cooling fan except the smoothing capacitor in the main circuit in the inverter is expiring Use the life warning as an indication for the timing of part replacement For details see Sections 4 1 19 Life check monitoring on page 4 5 4 2 56 Intelligent output terminal setting on page 4 59 and 4 2 57 Intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection on page 4 60 The self diagnosis for the life warning is based on the expected design life which is not the guaranteed life of each part The actual parts life may vary depending on the inverter operation environment and conditions Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 8 Methods of Measuring the Input Output Voltages Current and Power This section describes the measuring instruments generally used to measure the input and output voltages output current and output power of the inverter Power supply Measurement item Input voltage En Measuring point Across R S S T and T R Er Es
114. you need to use a single phase power input contact your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor Do not operate the inverter with an phase loss power input or it may be damaged Since the factory setting of the inverter disables the phase loss input protection the inverter will revert to the following status if a phase of power supply input is interrupted R or T phase interrupted The inverter does not operate S phase interrupted The inverter reverts to single phase operation and may trip because of insufficient voltage or overcurrent or be damaged Internal capacitors remain charged even when the power input is under an phase loss condition Therefore touching an internal part may result in electric shock and injury When rewiring the main circuit follow the instructions given in Item 1 Wiring instructions Carefully note that the internal converter module of the inverter may be damaged if the imbalance of power voltage is 3 or more the power supply capacity is at least 10 times as high as the inverter capacity and 500 kVA or more or the power voltage changes rapidly Example The above conditions may occur when multiple inverters are connected to each other by a short bus line or your system includes a phase advanced capacitor that is turned on and off during operation Do not turn the inverter power on and off more often than once every 3 minutes Otherwise the inverter may be damaged 2 Inverter output ter
115. 0 H230 to H034 H234 4 88 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 96 Sensorless vector control Related code A001 Frequency source setting A044 A244 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors F001 Output frequency setting b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 H002 H202 Motor data selection 1st 2nd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H020 H220 Motor constant R1 1st 2nd motors H021 H221 Motor constant R2 1st 2nd motors H022 H222 Motor constant L 1st 2nd motors H023 H223 Motor constant lo 1st 2nd motors H024 H224 Motor constant J 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors The sensorless vector control function estimates and controls the motor speed and output torque on the basis of the inverter output voltage and output current and the motor constants set on the inverter This function enables the inverter to accurately operate the motor with a high starting torque even at a low frequency 0 3 Hz or more To use this function specify 03 for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 Before using this function be sure to make optimum constant settings for the motor with reference to Section 4 2 91 Motor constant
116. 0 to 6553 10000 to 65530 Factory setting O O 5 C082 Ol input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 Factory setting O O C083 02 input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 Factory setting O O 7 C085 Thermistor input tuning 0 0 to 999 9 1000 Factory setting O 2 4 72 c091 Debug mode enable Do not change this parameter which is intended for factory adjustment 00 x x C101 Up Down memory mode selection 00 not storing the frequency data 01 storing the frequency data 00 x O 4 56 5 C102 Reset mode selection 00 resetting the trip when RS is on 01 resetting the trip when RS is off 2 00 o o t enabling resetting only upon tripping resetting when RS is on 4 54 O a z F F z C103 Restart mode after reset 00 starting with 0 Hz 01 starting with matching frequency 02 restarting 00 o with active matching frequency C105 FM gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 2 O 4 73 ne 5 C106 AM gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 O O 3 C107 AMI gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 O O 4 74 a g c109 AM bias adjustment 0 to 100 0 si O C110 AMI bias adjustment 0 to 100 20 O O Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed
117. 0 x o 5 5 setting pozz Speed deviation error detection 4 99 to 99 99 100 0 to120 0 Hz 7 50 x x 4 96 level setting P028 Numerator of motor gear ratio 0 to 9999 1 x O 4 103 P029 Denominator of motor gear ratio 0 to 9999 1 C P031 Accel decel time input selection 00 digital operator 01 option 1 02 option 2 03 easy sequence 00 x 4 10 Positioning command input oe x A P032 Selection 00 digital operator 01 option 1 02 option 2 00 x O P033 Torque command input selection 00 O terminal 01 OI terminal 02 O2 terminal 03 digital operator 00 x x P034 Torque command setting 0 to 200 0 O O 4 98 Polarity selection at the torque PA x PAER P035 command input via O2 terminal 00 as indicated by the sign 01 depending on the operation direction 00 x x P036 Torque bias mode 00 disabling the mode 01 digital operator 02 input via O2 terminal 00 x x P037 Torque bias value 200 to 200 0 P038 Torque bias polarity selection 00 as indicated by the sign 01 depending on the operation direction 00 x x ae 4 98 P039 Speed limit f r torque controlled 0 00 to maximum frequency Hz 0 00 E O operation forward rotation P040 Speed limit for forque controlled 0 00 to maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O operation reverse rotation P044 DeviceNet comm watchdog timer 0 00 to 99 99 s 1 00 x x 00 tripping 01 tripping after decelerating and stopping the motor 02 P045 Inverter action on DeviceNet comm ignor
118. 00 d016 Cumulative operation RUN time 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 hr a a Z 4 4 monitoring d017 Cumulative power on time monitoring 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 hr 4 4 d018 Heat sink temperature monitoring 020 to 200 0 C 4 4 d019 Motor temperature monitoring 020 to 200 0 C 4 4 d022 Life check monitoring 1 Capacitor on main circuit board 2 Cooling fan speed drop III II II ton je I II II II lore 2 4 d023 Program counter 0 to 512 4 5 d024 Program number monitoring 0000 to 9999 4 5 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting during Change during Code Function name Monitored data or setting Default operation operation Page allowed or not allowed or not d025 User monitor 0 2147483647 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits including d026 User monitor 1 2147483647 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits including 4 5 d027 User monitor 2 2147483647 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits including d028 Pulse counter 0 to 2147483647 upper 4 digits 4 5 d029 Position setting monitor 1073741823 to 1073741823 upper 4 digits including 4 5 d030 Position feedback monitor 1073741823 to 1073741823 upper 4 digits
119. 000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P102 T sequence user parameter U 4 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P103 a Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P104 any Sequence user parameter U 4 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P105 T sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o E P106 on Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o 2 P107 T sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o i 4 95 oO g P108 TN sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o N gt amp Pt09 or Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P110 T sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P111 a Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P112 a sequence user parameter U 4 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P113 Rae Sequence user parameter U 4 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P114 A sequence user parameter U to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o p115 Easy sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o 8 16 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Easy sequence function Page 4 95 Setting Change Default during during Code Fu
120. 0100 SET Set 2nd motor data 0000010000000000 TL Enabling disabling torque limitation 0000000000000200 2CH 2 stage acceleration deceleration 0000020000000000 TRQ1 Torque limit selection bit 1 0000000000000400 0000040000000000 TRQ2 Torque limit selection bit 2 0000000000000800 FRS Free run stop 0000080000000000 PPI P PI mode selection 0000000000001000 EXT External trip 0000100000000000 BOK Braking confirmation 0000000000002000 USP Unattended start protection 0000200000000000 ORT Orientation 0000000000004000 CS Commercial power source enable 0000400000000000 LAC LAD cancellation 0000000000008000 SFT Software lock 0000800000000000 PCLR Clearance of position deviation 0000000000010000 AT Analog input voltage current select 0001000000000000 STAT Pulse train position command input enable 0000000000020000 SET3 3rd motor control 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 RS Reset 0004000000000000 ADD Trigger for frequency addition 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 F TM Forcible terminal operation 0000000000100000 STA Starting by 3 wire input 0010000000000000 ATR Permission of torque command input 0000000000200000 STP Stopping by 3 wire input 0020000000000000 KHC Cumulative power clearance 0000000000400000 F R Forward reverse switching by 3 wire input 0040000000000000 SON Servo On 0000000000800000 PID Enabling disabling PID 0080000000000000 FOC Forcing 0000000001000000 PIDC PID reset 0100000000000000 MI1
121. 02 faute tuned data wth online auto tuning funtion 00 x x 485 H003 Motor capacity 1st motor 0 20 to 75 00 kW Factory setting x x H203 Motor capacity 2nd motor 0 20 to 75 00 kW Factory setting x x H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor 2 4 6 8 10 poles 4 x x H204 Motor poles setting 2nd motor 2 4 6 8 10 poles 4 x x H005 Motor speed constant 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 10 000 to 80 000 1 590 O O 4 89 H205 Motor speed constant 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 10 000 to 80 000 1 590 O O Ho06 Morr stabilization constant 1st 0 to 255 100 o o H206 Moen stabilization constant 2nd 0 to 255 100 o o 4 79 H306 Moer stabilization constant 3rd 0 to 255 100 o o H020 Motor constant R1 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H220 Motor constant R1 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H221 Motor constant R2 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H221 Motor constant R2 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H222 Motor constant L 1st motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH Depending on motor capacity x x 4 88 H222 Motor constant L 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH Depending on motor capacity x x H223 Motor constant lo 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A Depending on motor capacity x x H223 Motor constant lo 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A De
122. 021 Electronic gear ratio denominator setting P022 Feed forward gain setting P023 Position loop gain setting Note 1 Block diagrams for the electronic gear function are shown below First order lag filter Feed forward gain Position loop gain Position Speed P019 00 FB command command Electronic gear Position control feedback First order lag filter Feed forward gain Electronic P019 01 REF Position Speed command command Position control feedback Note 2 You are recommended to set the feed forward gain setting P022 to 2 00 first when adjusting the feed forward gain To reduce the position deviation between the main motor and sub motor increase the feed forward gain If the motor operation is unstable reduce the feed forward gain Note 3 You are recommended to set the position loop gain P023 to 2 00 first when adjusting the loop gain To increase the positioning accuracy and position holding force increase the loop gain If a high loop gain results in unstable motor operation reduce the loop gain Note 4 1 50 lt N D lt 20 The electronic gear ratio N D must be within the following range N Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 D Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 4 101 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions lt Example of use Synchronous operation gt Master inverter Slave inverter EAP EBP O EAN EBN EAN EBN Main motor Sub motor
123. 03 digital output frequency connect a digital frequency counter to the FM terminal To monitor other output signals use an analog meter Digital output frequency See example 2 0 to maximum frequency Hz 3 0 to 133 75 of full scale is equivalent Output voltage See example 1 to 100 1 2 3 4 5 Input power See example 1 0 to 200 7 10 12 03 0027 p08 ae thermal overload See example 9 to 100 07 LAD frequency See example 1 0 to maximum frequency Hz 08 12 General analog YA 0 See example 1 0 to 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 Digital current monitoring See example 2 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the Motor temperature See example 1 5 motor temperature is 0 C or less 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the Heat sink temperature See example 1 motor temperature is 0 C or less 1 This signal is output only when the V F characteristic curve selection see Section 4 2 18 is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor Example 1 When 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 or 12 is Example 2 When 03 or 08 us selected slected t to lt 1 lt 1 Cycle T Fixed 6 4 ms Cycle T Varied Duty t T Varied Duty t T Fixed 1 2 2 Digital current monitoring If the output current matches the digital current monitor reference value C030 the FM terminal will output a signa
124. 04 enabling stopping after deceleration when the motor is stopped Enabling jogging while the motor is operating and enabling DC braking when the motor is stopped Note 1 To perform the jogging operation always turn on the JG terminal before turning on the FW or RV terminals Follow this sequence of command inputs also when using the digital operator to enter operation commands Example 1 es E es w f l Output a W frequency When 00 01 or 02 is specified for the jog stop mode A039 the jogging operation will not be performed if the FW signal is turned on earlier than the JG signal Example 2 i Deceleration FW operation V Jogging pperation Output frequency Free running a Acceleration according to the setting of b088 When 03 04 or 05 is specified for the jog stop mode A039 the jogging operation will be performed even if the FW signal is turned on earlier than the JG signal However the motor will stop after free running if the JG signal is turned off earlier than the FW signal Note 2 You must set DC braking data if you specify 02 or 05 for the jog stop mode A039 See Section 4 2 19 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 43 2nd 3rd motor control function SET and SET3 This motor control function allows you to switch the inverter settings to control three different types of motors To use this function assign function 08 SET and
125. 1 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vi 05 command This command reads the trip history data from the inverter Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 05 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Data Data monitored at tripping 440 bytes See Note 9 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BOG BIC ene code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 11 The inverter stores the data trip history on the last six times of tripping together with the total trip count 8 bytes Total trip count Trip1data Trip 6 data Monitoring item Unit Magnification Data size Remarks Trip factor 8 bytes Factor code z ere spyte 04 commana Inverter status C 8 bytes prea g Output frequency Hz x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code i Cumulative run
126. 1 Multispeed select setting CF1 to CF4 and SF1 to SF7 A019 A020 to A035 C001 toC008 ia aah Shere eras eee ana Bok Sate wa ele Beier es Seale m eye wee we wat Gus eee a 4 47 4 2 42 Jogging JG command setting A038 A039 C001 to C008 sss sett ttre 4 49 4 2 43 2nd 3rd motor control function SET and SET3 sss ss ssc t ttre 4 50 4 2 44 Software lock SFT function b031 C001 to C008 sss ttt ttt t ttre 4 51 4 2 45 Forcible operation from digital operation OPE function A001 A002 C001 to C008 neal ah aE al R AREARE Gaevle Sw al far das tay al wr RAAR ERA RARER a eal E ate alle aly a 4 51 4 2 46 Forcible operation from terminal F TM function A001 A002 C001 to C008 4 51 4 2 47 Free run stop FRS function b088 b033 b007 b028 to b030 C001 to C008 4 52 4 2 48 Commercial power source switching CS function b003 b007 C001 to C008 4 53 4 2 49 Reset RS function 6003 b007 C102 C103 C001 to C008 sss ster teres 4 54 4 2 50 Unattended start protection USP function C001 to C008 ss sss trees 4 56 4 2 51 Remote control function UP and DWN C101 C001 to C008 s ss se rere 4 56 4 2 52 External trip EXT function C001 to C008 s sss ttt r ttt ttt treet ees 4 57 4 2 53 3 wire interface operation function STA STP and F R C001 to C008 4 57 4 2 54 Control gain switching function CAS A044 C001 to C008 H005 H050 to H052 H070 to H072 TEREE ANEELA ERN eto facia Fea
127. 1 to A143 A095 and A096 A131 A132 b015 to b020 b021 01 02 or 03 b022 and b023 b024 01 02 or 03 b025 and b026 b050 01 b051 to b054 b095 01 or 02 b090 and b096 b098 01 or 02 b099 and C085 b120 01 b121 to b127 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions No Display condition Parameter displayed when the display condition is met 7 _ One of C001 to C008 05 and A019 00 A028 to A035 8 One of C001 to C008 06 A038 and A039 9 One of C001 to C008 07 A053 to A055 and A059 1 F202 F203 A203 A204 A220 A244 A246 A247 A261 A262 A292 A293 A294 b212 B213 H203 H204 and H206 One of C001 to C008 08 and A041 01 A246 and A247 32 7i of C001 to C008 08 and A244 00 or A241 A242 and A243 oe of C001 to C008 08 and A244 03 or 599 H205 H250 H251 and H252 One of C001 to C008 08 and A244 04 H260 and H261 One of C001 to C008 08 A244 03 or 04 and H202 00 H220 to H224 One of C001 to C008 08 A244 03 or 04 and H202 01 or 02 H230 to H234 z of C001 to C008 08 and A094 01 or nage and A296 39 One of C001 to C008 11 b088 F302 F303 A303 A304 A320 A342 A343 A392 A393 One of C001 to C008 17 b312 b313 and H306 C102 C101 C040 and C041 C040 and C111 C042 and C043 C055 to C058 C063 C045 and C046 48 One of C021 to C008 33 C142 to C144 C145 to C147 C148 to C150 1 C151 to C153 One of C021 to C008 38 C157 to C159 4 One of C021 to C008 42 C064
128. 100 s Time to wait until restarting the motor motor restart Restart frequency b007 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Setting of the minimum level for frequency threshold adjustment Related code b088 Restart mode after FRS b003 Retry wait time before motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold Active frequency matching scan start b028 o 20 x ratedcurent e 2 00 x rated current frequency Active frequency matching scan time b029 0 10 to 30 00 s constant F Frequency set when the inverter output has Active frequency beer shut off matching restart b030 frequency select 0111 _ Maximum frequency a set frequency Example 1 Restarting with 0 Hz Example 2 Restarting with matching frequency FW FW FRS oz els FRS oe Nie Free running Free running Motor Motor i a speed speed 0 7 7 s Restarting with 0 Hz 0 piney i Restarting with matching frequency The inverter restarts the motor with 0 Hz The inverter waits for the retry wait time after the FRS regardless of the motor speed The setting of retry terminal has been turned off detects the motor speed wait time is ignored for restarting with 0 Hz frequency and restarts the motor with the matching If the inverter restarts the motor with 0 Hz when frequency without stopping it If the inverter trips because the motor speed is high the inverter may trip of overcurrent when it restarts the motor with matching because of overcurrent freq
129. 11 upper digit 2 digit 2 4 Starting register address 02 4 Starting register address lower 02 lower digit 2 digit 2 5 Number of registers upper 00 5 Number of registers upper 00 digit digit 6 Number of registers lower 02 6 _ Number of registers lower digit 02 digit 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit E5 7___ Number of data bytes 3 04 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 34 8 Updating data 1 upper digit 00 i aad 9 Updating data 1 lower digit 04 10 Updating data 2 upper digit 93 11 Updating data 2 lower digit EO 12 CRC 16 code upper digit 9E 13 CRC 16 code lower digit OF 1 If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return any response 2 Note that the starting register address is 1 less than the actual address of the register to which the data is to be written first 3 As the number of bytes do not specify the number of registers but the number of bytes to be actually updated If the function to write data to multiple registers cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response viii Exception response The master system requests the inverter slave to return a response upon reception of a query other than broadcasted queries The inverter must return the response that matches the query it has received However if an error is found in a query the inverter will return an exception response The exception response consists of the following
130. 114 100 Analog input TAITI 10V Maximum frequency for reverse operation 4 2 15 External analog input O Ol O2 filter settin Related code The external analog input filter setting function allows you to set the A016 External frequency filter time input voltage input current sampling time to be applied when frequency const commands are input as external analog signals You can use this filter function effectively for removing noise from the frequency setting circuit signal If the noise disables the stable operation of the inverter increase the setting Setting a larger value makes the inverter response slower The filtering constant is set value 1 to 30 x 2 ms When the setting is 31 factory setting a hysteresis of 0 1 Hz is added to the filtering constant 500 ms Range of data Description Setting of 1 to 30 Set value x 2 ms filter External frequency filter A016 1 to 30 or 31 Setting of 31 500 ms filter fixed with hysteresis time const of 0 1 Hz 4 2 16 V f gain setting Related code The V f gain setting function allows you to change the inverter output A045 V f gain setting voltage by specifying the rate of the output voltage to the voltage 100 A082 AVR voltage select selected with the AVR voltage select function A082 If the motor operation is cranky try to increase the gain setting Range of data Description V f gain setting A045 20 to 100 Setting of the rate of reducing th
131. 152 Logical output signal 4 selection 2 C153 Logical output signal 4 operator selection C154 Logical output signal 5 selection 1 C155 Logical output signal 5 selection 2 C156 Logical output signal 5 operator selection C157 Logical output signal 6 selection 1 C158 Logical output signal 6 selection 2 C159 Logical output signal 6 operator selection The logical output signal operation function allows you to make the inverter internally perform a logical operation of output signals This function applies to all output signals except to logical operation results LOG1 to LOG6 Three types of operators AND OR and XOR are selectable Output saai FLUO Too Loo Output signal 2 LOGx AND LOGx OR E 7 LOGx XOR I im A The necessary parameters depend on the logical output signal to be operated The following table lists the parameters to be set for each logical output signal Selected signal Operation target 1 Operation target 2 Operator selection selection selection 33 Logical output signal 1 LOG1 C142 C143 C144 34 Logical output signal 2 LOG2 C145 C146 C147 Example To output the AND of the running signal 00 RUN and set the frequency overreached signal 02 FA2 as the logical output signal 1 LOG1 to the intelligent output terminal 2 Intelligent output terminal 2 C002 33 LOG1 Logical output signal 1 selection 1 C142 00 RUN Logical output si
132. 17 SET3 to two of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 Turn the SET and SET3 terminals on and off for switching 3 08 SET Set 2nd motor data Terminal function C001 to C008 SETS 3rd motor control You can switch the following functional settings with the SET or SET3 terminal F002 F202 F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A003 A203 A303 Base frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A004 A204 A304 Maximum frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A020 A220 A320 Multispeed frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A041 A241 Torque boost method selection 1st 2nd motors A042 A242 A342 Manual torque boost value 1st 2nd 3rd motors A043 A243 A343 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 1st 2nd 3rd motors A044 A244 A344 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors A046 A246 Voltage compensation gain setting for automatic torque boost 1st 2nd motors A047 A247 Slippage compensation gain setting for automatic torque boost 1st 2nd motors A061 A261 Frequency upper limit setting 1st 2nd motors A062 A262 Frequency lower limit setting 1st 2nd motors A092 A292 A392 Acceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A093 A293 A393 Deceleration 2 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A094 A294 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile 1st 2nd motors A095 A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors A096 A296 De
133. 2 4 Main circuit DC voltage at tripping V 3 5 6 Related code d081 Trip monitoring 1 d082 Trip monitoring 2 d083 Trip monitoring 3 d084 Trip monitoring 4 d085 Trip monitoring 5 d086 Trip monitoring 6 Cumulative inverter running time until tripping h Cumulative inverter power on time until tripping h 1 See Section 5 1 1 Protective functions 2 When the inverter status is in stop mode as a trip history monitored value can be zero 3 When grounding fault is detected at power on monitored value can be zero Display by trip monitoring 1 Factor of 2 Frequency 3 Current at 4 Main circuit DC 5 Cumulative 6 Cumulative es at tripping tripping voltage at tripping running time power on time H 308 iey Eeg hg Sol 1B e m a r I l I I l l I a ee ea 2 If the inverter has not tripped before the inverter displays 4 1 28 Programming error monitorin Related code If an attempt is made to set the data conflicting with other data on the inverter the d090 Programming error monitoring inverter displays a warning The PRG program lamp lights up while the warning is displayed until the data is rewritten forcibly or corrected For details on the programming error monitoring function see Section 5 2 Warning Codes 4 1 29 DC voltage monitoring Related code When the DC voltage monitoring is selected the inverter displays the DC voltage d102 DC voltage monitoring
134. 2 Coil 1 is used to turn on an operation command Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 OA 1 Slave address OA 2 Function code 05 2 Function code 05 3 Starting coil number 00 3 Starting coil number upper 00 upper digit 2 digit 4 Starting coil number 00 4 Starting coil number lower 00 lower digit 2 digit 5 Updating data upper digit FF 5 Updating data upper digit FF 6 Updating data lower digit 00 6 Updating data lower digit 00 7 __CRC 16 code upper digit 8D 7 ___CRC 16 code upper digit 8D 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 41 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 41 1 If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return any response 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to be read first If the function to write data to a coil cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response iv Writing data to a specified register 06h This function writes data to a specified register Example When setting 50 Hz as the base frequency setting A003 in the inverter at slave address 5 Since register 1203h to store the base frequency setting A003 has a data resolution of 1 Hz specify 50 0032h as the updating data to set 50 Hz Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexa
135. 2 Communication Functions ccc ee eee eee 4 113 4 4 1 Communication in ASCII mode ccccc ccc 4 116 4 4 2 Communication in Modbus RTU mode ccc c ttre ee 4 129 Chapter 5 Error Codes a o1 N Error Codes and Troubleshooting Hradt eGo iega ana tees e erase ar Geert es ena eee 5 1 5 1 1 Error COdeS tt nents 5 1 5 1 2 Option boards error codes sete eens 5 5 5 1 3 Trip conditions monitoring ME A jut aia aca AASE A AE A E ge adh EA twa aN E N wast a Seay 5 9 Warning Codes sie ee een nents 5 10 Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection Sr 6 an 1 6 1 1 Daily inspection Soa E A I E a uataual eF eteal leon haya a asecehaoahans ver acecal E ar aes waters EE evar 6 1 6 1 2 Cleaning Bae ate AE a ae S A aa aug He Snare goer Atay ct ae ule auatavaree ie amp aleraye ae we amp aerecer arte a avers 6 1 6 1 3 Periodic inspection Se 6 E 1 Daily and Periodic Inspections ee 6 2 Ground Resistance Test with a Megger Si we Ik Ee ek SE Ee ee Ee ak ee 6 3 Withstand Voltage Test Se 6 3 Method of Checking the Inverter and Converter Circuits sss ss sssc tres r test te seen 6 4 DC Bus Capacitor Life Curve ccc ten eee nee eens 6 5 Output of Life Warning Pe re 6 5 Methods of Measuring the Input Output Voltages Current and Power ss ssss7 6 6 Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 7 2 Specifications ala Mat Rati Tas aa Eaa Bal tia Gap bo se no a T Gat bd se ant eu eh aparece athe Gat
136. 34 Torque limited Torque is ns uffi cient during Reduce the overload restriction level to lower than b021 b041 the torque limited operation at 3 operation the torque limiter level to b044 low frequencies pao ales Motor rotation is inconsistent Increase the motor constant J from the set value H024 H034 Note 1 Always set the carrier frequency b083 to 2 1 kHz or more If the carrier frequency is less than 2 1 kHz the inverter cannot operate the motor normally Note 2 When driving a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than the inverter adjust the torque limit 0041 to b044 so that the value a calculated by the expression below does not exceed 200 Otherwise the motor may be burnt out a torque limit x inverter capacity motor capacity Example When the inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit value is calculated as follows based on the assumption that the value a should be 200 Torque limit 0041 to b044 a x motor capacity inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 4 Torque biasing function The torque biasing function allows you to make the inverter bias the torque command generated during the operation in speed control mode You can effectively use this function for inverter applications to a lift or other elevating machines Data or range of data DO oo Noe S O P036 1_ Bias setting from the digit
137. 39 Intelligent input terminal setting Related code You can assign the functions described below to intelligent input C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions terminals 1 to 8 To assign the desired functions to the terminals specify the desired data listed in the table below for terminal settings C001 to C008 For example C001 corresponds to intelligent input terminal 1 You can select the a contact or b contact input for individual intelligent input terminals You can assign one function only to an intelligent input terminal If you have attempted to assign a function to two or more intelligent input terminals the function is assigned to only the terminal to which you have last attempted assignment Function data NO no assign is assigned to other terminals and those terminals are ineffective in terms of functions After assigning the desired functions to intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 confirm that the assigned functions have been stored on the inverter RV Reverse RUN command Operation command 03 Multispeed operation function 4 47 CF4 Multispeed 4 setting binary operation 06 _ JG Jogging Jogging operation function 4 49 08 _ SET Set 2nd motor data _____ 2nd 3rd motor control function 4 50 09 _ 2CH 2 stage acceleration deceleration_ _ 2 stage acceleration deceleration function 4 30 3 wire input function 23 Q001 10 0098 Remote control UP DWN function Multispeed oper
138. 59 0 5 to 15 kHz Unit kHz DC braking time for starting DC braking carrier frequency setting 1 Carrier frequency for DC braking Use the DC braking carrier frequency setting A059 to specify the carrier frequency for DC braking Note that setting the carrier frequency above 5 kHz automatically lowers the braking force See the following graph showing the operation of the DC braking force limiter Maximum braking force DC braking carrier frequency kHz DC braking force limiter 4 20 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 External DC braking Assign function 07 DB to terminal function C001 to C008 Turn the DB terminal on and off to control the direct braking regardless of the setting of DC braking enable A051 Adjust the braking force by adjusting the DC braking force setting A054 When you set the DC braking wait time A053 the inverter output will be shut off for the set period of delay and the motor will run freely during the period DC braking will be restarted after the delay When setting the DC braking time with function A055 or for the DC braking operation via the DB terminal determine the length of time in consideration of the heat generation on the motor Select the braking mode by the DC braking edge or level detection for DB input A056 and then make any other necessary settings suitable for your system a Edge mode A056 00 b Level mode A056 01
139. 7 LOGS logical operation result 5 38 LOG6 logical operation result 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning 40 WAF cooling fan speed drop 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF heat sink overheat warning 43 LOC low current indication signal 44 M01 general purpose output 1 45 M02 general purpose output 2 46 M03 general purpose output 3 47 M04 general purpose output 4 48 M05 general purpose output 5 49 M06 general purpose output 6 50 IRDY inverter ready 51 FWR forward rotation 52 RVR reverse rotation 53 MJA major failure 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 When alarm code output is selected for C062 functions ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 ACn alarm code output are forcibly assigned to intelligent output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 respectively Default 01 Setting during operation allowed or not Change during operation allowed or not O 00 03 07 40 X X X X X ojojo o 05 Page _FF _FEF _FUF 4 60 Analog monitoring C027 FM siginal selection 00 output frequency 01 output current 02 output torque 03 digital output frequency 04 output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 08 digital current monitoring 09 motor temperature 10 heat sink temperature 12 general purpose output YAO
140. 9990 1000 to 6553 10000 to 655300 hr 0 x e 4 64 b035 Rotational direction restriction 00 enabling both forward and reverse rotations 01 enabling 00 x x 4 7 only forward rotation 02 enabling only reverse rotation b036 Reduced voltage start selection 0 minimum reduced voltage start time to 255 maximum 6 x o 4 42 o reduced voltage start time oO i ae 00 full display 01 function specific display 02 user setting F fo b037 Function code display restriction 03 data comparison display 04 basic display 04 x 12 4 76 ae A 00 screen displayed when the STR key was pressed last 01 y b038 Initial screen selection d001 02 d002 03 d003 04 d007 05 F001 01 x O 4 78 Automatic user parameter 5 F A b039 setting function enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 x O 4 79 Ee 5 00 quadrant specific setting 01 switching by terminal 02 b040 Torque limit selection analog input 03 option 1 04 option 2 00 x O Torque limit 1 forward driving m n gt aes b041 in 4 quadrant mode 0 to 200 no disabling torque limitation 150 x O 5 Torque limit 2 3 b042 reverse regenerating in 0 to 200 no disabling torque limitation 150 x O 4 92 E 4 quadrant mode Torque limit 3 reverse driving en b043 in 4 quadrant mode 0 to 200 no disabling torque limitation 150 x O O i Torque limit 4 b044 forward regenerating in 0 to 200 no disabling torque limitation 150 x s 4 quadra
141. A C frequency range to be jumped Jump hysteresis frequency i width settings 1st 2nd 3rd A064 A066 0 00 to 10 00 Hz Setting of the half bandwidth of the A068 frequency range to be jumped settings 1 Setting of 0 Hz disables the jump frequency function Output frequency Par ere A065 Frequency command 4 2 22 Acceleration stop frequency setting The acceleration stop frequency setting function allows you to make the inverter wait upon starting the motor until the slipping of the motor becomes less when the load on the motor causes a large moment of inertia Use this function if the inverter has tripped because of overcurrent when starting the motor This function can operate with every acceleration pattern regardless of the setting of the acceleration curve selection A097 Range of data Acceleration stop frequency A069 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Setting of the frequency at which to setting stop acceleration Acceleration stop time A070 0 0 to 60 0 s Setting of the length of time to stop frequency setting acceleration Output frequency Related code A069 Acceleration stop frequency setting A070 Acceleration stop time frequency setting A069 Frequency command Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 23 PID function The PID function allows you to use the inverter for the process control on fluid flow airflow and pressure To enable this function specify 01 lenabled or 02 inverted data out
142. A104 Or input active range end Ol L input active range start current to 100 100 x O gt 3 3 A105 OIF L input start frequency 00 external start frequency 01 0 Hz 00 x O 4 14 2 enable o aq O2HL input active range start jog to 100 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o T frequency o E 7 P Z a2 02H input active range end 400 to 100 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o M frequency A113 O2 L input active range start 100 to 02 end frequency rate 100 x O voltage A114 02 input active range end 02 start frequency rate to 100 100 x O voltage 5 g A131 Agee eration curve constants 01 smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling 02 x O f z setting 4 31 Sd Deceleration curve constants Rp 4 A132 setting 01 smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling 02 x PE 00 digital operator 01 keypad potentiometer 02 input via O 03 input via gt A141 Operation target frequency Ol 04 external communication 05 option 1 06 option 2 07 pulse string 02 x O selection 1 A 5 frequency input oa r 00 digital operator 01 keypad potentiometer 02 input via O 03 input via 4 13 o E A142 Peter ape frequency Ol 04 external communication 05 option 1 06 option 2 07 pulse string 03 x O E frequency input fo NENE ae ee T A143 Operator selection asa A142 01 subtraction A141 A142 02 multiplication 00 x S A145 Frequency to be added
143. A3h Logical output signal 6 operator selection C159 R W 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR f o 14A4h Response time of intelligent input terminal 1 C160 0 to 200 DOO 14A5h Response time of intelligent input terminal 2 C161 0 to 200 O Response time of intelligent input terminal3 C162 R W 0to200 0 Response time of intelligent input terminai 4 C163 R W Oto200 gt S S Response time of intelligent inputterminai5 C164 R W 0to200 gt S So Response time of inteligentinputterminal6 C165 R W Oto200 gt S o 14AAh Response time of intelligent inputterminal7 C166 R W Oto200 S S Response time of inteligent input terminai8 C167 ___ R W f0to200 S S 14ACh S time of intelligent input terminal C168 0 to 200 EGA rene Sn 4 155 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 0 disabling auto tuning 1 auto tuning eel n 1501h fAuto tuning Setting tuning fAuto tuning Setting Ho R aon 2 auto tuning with rotation 0 Hitachi standard data 1 auto tuned data NE 1502h Motor data selection 1st motor H002 R W A data with online auto tuning ES RW poles 1 4 poles 2 6 poles 3 8 poles 1504h Motor mann setting 1st motor H004 R W 4 10 poles 1505h H005 high R W Motor speed constant 1st motor 0 to 80000 1506h P H005 low 4507h Motor stabilization constant 1st H006 E to 255 a motor 1508h to 1515h H020 high Ei E constant R1 1st motor gh RW to 65530 0 001 Q
144. Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 13 When the read parameter is an selection item the Data part contains the code data corresponding to the selection The code data corresponding to H003 or H203 motor capacity selection is as follows Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Japan or U S A mode 0 2 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 pisces BO8D 0002 E ace teal ete AE EE EE EE went EEE meet Wage EU mode b085 01 0 2 kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 4 0 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Japan or U S A mode 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 oian b085 OO ON OE zr riasa sgia ereet oraa Ma rasa s alie aeaa i aaaea aee oszen EU mode b085 01 5 5kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 For the value contained in the Data part when the read parameter is a numerical item see the list of function codes Example When the setting of the acceleration 1 time F002 is 30 00 seconds the Data part contains 3000 Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 123 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions viii 07 command This command writes data to a specified setting item in the inverter Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control
145. F R Related code The 3 wire interface operation function allows you to use automatic C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions reset contacts e g pushbutton switches to start and stop the inverter Specify 01 control circuit terminal block for the run command source setting A002 Assign function 20 STA 21 STP and 22 F R to three of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 to enable the control operations described below Assigning the STP function to an intelligent input terminal disables the functions of the FW and RV terminals The figure below shows the inverter outputs according to terminal operations Operation commands FW and RV EXT terminal RS terminal Alarm output terminal STA Starting the motor Terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 STP Stopping the motor F R Switching the motor operation 22 ee direction ON STA OFF STP ON OFF F R Forward rotation Output frequency Reverse rotation 4 57 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 54 Control gain switching function CAS The control gain switching function allows you to set and switch between two types of gains and time constants for the speed control system with proportional and integral compensations when the V F characteristic curve selection is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor To use this function assign funct
146. General purpose input 1 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 MI2 General purpose input 2 0000000004000000 CAS Control gain setting 0400000000000000 MI3 General purpose input 3 0000000008000000 UP Remote control UP function 0800000000000000 MI4 General purpose input 4 0000000010000000 DWN Remote control DOWN function 1000000000000000 MI5 General purpose input 5 0000000020000000 DWN Remote control data clearing 2000000000000000 MI6 General purpose input 6 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 MI7 General purpose input 7 0000000080000000 OPE Forcible operation 8000000000000000 MI8 General purpose input 8 4 118 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Note 6 The table below lists the functions of the intelligent input terminals and corresponding hexadecimal data for 12 command For details see the explanation of the intelligent input terminal functions Data hexadecimal Description Data hexadecimal Description 0000000000000001 0000000100000000 0000000000000002 AHD analog command holding 0000000200000000 0000000000000004 CP1 multistage position settings 0000000400000000 0000000000000008 selection 1 0000000800000000 0000000000000010 CP2 multistage position settings 0000001000000000 0000000000000020 selection 2 0000002000000000 0000000000000040 CP3 multistage position settings 0000004000000000 0000000000000080 selection 3 0000008000000000 0000000000000100 ORL Zero r
147. HITACHI INVERTER SJ700 2 SERIES INSTRUCTION MANUAL Read through this Instruction Manual and keep it handy for future reference N HITACHI Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi SJ700 2 Series Inverter This Instruction Manual describes how to handle and maintain the Hitachi SJ700 Series Inverter Read this Instruction Manual carefully before using the inverter and then keep it handy for those who operate maintain and inspect the inverter Before and during the installation operation inspection and maintenance of the inverter always refer to this Instruction Manual to obtain the necessary related knowledge and ensure you understand and follow all safety information precautions and operating and handling instructions for the correct use of the inverter Always use the inverter strictly within the range of the specifications described in this Instruction Manual and correctly implement maintenance and inspections to prevent faults occurring When using the inverter together with optional products also read the manuals for those products Note that this Instruction Manual and the manual for each optional product to be used should be delivered to the end user of the inverter Handling of this Instruction Manual The contents of this Instruction Manual are subject to change without prior notice Even if you lose this Instruction Manual it will not be resupplied so please keep it carefully No part of th
148. HK25 7 5 SJ700 075LFF2 8 8 8 M5 R8 5 2 4 EX60 60A HK35 11 SJ700 110LFF2 14 14 14 M6 R14 6 4 5 RX100 75A HK50 15 SJ700 150LFF2 22 22 22 M6 22 6 4 5 RX100 100A H65 18 5 SJ700 185LFF2 30 22 30 M6 nn 4 5 RX100 100A H80 E 38 S8 Sj 22 SJ700 220LFF2 38 30 38 M8 yA 8 1 RX225B 150A H100 S 60 S8 30 SJ700 300LFF2 60 22x 2 30 M8 P 8 1 RX225B 200A H125 CB60 S8 37 SJ700 370LFF2 100 38 x 2 38 M8 100 8 8 1 RX225B 225A H150 45 J300 450LFF2 100 38x 2 38 M8 100 8 8 1 RX225B 225A H200 55 SJ300 550LFF2 150 60x 2 60 M10 150 10 8 1 RX400B 350A H250 5 5 SJ700 055HFF2 2 2 2 M5 R2 5 2 4 EX50C 30A HK20 7 5 SJ700 075HFF2 3 5 3 5 3 5 M5 3 5 5 2 4 EX50C 30A HK25 11 SJ700 110HFF2 5 5 5 5 5 5 M6 R5 5 6 4 5 EX50C 30A HK35 15 SJ700 150HFF2 8 8 8 M6 8 6 4 5 EX60B 60A HK35 18 5 SJ700 185HFF2 14 14 14 M6 14 6 4 5 EX60B 60A HK50 3 22 J700 220HFF2 14 14 14 M6 14 6 4 5 RX100 75A HK50 30 SJ700 300HFF2 22 22 M6 22 6 4 5 RX100 100A H65 37 SJ700 370HFF2 38 22 M8 38 8 8 1 RX100 100A H80 45 SJ700 450HFF2 38 22 M8 38 8 8 1 RX225B 150A H100 55 J700 550HFF2 60 30 M8 R60 8 8 1 RX255B 175A H125 Note Cable gauges indicate those of HIV cables maximum heat resistance 75 C 5 Connecting the control circuit to a power supply separately from the main circuit If the protective circuit of the inverter operates to open the magnetic contactor in the input power supply circuit the inverter control circu
149. Hz 12 0kHz 9 0kHz 6 0kHz 3 0kHz 0 50 1 a Moo Output current 60 72 84 96 The rate of carrier frequency reduction is 2 kHz per second The maximum limit of carrier frequency change by this function is the value specified for the carrier frequency setting b083 the minimum limit is 3 kHz Note If 3 kHz or less frequency has been specified for b083 this function is disabled regardless of the setting of b089 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 37 Dynamic braking BRD function The dynamic braking BRD function is provided in the SJ700 220LFF HFF and other models that have the built in BRD circuit With this function the energy regenerated by the motor is consumed by an external resistor i e the energy is converted to heat You can effectively use this function in your system for example to operate the motor as a generator by rapidly decelerating the motor To use this function make the following settings Function code_ Data or range of data 00 Disabling the BRD operation Setting of the dynamic braking usage ratio in units of 0 1 The inverter will trip when the set rate is exceeded cH lt s lt B Related code b090 Dynamic braking usage ratio b095 Dynamic braking control b096 Dynamic braking activation level Dynamic braking b090 2 usage ratio 0 1 to 100 0 ON ON ON BRD 5 100 seconds operation t1 t2 t3 Usage rate
150. Hz to the allowable maximum frequency 163Ah T constant of pulse train frequency P056 eal to 200 0 01 sec 163Bh__ Pulse train frequency bias P057 R W _ 100 to 100 1 A 163Ch Pae Wal Frequency i P058 O to 100_ 163Dh_ Reserved inaccessie 163Eh PO60 HIGH 163Eh eee Ee setting 0 PO60 LOW 1640h P061 HIGH EZIN Multistage position setting 1 Poel Om 1 PEZON Multistage position setting 3 reseh Multistage position setting 4 on Multistage position setting 5 164Ah P066 HIGH r464Bh Multistage position setting 6 PO66 LOW Se P067 HIGH 164Dh Multistage position setting 7 P067 LOW 164Eh Zero return mode selection P068 R W_ 0 Low 1 High1 2 High2 164Fh__ Zero return direction selection P069 R W O FW 1 RV 1650h_ _ Low speed zero return frequenc P070 R W_ 0 to 1000 SS 1651h__ High speed zero return frequency P071 0 to 40000 1652h m P P072 HIGH R W 0 to 536870912 when P012 2 qe53h en range specification forward f 5072 LOW 0 to 2147483647 when P012 3 1 1654h P073 HIGH R W_ 536870912 to 0 when P012 2 1655h Position range specification reverse PO73 LOW R W 2147483647 to 0 when P012 3 1 eon SEE peer page a 1666h_ asy sequence user parameter U 00 P100 RIW Oto es880 f 1 1667h _ Easy sequence user parameter U 01 P101 Rw O0tob5530 _ 1 1668h_ Easy sequence user parameter U 02 P102 RW 0to65530 1 1669h_ Easy sequence us
151. ID function is enabled or the inverter is not operating the motor 4 2 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 8 Actual frequency monitoring The actual frequency monitoring function is effective only when a motor equipped with an encoder is connected to the inverter and the feedback option board SJ FB is mounted in the inverter When the actual frequency monitoring function d008 is selected the inverter displays the actual operating frequency of the motor regardless of the motor control method A044 or A244 Display Forward operation 0 00 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 in steps of 0 1 Hz Reverse operation 0 0 to 99 9 in steps of 0 1 Hz 100 to 400 in steps of 1 Hz Note To use this monitoring function set the encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting P011 and the number of motor poles H004 or H204 correctly Related code d008 Actual trequency monitoring P011 Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor H204 Motor poles settina 2nd motor Related code d009 Torque commana monitoring P033 Torque command input selection P034 Torque command setting 4 1 9 Torque command monitoring The torque command monitoring function is effective when you have selected control by torque for the vector control with sensor When the w l torque command monitoring function d009 is selected the inverter A044 Vii ois tenn Civic selecteion displays the va
152. MI4 general purpose input 4 60 MI5 01 a o general purpose input 5 61 MI6 general purpose input 6 62 MI7 general purpose input 7 63 MI8 general purpose input 8 65 AHD analog command holding 66 CP1 multistage position settings selection 1 67 CP2 multistage position settings selection 2 68 CP3 multistage position settings selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit function 70 ORG Zero return trigger function 71 FOT forward drive stop 72 ROT reverse drive stop 73 SPD speed position switching 74 PCNT pulse counter 75 PCC pulse counter clear no NO no assignment Intelligent input terminals C011 Terminal 1 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C012 Terminal 2 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 O C013 Terminal 3 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C014 Terminal 4 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C015 Terminal 5 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x 0 4 47 C016 Terminal 6 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C017 Terminal 7 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C018 Terminal 8 active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O C019 Terminal FW active state 00 NO 01 NC 00 x O 2 When the emergency stop function is enabled SW1 ON 18 RS and 64 EMR are forcibly written to parameters C001 and C003 respectively You cannot arbitrarily write 64 to C001 If the SW1 signal is turned off and then turned on
153. MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 4 47 MO1 MO2 MO3 MI4 MO5 MO6 4 60 Modbus RTU ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees MDA spats cor ce destin cates a ERS S aE MONIO MOE a a motor constant eee motor gear ratio motor temperature monitoring 00 4 4 Multispeed 4 setting ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 4 46 Multistage position switching 4 108 Multistage speed position determination time cc eee 4 47 4 108 NDC istae r e a E a ee E EEES 4 67 NO Seine ak ie eae 4 47 NOING Ssrcccsscactesssiectecteceepecariecnoctecassened 4 47 4 61 nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failUre eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 4 81 E EE E E ena ecte ced nas vate te comes ads 2 7 2 18 O E E ES 2 7 2 18 4 12 O2DCi a e tee a eat E I 4 71 OD is areont eeo tatea Potenie anat 4 28 4 29 Odesa esat cee rie can ee OY eens 4 71 Offline auto tuning ccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 82 OIF ae cei AAA te cet E as 4 68 O EERE EEEE en conta ee fore sete 2 7 2 18 OI DG retara e e a a ae Aet 4 71 O MED AAE EA 4 40 OER EEEE R 4 39 online auto tuning sesssssneeseesnnrnrrrreesnrr nne 4 84 ONT isc tet toh ett ante ENA 4 64 OPE eiicess T 3 3 4 8 4 51 operating MethodSS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 3 1 operation after Option error ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 77 Operation frequency cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
154. Maximum frequency setting A004 ee ee ee osnsosnssnuanosusnusnsussnnn 4 a 11 4 2 11 External analog input setting O O2 and Ol A005 A006 C001 to C008 4 12 4 2 12 Frequency operation function A141 to A143 A001 AO76 ss sts sce ste reees 4 13 4 2 13 Frequency addition function A145 A046 C001 to C008 5555555555555555 4 14 4 2 14 Start end frequency setting for external analog input A011 to A015 A101 to A105 A111 to A114 Se 4 14 4 2 15 External analog input O Ol O2 filter setting A016 s sss scr r ttt trees 4 15 4 2 16 Vif gain setting A045 A082 ee 4 oe 15 4 2 17 VIF characteristic curve selection A044 b100 b101 s scssctts tts set sees 4 16 4 2 18 Torque boost setting A041 A042 A043 H003 H004 gt 5555555555555555 21 gt 4 18 4 2 19 DC braking DB setting A051 to A059 C001 to C008 555r sss rts ttre tte 4 20 4 2 20 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A062 sss sss tt rt ttt ttt teeter ees 4 24 4 2 21 Jump frequency function A063 to A068 rhe eae ee eae ee a eee en oe ar ra RATE 4 25 4 2 22 Acceleration stop frequency setting A069 A070 A097 ssc ttt t rte 4 25 4 2 23 PID function A001 A005 A071 to A076 d004 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 C044 ais tary a EATE a tu a Mayet ules a a GENEN UE tea Ct ye sah a et S Ser EEEE ra ace EET ay lata E a ANS 4 26 4 2 24 Two stage acceleration deceleration function 2CH F002 F003 A092 to A096 C001 to C008 ee 4 30 4 2 25 Acceleration decelerat
155. O O 4 7 0 0 to 100 0 when PID function is enabled F002 Acceleration 1 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 O O 4 10 F202 Acceleration 1 time setting 2nd 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 o o 4 10 motor F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 3rd 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 o o 4 10 motor F003 Deceleration 1 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 O O 4 10 F203 Deceleration time setting 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 O O 4 10 F303 Deceleration time setting 3rd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 30 00 O O 4 10 F004 Keypad Run key routing 00 forward rotation 01 reverse rotation 00 x x 4 7 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings 8 4 Extended Function Mode jogging stops enabled during operation 04 deceleration and stop after jogging stops enabled during operation 05 DC braking after jogging stops enabled during operation Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed or allowed or _FF FEF FUF not not Frequency source setting 00 keypad potentiometer 1 01 control circuit terminal block 02 digital A001 operator 03
156. OFF No input ON No input Reversible e e A 00 OFF Input assignedtoan 01 Example 1 ON Input Nonreversible intelligent input 01 OEE Input terminal ON No input Reversible 00 OFF Input Example 2 ON Input i ri OFF input Sora ON No input 00 No input Reversible When the AT Addition of signals on O L and area 01 TE Input Nonreversible function is not OI L terminals assigned to any z Addition of signals on O L and intelligent input 92 Ol L terminals Input Reversible terminal iti i E i 03 Addition of signals on O L and No input Nonreversible Ol L terminals Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Example 1 When Example 1 When the motor operation the motor operation is not reversible is reversible Main frequency command via the Ol Main frequency command via the Ol or O terminal or O terminal f02 Auxiliary Auxiliary frequency 0 frequency command via the O2 terminal command via the O2 terminal fol f02 fo fo2 fol f02 Va Actual frequency command fo f02 Actual frequency command 4 2 12 Frequency operation function The frequency operation function allows you to use the result of an arithmetic operation on two frequency commands as the actual frequency command or PID feedback data To use the operation result as the actual frequency command specify 10 for the frequency source setting A001 To use the operation result as the PID feedback d
157. OPE SR is used Turning on the AT terminal enables the pot on 04 Switching between the O2 terminal OPE SR terminal and the control with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O2 L terminal AT A005 selection Using the O2 terminal independently 00 Using the O2 terminal for auxiliary frequency command nonreversible in addition to the O and 02 A006 Ol terminals selection Using the O2 terminal for auxiliary frequency command reversible in addition to the O and Ol terminals Disabling the O2 terminal Note that whether frequency commands are input to the O2 L terminal and whether the motor operation is reversible depend on the combination of settings of functions A005 and A006 and whether function 16 AT is assigned to an intelligent input terminal as shown in the table below When the motor operation is reversible the inverter operates the motor in a reverse direction if the sum of the frequencies specified by the main frequency and auxiliary frequency commands is less than 0 even when the forward operation FW terminal is on Even when no wire is connected to the 02 terminal reverse operation of the motor may occur and prolong the acceleration time if the output voltage fluctuates near 0 V Whether to input an auxiliary F A006 A005 a Main frequency command frequency command Reversible terminal nonreversible via the O2 L terminal v LOFF No inpul 00 03 ON No input Nonreversible i 01
158. Output frequency monitoring inverter displays the output frequency The inverter displays 0 00 when the frequency output is stopped The Hz monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the output frequency Display 0 00 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 in steps of 0 1 Hz Note When you have selected the digital operator as the device to input frequency setting commands A001 02 you can change the output frequency setting by using the Aand or V key only while the inverter is operating the motor The change in output frequency made in this mode can be reflected in the frequency setting function F001 Press the STR key to write the new frequency over the currently selected frequency setting You cannot change the output frequency while the PID function is enabled or the inverter is not operating the motor 4 1 2 Output current monitoring Related code When the output current monitoring function d002 is selected the d002 Output current monitoring inverter displays the output current The inverter displays 0 0 when the current output is stopped The A monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the output current Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 A 4 1 3 Rotation direction monitoring Related code When the rotation direction monitoring function d003 is selected the d003 Rotation direction monitoring inverter displays the motor operation direction The RUN lamp lig
159. Overload b022 b025 Rated current x 0 5 to Current at which to trigger the overload restriction restriction setting rated current x 2 0 A Deceleration rate Deceleration time to be applied when the overload at overload b023 b026 0 1 to 30 0 s restriction operates restriction Terminal function C001toC008 39 Terminal to switch the overload restriction setting Related code b021 Overload restriction operation mode b022 Overload restriction setting b023 Deceleration rate at overload restriction b024 Overload restriction operation mode 2 b025 Overload restriction setting 2 b026 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 2 C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C040 Overload signal output mode C041 Overload level setting C111 Overload setting 2 Overload restriction level b022 b025 Deceleration according to the deceleration rate at overload restriction Output current Maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 Target frequency F001 Inverter output frequency b023 b026 4 39 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Overload nitice function The overload notice function allows you to make the inverter output an overload notice signal before tripping because of overload You can use this function effectively to prevent the machine e g a conveyor driven by the inverter from being overloaded a
160. P Alarm output Related code P001 Operation mode on expansion card 1 error P002 Operation mode on expansion card 2 error expansion card 1 and 2 P001 P002 RUN Continuation of operation errors Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 89 Optimum accel decel operation function The optimum accel decel operation function eliminates the need for acceleration time and deceleration time settings for the motor operation by the inverter Conventional inverters required you to adjust the acceleration and deceleration time according to the status of the load Based on fuzzy logic this function automatically adjusts the acceleration and deceleration time to minimize the inverter performance This function adjusts the acceleration time so that during acceleration the inverter output current does not exceed the current level specified by the deceleration rate at overload restriction when the overload restriction is enabled or about 150 of the inverter s rated current when the overload restriction is disabled This function adjusts the deceleration time so that during deceleration the output current does not exceed about 150 of the inverter s rated current or the DC voltage in the inverter circuits does not exceed about 370 V in the case of 200 V class models or about 740 V in the case of 400 V class models Thus this function automatically adjusts the acceleration and deceleration time appropriately on a real time basis e
161. P switches No 1 and No 2 125 kbps DIP switch setting 250 kbps 500 kbps Setting of MAC ID DIP switches No 3 to No 8 Dip switch setting The left most switch indicates the highest order bit of MAC ID Therefore the 7 AG ID SN ose BRU F OFF NA32 NA32 NA16 NA8 NA4 NA2 NAI example of switch settings shown on the left indicates the following MAC ID AA KA AES 0 1 2 0 2 alee 0 2 0 2 1 2 29 hexadecimal 41 decimal NAT Note For details refer to the instruction manual for the option board Chapter 5 Error Codes 4 Error indications by protective functions with the easy sequence function used Display on Display on remote operator Description digital operator ERR The inverter will display the error code shown on the right if an invalid instruction is found in a downloaded BP program 1 Invalid instruction ii PRG CMD The inverter will display the error code if the PRG E terminal is turned on when no program has been loaded Nestin coirt The inverter will display the error code shown on the 9 right if subroutines for instructions and next HE PRG NSTI error i 3 a instructions are nested in more than eight levels The inverter will display the error code shown on the right if the for or another instruction to start nesting is not found at the jump destination of a go to instruction and the next or another instruction to en
162. R 2147483647 to 2147489007 ot Da Pas o oo e iv List of registers Register F 3 T ee Data 1103h F002 high 1104h Acceleration 1 time setting F002 low R W 1 to 360000 0 01 sec 1105h F003 high T106 Deceleration 1 time setting F003 low R W 1 to 360000 0 01 sec 1107h Keypad Run key routing F004 R W _ 0 forward rotation 1 reverse rotation ae 1108h to 4 144 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions v List of registers function modes Register Function name Function code R W Monitoring and setting items Data resolution 0 keypad potentiometer 1 control circuit terminal block 2 digital operator 3 RS485 4 option 1 5 1201h Frequency source setting A001 R W option 2 6 pulse train input 7 easy sequence 10 operation function result 1 control circuit terminal block 2 digital operator 3 RS485 4 option 1 5 option 2 Base frequency setting A003 R W_ 30 to maximum frequency 1 Hz Maximum frequency setting A004 R W_ 30 to 400 1 Hz switching between O and Ol terminals 1 switching between O and O2 terminals 2 switching between O terminal and keypad potentiometer 3 switching between OI terminal and keypad potentiometer 4 switching between O2 and keypad potentiometer 0 single 1 auxiliary frequency input via O and Ol terminals nonreversible 2 auxiliary frequency input via O and Ol terminals reversible 3 disabling O2
163. SET3 3rd 2 z 9 n motor control 18 RS reset 20 STA starting by 3 wire input 21 STP stopping C004 Terminal 4 function by 3 wire input 22 F R forward reverse switching by 3 wire input 23 PID PID a x Q C005 Terminal 5 function disable 24 PIDC PID reset 26 CAS control gain setting 27 UP remote 09 x O A 5 control UP function 28 DWN remote control DOWN function 29 DWN remote x C008 Terminal 6 fungtion control data clearing 31 OPE forcible operation 32 SF1 multispeed bit 1 33 o3 o3 18 C007 Terminal 7 function SF2 multispeed bit 2 34 SF3 multispeed bit 3 35 SF4 multispeed bit 4 36 02 x O SF5 multispeed bit 5 37 SF6 multispeed bit 6 38 SF7 multispeed bit 7 39 OLR overload restriction selection 40 TL torque limit enable 41 TRQ1 torque limit selection bit 1 42 TRQ2 torque limit selection bit 2 43 PPI P PI mode 4 46 selection 44 BOK braking confirmation 45 ORT orientation 46 LAC LAD cancellation 47 PCLR clearance of position deviation 48 STAT pulse train position command input enable 50 ADD trigger for frequency addition A145 51 F TM forcible terminal operation 52 ATR permission of torque command input 53 KHC cumulative power clearance 54 SON servo on 55 FOC forcing 56 g X MI1 general purpose input 1 57 MI2 general purpose input 2 58 MI3 C008 Terminal 8 function general purpose input 3 59
164. T Forward drive stop 72 ROT Reverse drive stop 73 SPD Switching between speed and position controls 45 ORT Teaching Reset mode selection C102 03 pial data is not initialized by a 4 3 13 Operation in absolute position control mode Operation Output frequency If the position value specified by the position setting is small the Home search completion range setting P017 inverter decelerates the motor for positioning before its speed reaches POK signal a Home search completion delay time setting P018 In absolute position control mode the inverter runs the motor until the machine reaches the target position according to the following settings and then sets the machine into the position servo lock state lt 1 gt Position setting lt 2 gt Speed setting frequency setting lt 3 gt Acceleration and deceleration time The servo lock state is held until the operation command is turned off In absolute position control mode the frequency and acceleration deceleration settings selected at absolute position control are applied If the position value specified by the position setting is small the inverter may decelerate the motor for positioning before its speed reaches the speed setting In absolute position control mode the rotating direction setting FW or RV of the operation command is ignored The operation command simply functions as the signal to run or stop the motor The motor runs in
165. The inverter runs the motor at the high speed zero return speed lt 3 gt The inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on lt 4 gt The inverter runs the motor in the reverse direction at the low speed zero return speed lt 5 gt The inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned off lt 6 gt The inverter runs the motor in the forward direction at the low speed zero return speed lt 7 gt The inverter performs positioning at the first Z pulse position after the ORL signal is turned on 4 109 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code 4 3 17 Forward reverse drive stop function FOT ROT C001 C008 intelligent input terminals The forward reverse drive stop function allows you to prevent motor operation from deviating from the specified control range according to signals from the control range limit switches When the FOT terminal is turned on the torque for forward rotation is limited to 10 When the ROT terminal is turned on the torque for reverse rotation is limited to 10 This function can be used as a limit switch function at the machine end This function is activated by setting 71 FOT and 72 ROT on intelligent input terminals 1 8 CO01 C008 Related code P072 Position range specification forward P073 Position range specification reverse 4 3 18 Position range specification function The position control ranges for forward and reverse rotations can be
166. Vpn V DC voltage across main circuit Recovery of input power Recovery of input power i Period of DC voltage i Period of DC voltage constant control Time constant control Time Output frequency Output frequency Hz Hz EE EAE NERES b050 03 running b050 02 03 b050 02 decelerate to stop Time decelerate to stop Time Recovery of input power Recovery of input power Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code H001 Auto tuning Setting H002 Motor data selection 1st motor H003 Motor capacity 1st motor H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor H030 Auto constant R1 1st motor H031 Auto constant R2 1st motor H032 Auto constant L 1st motor H033 Auto constant lo 1st motor H034 Auto constant J 1st motor A003 Base frequency setting A051 DC braking selection A082 AVR voltage select Reverse run proctection enable 4 2 92 Offline auto tuning function The offline auto tuning function allows you to make the inverter automatically measure and set the motor constants that are required for the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control and vector control with sensor When using the inverter to perform the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control and vector control with sensor for a motor of which the motor constants are unknown measure the motor constants with the offline tuning function When 00 Hitachi general purpose motor data is sp
167. W 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR OOo o o f Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except 1495h Logical output signal 2 selection 1 C145 R W those of LOG1 to LOG6 1496h Logical output signal 2 selection 2 C146 Same ee hee C021 to C026 except 1497h Logical output signal 2 operator selection C147 RW 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR o O f 7 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except 1498h Logical put signal 3 selection 1 C148 Rw lans of LOG1 to LOG6 S th tti f C021 to C026 t 1499h Logical put signal 3 selection 2 C149 ae of LOG to LOGS 9 excep l 149Ah Logical output signal 3 operator selection C150 R W 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR esn il F Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except 149Bh Logical put signal 4 selection 1 C151 Rw pare of LOG1 to LOG6 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except 149Ch Logical put signal 4 selection 2 C152 those of LOG1 to LOG6 149Dh Logical output signal 4 operator selection C153 RW o AND 1 OR 2 XOR O S th tti f C021 to C026 t 149Eh Logical put signal 5 selection 1 C154 ae of LOG to LOGS Q excep o S th tti f C021 to C026 t 149Fh Logical put signal 5 selection 2 C155 roa of LOG to LOGS Q excep el 14A0h Logical output signal 5 operator selection C156 R W 0 AND 1 OR 2 XOR fe I 14A1h Logical output signal 6 selection 1 C157 Same A Oc bea to C026 except za 14A2h Logical output signal 6 selection 2 C158 Rw pare A to C026 except za 14
168. XXXFF FEF FUF L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H Protective structure IP20 Control system Sine wave PWM control Output frequency range 0 1 to 400 Hz Frequency accuracy Within 0 01 of the maximum output frequency for digital input within 0 2 of maximum frequency for digital input at 25 10 C Frequency setting Digital input 0 01 Hz Analog input Maximum output frequency 4000 characteristic resolution O terminal input 12 bits O to 10 V O2 terminal input 12 bits 10 to 10 V Ol terminal input 12 bits O to 20 mA Voltage frequency V f characteristic variable with the base frequency set between 30 to 400 Hz constant or reduced torque V f control sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control Rated overload current Speed fluctuation 0 5 with sensorless vector control or OHZ range sensorless vector control 150 60 seconds 200 3 seconds Acceleration deceleration time 0 01 to 3 600 0 seconds in linear or curved pattern Starting torque 200 0 3 Hz with sensorless vector control or OHz range sensorless vector control 150 OHz range torque with OHz range sensorless vector control or with a motor of capacity one class lower than the inverter connected DC braking Triggered at motor start up when the actual motor frequency exceeds the acceleration frequency set by a stop command when the actual motor frequency exceeds the frequency set by a freq
169. a PID feedback data x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Intelligent input terminal 8 bytes See Note 7 Intelligent output terminal 8 bytes See Note 8 a Frequency conversion x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 5 Output torque x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Output voltage V x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code ai Electric power kW x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code a 8 bytes Always 00000000 reserved for data storage Cumulative running time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code a Cumulative power on time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 5 Note 8 Monitoring of intelligent input terminals Note 8 Monitoring of intelligent output terminals 4 120 Terminal Data Terminal Data FW terminal 00000001 Relay terminal 00000001 Terminal 1 00000002 Terminal 11 00000002 Terminal 2 00000004 Terminal 12 00000004 Terminal 3 00000008 Terminal 13 00000008 Terminal 4 00000010 Terminal 14 00000010 Terminal 5 00000020 Terminal 15 00000020 Terminal 6 00000040 Terminal 7 00000080 Terminal 8 00000100 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions v 04 command This command reads the status of the inverter Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inver
170. accept any reset command after an EEPROM error occurs with error code displayed Turn off the inverter power once If error code E08 is displayed when the inverter power is turned on subsequently the internal memory device may have failed or parameters may have not been stored correctly In such cases initialize the inverter and then re set the parameters 3 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power Check whether the inverter has decreased the motor quickly Increase the deceleration time Check for a ground fault Check the output cables and motor Check whether the motor has been rotated by the action of the load Reduce the regenerative energy Overvoltage protection 5 1 Chapter 5 Error Codes Name Description z Display on Display on Troubleshooting and corrective action Referen digital operator remote operator ce page Undervoltage CPU error 3 External trip Ground fault protection 3 Input overvoltage protection Instanta neous power failure protection Temperature error due to low cooling fan speed Temperature error If the inverter input voltage drops the control circuit of the inverter cannot function normally Therefore the inverter shuts off its output when the input voltage falls below a specified level The inverter will trip if the DC voltage across the P and N termin
171. across terminals P and N of the inverter While the inverter is operating the monitored value changes as the actual DC voltage of the inverter changes Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 V 4 1 30 BRD load factor monitoring Related code When the BRD load factor monitoring function d103 is selected the inverter d103 BRD load factor monitoring displays the BRD load factor If the BRD load factor exceeds the value set as the b090 Dynamic braking usage ratio dynamic braking usage ratio b090 the inverter will trip because of the braking resistor overload protection error code E06 Display 0 0 to 100 0 in steps of 0 1 4 1 31 Electronic thermal overload monitoring Related code When the electronic thermal overload monitoring function d104 is selected the d104 Electronic thermal overload inverter displays the electronic thermal overload If the electronic thermal overload monitoring exceeds 100 the inverter will trip because of the overload protection error code E05 Display 0 0 to 100 0 in steps of 0 1 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 Function Mode 4 2 1 Output frequency setting The output frequency setting function allows you to set the inverter output frequency You can set the inverter output frequency with this function F001 only when you have specified 02 for the frequency source setting A001 For other methods of frequency setting see Section 4 2 4 frequency source sett
172. actors below Oo f 001Dh Trip monitoring 2 inverter status See the list of inverter trip factors below 001Eh Trip monitoring 2 frequency high 001Fh Trip monitoring 2 frequency low 071640000 0 01 Hz 0020h Trip monitoring 2 current Output current at trippin 0 1A 0020h Trip g2 p pping 01A 0021h Trip monitoring 2 voltage DC input voltage at tripping 0022h Trip monitoring 2 running time high 3 a Bn a 0023h Trip monitoring 2 running time low Cumulative running meat tripping 1h 0024h Trip monitoring 2 power on time high Cumulative power on time at tripping 0025h Trip monitoring 2 power on time low See the list of inverter trip factorsbelow See the list of inverter tripfactorsbelow 0028h Trip monitoring 3 frequency high 4083 DC input voltage at tripping 002Ch Trip monitoring 3 running time high 002Dh Trip monitoring 3 running time low 002Eh Trip monitoring 3 power on time high 002Fh Trip monitoring 3 power on time low Cumulative running time at tripping th Cumulative power on time at tripping a O o 0030h Trip monitoring 4 factor See the list of inverter trip factors below 0031h Trip monitoring 4 inverter status See the list of inverter trip factors below 0032h Trip monitoring 4 frequency high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz d084 0036h Trip monitoring 4 running time high 0037h Trip monitoring 4 running time low 0038
173. actory setting The following procedure enables you to turn the monitor display back to d 0 0 Jor 0 8 Q 1 regardless of the current display mode Hold down the E key for 3 seconds or more The monitor shows d Q Q and 08 Q 1 alternately During this status press the E key The monitor will show only d 0 Q or 0 8 Ht 1 which is shown when the 9 is pressed 1 The monitor shows only when the motor driven by the inverter is stopped While the motor is running the monitor shows an output frequency Chapter 3 Operation 1 Example of operation in basic display mode b037 04 factory setting Only basic parameters can be displayed in basic display mode All parameters in monitor mode four parameters in function mode or 20 parameters in extended function mode Other parameters are not displayed To display all parameters select the full display mode b037 00 lt Displayable parameters and sequence of display gt No Display code Item 1 d001 to d104 Monitor display 2 F001 Output frequency setting Note 3 F002 Acceleration 1 time setting If a desired parameter is not displayed check 4 WOVE Deceleration 1 time setting the setting of function b037 function code FOR Operation direction setting display restriction To display all parameters 6 A001 Frequency source set
174. al is off set frequency 2 of maximum frequency Hz Range of data Frequency arrival setting for 0 0 Hz Disabling the output of frequency accel Frequency arrival setting C042 C045 for acceleration 2 0 01 to 400 0 Hz Enabling the output of frequency Frequency arrival setting for 0 0 Hz Disabling the output of frequency decel Frequency arrival setting C043 C046 for deceleration 2 0 01 to 400 0 Hz Enabling the output of frequency Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 1 Signal output when the constant speed frequency is reached 01 FA1 The inverter outputs the signal when the output frequency reaches the frequency specified by a frequency setting F001 A020 A220 or A320 or multispeed setting A021 to A035 E EATE fon 1 of maximum frequency fott SE frequency foff 2 of maximum frequency fon Output frequency Example Maximum frequency fmax 120 Hz Set frequency fset 60 Hz fon 120 x 0 01 1 2 Hz FA1 foff 120 x 0 02 2 4 Hz At acceleration the signal turns on when the output frequency reaches 58 8 Hz 60 1 2 58 8 At deceleration the signal turns off when the output frequency reaches 57 6 Hz 60 2 4 57 6 2 Signal output when the set frequency is exceeded 02 FA2 or 24 FA4 The inverter outputs the signal when the output frequency exceeds the acceleration or deceleration frequency specified by a frequency setting C042 or C043 FA2 or C045 o
175. al operator selection ol 02 Bias setting via the O2 terminal 1 Torque bias setting P037 Valid when P036 01 Torque biasing polarity pose ho o o oped on fhe san of es ae selection 2 1 When the torque bias is set as a signal input via the O2 terminal the inverter recognizes the signal voltage 10 to 10 V as the bias value 200 to 200 2 1 When 00 depending on the sign of the bias value is specified Regardless of the direction of motor rotation torque in the forward direction increases when the torque bias signal indicates a positive value Torque in the reverse direction increases when the torque bias signal indicates a negative value 2 When 01 depending on the motor rotation direction is specified The sign of the bias value indicated by the torque bias signal and the direction of the torque biasing change according to the rotation direction specified by the operation command With a forward operation command the torque is generated in the same direction as that specified by the sign of the torque bias value With a reverse operation command the torque is generated in the opposite direction to that specified by the sign of the torque bias value Related code P036 Torque biasing mode selection P037 Torque bias setting P038 Torque biasing polarity selection d010 Torque bias monitoring Torque biasing mode 4 3 5 Torque control function The torque control function is effective
176. als exceeds about 175 VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 345 VDC in case of the 400 V class models If an error occurs in the internal current detector CT the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right The inverter will trip when the CT outputs about 0 6 V or more at power on If the internal CPU malfunctions or an error occurs in it the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right Note Reading an abnormal data from the EEPROM may result in a CPU error If an error occurs in the external equipment or device connected to the inverter the inverter will fetch the error signal and shut off its output This protective function is enabled when the external trip function is enabled A USP error is indicated when the inverter power is turned on with an input operation signal remaining in the inverter This protective function is enabled when the USP function is enabled When the inverter power is turned on this protective function detects the ground fault between the inverter output circuit and the motor to protect the inverter This function does not operate when a residual voltage remains in the motor This protective function determines an error if the input voltage is kept above the specification level for 100 seconds while the inverter is stopped The inverter will trip if the DC voltage of the main circuit is kept above about 380
177. and N terminals at tripping 7 Applying DC braking to the motor 1 4 l i AD Q Overload restricted operation i I f y Q Forcible or servo on operation 1 i i5 Note The above descriptions indicate the inverter status at the 1 i 5 Accumulated time h for which the inverter has occurrence of tripping which may not correspond to the apparent 1 been running before tripping operation of the motor 4 I 1 1 AY Example I i When the PID control is used or the frequency command is input as an i analog signal a voltage or current signal the inverter may repeat acceleration and deceleration alternately at short intervals to make up I 6 Accumulated time for which the inverter power for the fluctuations of the analog signal even if the motor is apparently has been on before tripping running at constant speed 1 In such cases the inverter status at tripping may not correspond to the uw Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 2 Warning Codes The following table lists the warning codes and the contents of parameter readjustments Warning code Target function code Condition Basic function code 1001 1201 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 gt 1002 1202 Frequency lower limit setting A062 A262 gt 11004 1204 1304 Base frequency setting A003 A203 A303 1 gt a Lt i Output frequency setting F001 multispeed 0 Maximum frequency setting 1005 1205 1305 A202 A220 A320 2
178. and forward regeneration are set as the torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 respectively 2 Terminal switching mode In this mode the torque limit values set in the torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 are switched from one another according to the combination of the states of torque limit switch terminals 1 and 2 TRQ1 and TRQ2 assigned to intelligent input terminals A single selected torque limit is valid in all operating states of the inverter 3 Analog input mode In this mode a torque limit value is set by a voltage applied to the control circuit terminal O2 The voltage range 0 to 10 V corresponds to the torque limit value range 0 to 200 A single selected torque limit is valid in all operating states of the inverter 4 Option option 1 2 mode This mode is valid when the option board SJ DG is used For details on this mode refer to the instruction manual for the option board If function 40 TL whether to enable torque limitation has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal the torque limitation mode selected by the setting of b040 is enabled only when the TL terminal is turned on When the TL terminal is off torque limit settings are invalid and the maximum torque setting is applied as a torque limit If the TL function has not been assigned to any intelligent input terminal the torque limitation mode selected by the setting of b040 is always enabled Each torque limit value used for this function is expressed as a ratio
179. anged data 4 Note that you can also use the procedure steps 1 to 6 described here to change the data 3 4 This procedure can also be used on screens displaying a code other than d001 2 If the key is pressed while a digit is blinking the display will revert to the preceding status for entering the digit to the right of the blinking digit tthe CY key is pressed while the leftmost fourth digit is blinking the characters having been entered to change the code will be cancelled and the display will revert to the original code shown before the and keys were pressed in step 1 4 When changing data be sure to press the key first Chapter 3 Operation 3 3 How To Make a Test Run This section describes how to make a test run of the inverter that is wired and connected to external devices in a general way as shown below For the detailed method of using the digital operator see Section 3 2 How To Operate the Digital Operator 1 When entering operation and frequency setting commands from the digital operator The operating procedure below is common to the standard and optional digital operators ELB 3 phase Ros power supply ah lt 222272 DC reactor Braking unit Alarm output contacts Default jumper position for sinking type inputs Altanatively CM1 PLC for souricing tiype C L Re grounding 200 V class model Operating procedure 9 Type C grounding 400 V class mod
180. are Inverter Special cable Compilation AL Download User program e Upload Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 Functions Available When the Feedback Option Board SJ FB Is Mounted 4 3 1 Functions requiring the SJ FB Related code A044 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st motor A001 Run command source setting A076 PV source setting A141 Operation target frequency selection 1 A142 Operation target frequency selection 2 The feedback option board SJ FB is generally required in the following cases lt 1 gt When 05 V2 vector control with sensor is specified for V F characteristic curve selection 1st motor A044 lt 2 gt When pulse train frequency input is specified by one of the following methods 06 pulse train input is specified for the run command source setting A001 10 operation function result is specified for the run command source setting A001 and 05 pulse train frequency is specified for operation target frequency selection 1 A141 or operation target frequency selection 2 A142 03 pulse train frequency input is specified for the PV source setting A076 For the wiring and DIP switch setting of the SJ FB refer to the instruction manual for the SJ FB You can check the direction of motor rotation with the actual frequency monitoring function d008 For checking with this monitoring function specify 00 VC for the V F characteristic curve selection
181. as or start frequency to maximum frequency limit 0 00 x o C o F g n A imit 2 A262 Frequency lower limit setting 0 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor limit 0 00 4 o 2nd motor Hz a Aos3 vor center frequency setting 0 99 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o gej g r E aoe4 ump TA frequency 000 to 10 00 Hz 0 50 x o 5 a065 oe center frequency setting 0 99 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o J hysteresis f T ump hysteresis frequency a A066 width setting 2 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 50 x O we s j B aoe7 sume center frequency setting 000 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o Z aosa lump hysteresis frequency 0 99 to 10 00 Hz 0 50 x o a width setting 3 A069 Si an stop frequency 000 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o A070 anan stop time frequency 0 0 to 60 0 s 0 0 lt o A071 PID Function Enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 enabling inverted data output 00 x O A072 PID proportional gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 O O A073 PID integral time constant 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 1 0 O O 5 A074 PID derivative gain 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 s 0 00 O O 5 A075 PV scale conversion 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 x O 4 26 o Q A076 PV source setting 00 input via Ol 01 input via O 02 external communication 03 pulse string 00 x o a frequency input 10 operation result output A077 Output of inverted PID deviation 00 OFF 01 ON 00 x O A078 PID variation range 0 0 t
182. as the inverter operation to be performed at the occurrence of instantaneous power failure or undervoltage If you specify a retry operation for the selection of restart mode b001 the inverter will retry the motor operation for the number of times set as b005 after an instantaneous power failure or the number of times set as b009 after overvoltage respectively and then trip if all retries fail The inverter will not trip if you specify an unlimited number of retries With function b004 you can select whether to make the inverter trip when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occur while the inverter is in a stopped state When selecting a retry operation also set the retry conditions listed below according to the system to be driven by the inverter Even during a retry operation the inverter will trip with error code E09 undervoltage displayed if the undervoltage status continues for 40 seconds Era 00 Tripping e Restarting the motor with 0 Hz at retry M the motor with a matching frequency at retry Selection of restart mode bo oa example 1 3 4 6 b001 Starting the motor with a matching frequency at retry The eae Aa after decelerating and stopping the motor Res ie lar with an input frequency at retry yeas example 1 3 Restarting the motor when the power failure duration does Allowable under voltage not exceed the specified time See example 1 power failure time b002 0 3 to 25 0 s Tripping
183. ata specify 10 for the PV source setting A076 Related code A141 Operation target frequency selection 1 A142 Operation target frequency selection 2 A143 Operator selection A001 Frequency source setting A076 PV source setting Data Description 00 Digital operator A020 A220 A320 01 Control on the digital operator Valid only when the OPE SR is connected Oparaionsargaledueney 02 Input via the O terminal selection 1 and 2 A141 A142 03 Input via the Ol terminal 04 Input via the RS485 terminal 05 Input from option board 1 06 Input from option board 2 07 Input of pulse train Operator selection for 90 Addition A141 A142 frequency operation A143 01 Subtraction A141 A142 02 Multiplication A141 x A142 10 Output of operation result 10 Output of operation result Note 1 The 1 up and 2 down keys of the digital operator are ineffective when the frequency operation function is enabled Also the frequency displayed by the output frequency monitoring d001 Scaled output frequency monitoring d007 or output frequency setting F001 cannot be changed with key operations Note 2 The settings of A141 and A142 can be the same Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 13 Frequency addition function The frequency addition function allows you to add or subtract the value specified as the frequency to be added A145 to or from the frequency value of a selected frequency command To use this funct
184. ation cycle is too short resistor right Prolong the operation cycle overload Check whether the set BRD operation rate is protection too low Adjust the setting to an appropriate level Note confirm the maximum allowable capacity of the resistor If the DC voltage across the P and N terminals rises too high an inverter failure may result To avoid this problem this protective function shuts off the inverter output and displays the error code shown on the right when the DC voltage across the P and N terminals exceeds a specified level because of an increase in the energy regenerated by the motor or the input voltage during operation The inverter will trip if the DC voltage across the P and N terminals exceeds about 400 VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 800 VDC in case of the 400 V class models When an internal EEPROM is caused by Check for the noise sources located near the external noise or an abnormal inverter EEPROM temperature rise the inverter shuts off its Remove noise sources error output and displays the error code shown EEPROM Check whether the cooling efficiency has 2 3 on the right deteriorated Note An EEPROM error may result in a Check the heat sink for clogging and clean it CPU error Replace the cooling fan 1 The inverter will not accept any reset command within about 10 seconds after tripping i e after the protective function operates T 2 The inverter will not
185. ation function SF6 Multispeed 6 setting bit operation SF7 Multispeed 7 setting bit operation Torque limitation function 47 j j Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 51 F TM Forcible terminal operation Forcible terminal operation function 4 51 52 ATR Permission of torque command input Torque control function 4 98 53 KHC Cumulative power clearance Cumulative power monitoring function 4 4 54 SON Servo On Servo on function 4 111 55 FOC Forcing forcing function 4 91 56 MI1 General purpose input 1 57 MI2 General purpose input 2 58 MI3 General purpose input 3 59 MI4 General purpose input 4 60 MI5 General purpose input 5 61 MI6 General purpose input 6 62 MI7 General purpose input 7 63 MI8 General purpose input 8 Easy sequence function 1 EE C001 to C008 65 AHD Analog command holding Analog command holding function 4 59 66 CP1 multistage position settings selection 1 67 CP2 multistage position settings selection 2 4 108 68 CP3 multistage position settings selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit function h 70 ORG Zero return trigger function Absolute position control mode 4 109 71 FOT forward drive stop 4 110 72 ROT reverse drive stop 73 SPD speed position switching 4 108 74 PCNT pulse counter 75 PCC pulse counter clear 1 Refer to programing software EZ SQ user manual 4 2 39 Input terminal a b NO NC selection Related code
186. ation time C169 4 3 15 Speed position switching function SPD To perform speed control operation in absolute position control mode turn on the SPD terminal While the SPD terminal is off the current position count remains at 0 Therefore if the SPD terminal is turned off during operation the control operation is switched to position control operation based on the position where the terminal is turned off Speed control operation is switched to position control operation If the position setting is 0 at this time the inverter stops the motor at that position Hunting may occur if a certain position loop gain value has been set While the SPD terminal is on the rotating direction depends on the operation command When switching from speed control to position control pay attention to the sign of the value set in the operation command Output frequency Start of position counting Speed control Position control Time Target position 4 108 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 16 Zero return function ORG ORL One of three types of zero return operations can be selected by zero return mode selection P068 When a zero return operation ends the current position counter is cleared to 0 Use zero return direction selection P069 to select the direction of zero return operation If zero return operation is not performed position control is performed based on the assumption that the m
187. auto tuning insufficient torque may cause a problem in the load driven by the motor for example a lift may slide down Therefore remove the motor from the machine or other load and perform auto tuning with the motor alone The moment of inertia J measured by auto tuning is that of the motor alone To apply the data add the moment of inertia of the load machine to the measured J data after converting the moment of inertia into the motor shaft data e If the motor is installed in a machine e g lift or boring machine that limits the motor shaft rotation the allowable rotation limit may be exceeded during auto tuning and the machine may be damaged To avoid this problem specify 01 auto tuning without motor rotation for the Auto tuning Setting H001 f If the no load current is unknown operate the motor at 50 Hz in a V f characteristic control mode to measure the motor current with current monitor Then set the measured current as the control constant H023 or H223 before auto tuning 5 Even when 01 auto tuning without motor rotation is specified for the Auto tuning Setting H001 the motor may rotate slightly during auto tuning 6 When performing the auto tuning for a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than that of the inverter enable the overload restriction function and set the overload restriction level to 1 5 times as high as the rated current of the motor Operating procedure 1 Specify 01 or 02 for the A
188. be no abnormality loosening found 3 Check each part for any trace of o Check visually There must be no abnormality overheating found Connecting 1 Check the conductors for o Check visually conductors and distortion There must be no abnormality cables a ee 2 Check the cable insulations for o found damage Terminal block Check the terminal blocks for o Check visually There must be no abnormality damage found Inverter circuit Check the resistance between Remove all cables from the Analog tester and converter terminals inverter s main circuit terminal block See Section 6 5 Method of circuit including Use a tester in 10 range mode to Checking the Inverter and resistors o measure the following Converter Circuits Standard Resistance between terminals R operating life of inverter circuit S and T and terminals P and N until replacement 106 cycles of Resistance between terminals U starting and stopping 3 V and W and terminals P and N Smoothing 1 Check for liquid leak O Check visually There must be no abnormality Capacitance capacitor NEEE AAN GAER E DEE rad eal found meter 2 Check that the relief valve does Target operating life until not protrude or swell O replacement 10 years 1 3 Relay 1 Check that no fluttering sound is Check by listening generated during the relay O pere must be no abnormality operation 7 2 Check the contacts for damage o Check visually There must be no abnormality fo
189. bling the brake control function for the Brake Control Enable b120 This function operates as described below 1 When the inverter receives an operation command it starts the output and accelerates the motor up to the Brake Release Frequency Setting 2 After the Brake Release Frequency Setting is reached the inverter waits for the braking wait time b121 and then outputs the brake release signal BRK However if the inverter output current has not reached the brake release current b126 the inverter does not output the break release signal but trips and outputs a braking error signal BER When the braking confirmation signal BOK has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal that is when 44 is specified for one of C001 to C008 the inverter waits for the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 without accelerating the motor after receiving the brake release signal If the inverter does not receive the braking confirmation signal within the braking confirmation time b124 it trips with the braking error signal BER output When the braking confirmation signal BOK has not been assigned to any intelligent input terminal the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 is invalid In such cases the inverter proceeds to the operation described in Item 4 after the output of the brake release signal After the input of the braking confirmation signal or the output of the brake release signal when the BOK signal fu
190. c 2nd 00 reduced torque characteristic 01 constant torque characteristic 02 00 01 01 x o g motor free setting go b313 Electronic thermal characteristic 3rd 00 reduced torque characteristic 01 constant torque characteristic 02 00 01 01 x o 9 motor free setting n S b015 Free setting electronic thermal 0 to 400 Hz 0 x o 3 frequency 1 iri b016 Free setting electronic thermal 0 0 to rated current A 0 0 x o current 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal 0 to 400 Hz 0 x o frequency 2 4 38 b018 Free setting electronic thermal 0 0 to rated current A 0 0 x o current 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal 0 to 400 Hz 0 x o frequency 3 b020 Free setting electronic thermal 0 0 to rated current A 0 0 x o current 3 00 disabling 01 enabling during acceleration and deceleration 02 b021 Overload restriction operation mode enabling during constant speed 03 enabling during acceleration and 01 x O deceleration increasing the speed during regeneration b022 Overload restriction setting 0 20 x rated current to 1 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter x 1 50 x O D A b023 Deceleration rate at overload 0 10 to 30 00 s 1 00 x o 5 restriction 4 39 5 Overload restriction operation m d 00 disabling 01 enabling during acceleration and deceleration 02 5 b024 2 P enabling during constant speed 03 enabling during acceleration and 01 x O 3 deceleration increasing th
191. c shock or fire Commit wiring work to a qualified electrician Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Before wiring make sure that the power supply is off Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Perform wiring only after installing the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or injury Do not remove rubber bushings from the wiring section Otherwise the edges of the wiring cover may damage the wire resulting in a short circuit or ground fault Make sure that the voltage of AC power supply matches the rated voltage of your inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire Do not input single phase power into the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not connect AC power supply to any of the output terminals U V and W Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire Do not connect a resistor directly to any of the DC terminals PD P and N Otherwise you run the risk of fire Connect an earth leakage breaker to the power input circuit Otherwise you run the risk of fire Use only the power cables earth leakage breaker and magnetic contactors that have the specified capacity ratings Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not use the magnetic contactor installed on the primary and secondary sides of the inverter to stop its operation Tighten each screw to the specified torque No screws must be left loose Otherwise you run the risk of fire Before operating
192. c1 to Dec2 frequency transition point 1st 2nd motors 6012 b212 b312 Electronic thermal setting calculated within the inverter from current output 1st 2nd 3rd motors b013 b213 b313 Electronic thermal characteristic 1st 2nd 3rd motors H002 H202 Motor data selection 1st 2nd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H006 H206 H306 Motor stabilization constant 1st 2nd 3rd motors H020 H220 Motor constant R1 1st 2nd motors H021 H221 Motor constant R2 1st 2nd motors H022 H222 Motor constant L 1st 2nd motors H023 H223 Motor constant lo 1st 2nd motors H024 H224 Motor constant J 1st 2nd motors H030 H230 Auto constant R1 1st 2nd motors H031 H231 Auto constant R2 1st 2nd motors H032 H232 Auto constant L 1st 2nd motors H033 H233 Auto constant lo 1st 2nd motors H034 H234 Auto constant J 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 Pl integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors H060 H260 Zero LV Imit 1st 2nd motors Since the inverter indicates no distinction among the 1st 2nd and 3rd controls confirm the kind of control settings with the on off states of the SET and SET3 terminals If both the SET and SETS terminals are turned on the SET terminal has priority and the 2nd control is selected While the inverter is operating the motor switchin
193. ceived a query from the master system Be sure to specify the time corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters 24 bits as the waiting time If a shorter waiting time corresponding to the transmission of fewer than 3 5 characters is specified the inverter will not respond The actual waiting time is the sum of the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters and the communication wait time C078 4 131 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Message configuration Response i Time required for communication After the inverter receives a query the inverter waits for the sum of the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters and the communication wait time C078 before sending a response After receiving a response from the inverter the master system must wait for the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters or longer before sending the next query to the inverter ii Normal response If the query specifies the function code 08h for the loopback test the inverter returns a response that has the same contents as the query If the query specifies a function code 05h 06h OFh or 10h for writing data to registers or coils the inverter returns the query without a change as a response If the query specifies a function code 01h or 03h for reading a register or coil the inverter returns a response that contains the slave address and function code speci
194. celeration A055 DC braking time for deceleration A056 DC braking edge or level detection for DB input A057 DC braking force for starting A058 DC braking time for starting A059 DC braking carrier frequency setting C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Data or range of data 00 Internal DC braking is disabled De braking enapi Internal DC braking is enabled 02 Internal DC braking is enabled The braking operates only with the set braking frequency DC brakin With internal DC braking enabled DC braking is I A052 0 00 to 60 00 Hz started when the output frequency reaches the frequency setting set braking frequency gt The DC braking wait time specifies the delay in e ANg walt A053 0 0 to 5 0 s starting DC braking after the set braking time has elapsed or the DB terminal has been turned on DC braking force during deceleration o 0 specifies the smallest force zero current DC braking force for POR ACE 0 19100 6 100 specifies the largest force rated current starting DC braking time for This setting is valid for the external DC braking in A095 0 0 to 60 0 1S edge mode or for the internal DC braking DC braking edge or ow Edge mode See examples 1 a to 6 a A056 level detection Tor Level mode See examples 1 b to 6 b DB input This setting is valid for the internal DC braking A058 0 0 to 60 0 s DC braking is started when the motor start command is input A0
195. code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No ER of conirol target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 07 Parameter Data parameter number 4 bytes See Note 14 Data Parameter data decimal ASCII 8 bytes See Note 13 code XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCO Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 14 Possible range of parameters is as follows F002 A001 b001 CO01 H001 P001 F001 is written with 01 command Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section ix 08 command This command initializes specified settings in the inverter The setting items to be initialized follow the setting of the initialization mode b084 When b084 is 00 the trip history data is cleared Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No pees of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 08 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BOG Blockicheck code 2bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative resp
196. controlled operation P040 400 0 Hz reverse rotation P00 None oo MM P036 Polarity selection at the torque o ae ee Depending on the sign of torque value P035 command input via the O2 pasi 01 Depending on the motor rotation direction Torque biasing mode selection Torque bias setting Torque biasing polarity posg 00 Depending on the sign of bias value selection 52 8 Terminal function C001 to C008 ee ATR Permission for torque command input 4 9 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Control block diagram Torque command Current control command control P control If the detected speed exceeds the speed limit the motor speed is controlled in proportional P control mode Speed limit Detected speed 4 3 6 Pulse train position control mode To use this function specify 05 V2 for V F characteristic curve selection 1st motor A044 and 01 pulse train position control mode for the control pulse setting P012 You can choose the input source of pulse train command pulse train mode setting P013 Data or range of data Description 01 Pulse train position control mode 00 MDO 90 phase shift pulse train l 01 MD1 Forward reverse operation Pulse train mode setting 2 P013 command with pulse train 02 MD2 Forward operation pulse train with reverse operation pulse train Home search completion 0 to 9999 1000 range setting P017 100000 Equivalen
197. ction C026 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 77 Window comparators WCO WCOI WCO2 detection of terminal disconnection ODc OlDc O2Dc Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to terminal 15 tunctions The window comparator function outputs C026 Alarm relay terminal function i hen th f i 3 ts O b060 b063 b066 Maximum limit level of window comparators O OI O2 Signals when the values ot analog Inputs J b061 b064 b067 Minimum limit level of window comparators O Ol O2 Ol and O2 are within the maximum and minimum limits specified for the window comparator You can monitor analog inputs with reference to arbitrary levels to find input terminal disconnection and other errors You can specify a hysteresis width for the maximum limit and minimum limit levels of the window comparator You can specify limit levels and a hysteresis width individually for analog inputs O Ol and O2 You can fix the analog input data to be applied to an arbitrary value when WCO WCOI or WCOZ2 is output For this purpose specify a desired value as the operation level at O Ol O2 disconnection b070 b071 b072 When no is specified the analog input data is reflected as input Output values of ODc OlDc and O2Dc are the same as those of WCO WCOI and WCO2 respectively Function boat Item Range of data Description code 27 ODc Detection of analog input O disconnection Terminal 11 to terminal 28 OlDc Detection of ana
198. ctly Check the instruction manual for the option board Refer to the instruction manual for the SJ FB SJ DG or SJ DN 3 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power 4 The inverter will not accept the reset command entered from the digital operator Therefore reset the inverter by turning on the RS terminal Chapter 5 Error Codes Name Description Display on Display on remote Troubleshooting and corrective action Referenoe digital operator operator page The inverter detects errors in the option board mounted in the optional slot 2 For details refer to the instruction Option 2 manual for the mounted option board error If the input voltage falls the inverter will shut off its output display the code shown on the right and wait for the recovery of the input voltage Waiting in The inverter will display the same error undervoltage code also during an instantaneous status power failure remark Inverter trips with under voltage when this status continues for 40 seconds If a problem occurs in the communication between the digital operator and inverter the inverter will display the code shown on the right Communica tion error When the retry after instantaneous power failure or tripping has been enabled the inverter displays the code shown on the right while awaiting retry after an instantaneou
199. curve selection 1st motor C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions The servo on function allows you to set the inverter in a speed servo locking state with a signal input via an input terminal during operation This function is effective when 05 vector control with sensor is specified as the V F characteristic curve selection A044 To use this function assign function 54 SON to an intelligent input terminal After the SON function has been assigned the inverter accepts an operation command only when the SON terminal is on If the SON terminal is turned off while the inverter is operating the motor the inverter sets the motor into the free running state If the SON terminal is subsequently turned on the inverter restarts the motor according to the setting of the festart mode after FRS b088 This function cannot be used together with the forcing function 55 FOC If both the FOC and SON functions are assigned to different intelligent input terminals the FOC function has priority over the SON function the SON function cannot be used SON f i FW RV The inverter does not i operate the motor because Output frequency i f the SON terminal is off tarti t J Restarting according to the setting of b088 Speed servo locking state 4 111 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 21 Pulse train frequency input The pulse train frequency input function allows you to use the P055 Pulse string f
200. d Function code The function code specifies the function to be executed by the inverter The table below lists the function codes supported by the SJ700 series inverter Function codes Maximum number of data Maximum data count in a Function code Function bytes in a message message Reads the coil status 32 coils in units of bit 03h Reads registers 8 amp 8 4registers in units of byte 05h Writes data to a coil 1 coil in units of bit 06h 08h Performs a loopback test n G y 10h Writes data to multiple registers 8 4registers in units of byte _ 4 130 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iv Error check code The Modbus RTU protocol uses the cyclic redundancy check CRC as the error check method The CRC code is the 16 bit data generated for a data block that has an arbitrary data length in units of 8 bits A generative polynomial for CRC 16 x X X 1 is used to generate the CRC code Example of CRC 16 calculation operation CRCI FFFFh CRC register 2 bytes Set the XOR of CRC 1 data and target data in CRC 1 Replace the Hi and Lo bytes of CRC 1 with each other Is the bit put out of CRC 1 1 Set the XOR of CRC 1 data and A001h in CRC 1 The target data is shifted by 1 byte v Header and trailer silent interval The header and trailer set the total time the inverter should wait before sending a response after having re
201. d nesting precedes the nesting start instruction An error is assumed when an arithmetic operation Erec tion erori instruction has resulted in overflow or underflow or a F PRGERR1 division by zero has been attempted eh An error is assumed when a chg param or mon param instruction has attempted to reference an undefined parameter set the data beyond the specified setting range in a parameter or update a parameter that cannot be changed during the inverter operation ry PRG O User trips 0 to 9 The inverter outputs an error code when a trip instruction is executed 7 Li PRG 9 1 The error code is output when the relevant program runs Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 1 3 Trip conditions monitorin apparent operation of the motor k 1 Trip factor i EQ 2 ED I I I I I I These digits indicate a trip factor This digit indicates the inverter status at tripping See Section 5 1 1 Explanation of display I I 2 Output frequency Hz at tripping 9 Resetting i 4 i AD Initialization at power on or with the reset terminal turned on 1 i 2 Stopping the motor I i ka 3 Decelerating or operating the motor at constant speed 1 3 Output current A at tripping i 4 tt Accelerating the motor 1 i i i BY S Status after receiving a zero frequency operation command I 4ABe 6 Starting the motor I 4 DC voltage V across P
202. d the go07 Scaled output frequency monitoring inverter displays the gain data converted from the output frequency b086 Frequency scaling conversion factor with the frequency scaling conversion factor b086 Use this function for example to change the unit of a value e g motor speed on display Value displayed by function d007 output frequency monitor d001 x frequency scaling conversion factor b086 The frequency scaling conversion factor b086 can be set within the range 0 1 to 99 9 in steps of 0 1 Example Displaying the speed of a 4 pole motor Speed N min 120 x f Hz pole f Hz x 30 As the result of the above calculation with the factor 6086 set to 30 0 the inverter displays 1800 60 x 30 0 when the output frequency is 60 Hz Display 0 00 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 1000 to 9999 in steps of 1 1000 to 3996 in units of 10 Note When you have selected the digital operator as the device to input frequency setting commands you can change the output frequency setting by using the A and or V key only while the inverter is operating the motor The change in output frequency made in this mode can be reflected in the frequency setting function F001 Press the STR key to write the new frequency over the currently selected frequency setting The precision of the storable frequency data depends on the frequency setting You cannot change the output frequency while the P
203. d as 0 Hz Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code 4 2 64 Over torque signal OTQ A044 A244 A344 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors The inverter outputs the over torque signal when it detects C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions that the estimated motor output torque exceeds the C055 Over torque forward driving level setting specified level C056 Over torque reverse regenerating level setting To enable this function assign function 07 OTA Gaas ver loraue reverse crving evel cating over torque signal to an intelligent output terminal This function is effective only when the V F characteristic curve selection selected with function A044 or A244 is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor With any other V F characteristic curve selection the output of the OTQ signal is unpredictable When using the inverter for a lift use the OTQ signal as the trigger to stop braking Use the frequency arrival signal as the trigger to start braking Set value Description Terminal function C021 to C025 A 7 Alarm relay terminal function C026 OF OTQ Over torque signal Over torque forward driving level C055 0 to 200 Threshold level to output the OTQ signal setting during forward powering operation Over torque reverse C056 0 to 200 Threshold level to output the OTQ signal regenerating level setting during reverse regenerat
204. d when the operation command is switched from the stop command to the start command varies depending on the braking mode edge or level mode Edge mode The DC braking time setting A055 is given priority over operation commands and the inverter performs DC braking according to the setting of A055 When the output frequency reaches the setting of A052 the inverter performs DC braking for the time set for A055 Even if the stop command is input during DC braking DC braking continues until the time set for A055 elapses See examples 5 a and 6 a Level mode Operation commands are given priority over the DC braking time setting The inverter follows operation commands regardless of the DC braking time setting A055 If the start command is input during DC braking the inverter starts the normal motor operation regardless of the DC braking time setting A055 See examples 5 b and 6 b a Edge mode b Level mode i Example 4 a when the start command is input i Example 4 b when the start command is input FW as FW e Output Output frequency i frequency ii Example 5 a when the stop command is input ii Example 5 b when the stop command is input eat _ fe a Free running Output Output Free running frequency nTa frequency Le A053 A055 i Ao A052 sons A03 A055 gt ii Example 6 a when the stop command is input ii Example 6 b when the stop command is input 1 E Fw Outp
205. de display format is E6 on the digital operator or OP1 on the remote operator When it is mounted in the optional port 2 located near the control circuit terminal block the error code display format is E7 on the digital operator or OP2 on the remote operator 1 Error indications by protective functions with the feedback option board SJ FB mounted 5 ad Display on Description Display on digital remote operator operator ERRI If the encoder wiring is disconnected an encoder connection error is detected the encoder fails or an encoder that does not support line driver output is 6Q WE OP1 0 OP2 0 used the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right If the motor speed rises to maximum frequency A004 x over speed error detection level P026 or more the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right If in position control mode the deviation of the current position from that specified by the Positioning error positioning command increases to 1 000 000 pulses EKo E te OP1 2 OP2 2 or more the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right In absolute position control mode the inverter shuts off its output and indicates an error when the range specified by the position range specification 6 353 a EH OP1 3 OP2 3 forward P072 or position range specification revers
206. deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration curve selection Acceleration deceleration curve constants setting A097 A098 A131 A132 01 to 10 U curve acceleration deceleration Inverted U curve acceleration deceleration EL S curve acceleration deceleration 01 small degree of swelling 4 10 large degree of swelling 9 Curvature for BES curve A150 A151 0 to 50 Curvature of EL S curve for acceleration acceleration 1 2 9 Curvature for EL S curve 4152 A153 0 to 50 Curvature of EL S curve for deceleration deceleration 1 2 1 Acceleration deceleration pattern selection Select acceleration and deceleration patterns with reference to the following table Setting 00 01 02 03 04 Curve Linear S curve U curve Inverted U curve EL S curve oy ey iy roy 5 5 g 5 5 A097 3 a a a a accele 2 g ration 3 3 3 3 2 pattern 3 Ss a E Time Time Time Time A098 a 2 z z z decele 5 S S S S ration g 3 D 3 3 pattern 3 Z z z a 2 S 2 2 2 E 6 6 6 6 Time Time Time Time Time With this pattern the This pattern is This pattern is effective for the tension control This pattern is similar motor is accelerated or effective for preventing on a winding machine driven by the inverter to to the S curve pattern decelerated linearly the collapse of cargo prevent cutting of the object to be wound for the shockless Descrip
207. decimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 06 2 Function code 06 3 Starting register number 12 3 Starting register number 12 upper digit 2 upper digit 4 Starting register number 02 4 Starting register number 02 lower digit 2 lower digit 5 Updating data upper digit 00 5 Updating data upper digit 00 6 Updating data lower digit 32 6 Updating data lower digit 32 7 CRC 16 code upper digit AD 7 CRC 16 code upper digit AD 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 23 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 23 41_ If this query is broadcasted no inverter will return any response 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to be read first If the function to write data to a specified register cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 135 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions v Performing a loopback test 08h The loopback test function is used to check the communication between the external control system master and the inverter slave Example When performing a loopback test with the inverter at slave address 1 Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 01 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 08 2 Function code 08 3 Diagnosis subcode upper digit 00 3 Diagnosis subcode upper dig
208. duce the boost current inverter s rated output Check whether the DC braking force is too high current is detected the P Reduce the braking force protective circuit operates Others i Check whether the current detector CT is and the inverter trips normal Overcurrent protection Replace or repair the CT This protective function monitors the Check whether the motor load is too high inverter output current and shuts off the Reduce the load factor inverter output and displays the error code Check whether the thermal level is appropriate shown on the right when the internal Adjust the level appropriately electronic thermal protection circuit Note Overload detects a motor overload The electronic thermal protection is easily protection If the error occurs the inverter will trip triggered when the output frequency is 5 Hz or 1 according to the setting of the electronic less If the moment of inertia of the load is large thermal function this protective function may operate when the inverter accelerates the motor and the acceleration may be disabled If this problem occurs increase the torque boost current or adjust other settings as needed When the BRD operation rate exceeds Check whether the inverter has decreased the the setting of b090 this protective motor quickly function shuts off the inverter output and Increase the deceleration time Braking displays the error code shown on the Check whether the oper
209. during the inverter operation To use this function remove the J51 connector cables from terminals RO and TO connect the main circuit terminals P and RO to each other and connect the main circuit terminals N and TO to each other Use 0 75 mm2 or heavier wires for the connections If an instantaneous power failure has occurred while the inverter is operating the motor and the output voltage falls to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b051 or less the inverter reduces the output frequency by the initial output frequency decrease during power loss b054 once and then decelerates the motor for the deceleration time setting during power loss b053 If the voltage increases to an overvoltage level exceeding the over voltage threshold during power loss b052 because of regeneration the inverter enters the LAD stop state until the voltage falls below the overvoltage level Note1 If the over voltage threshold during power loss b052 is less than the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b051 the over voltage threshold during power loss will be increased to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss when the stop level is applied However the stored setting will not be changed Note2 This nonstop deceleration function cannot be canceled until the nonstop deceleration operation is completed To restart the inverter operation after power recovery wait until the inverter stops enter a stop command and then
210. e Gate array communica tion error Phase loss input protection Main circuit error 3 IGBT error Thermistor error Braking error Emergency stop 4 Low speed overload protection Modbus communica tion error Option 1 error If an error occurs in the communication between the internal CPU and gate array the inverter will trip When the phase loss input protection has been enabled b006 01 the inverter will trip to avoid damage if an phase loss input is detected The inverter trips when the phase loss input continues for about 1 second or more The inverter will trip if the gate array cannot confirm the on off state of IGBT because of a malfunction due to noise or damage to the main circuit element If instantaneous overcurrent occurs the main circuit element temperature is abnormal or the main circuit element drive power drops the inverter will shut off its output to protect the main circuit element After tripping because of this protective function the inverter cannot retry the operation The inverter monitors the resistance of the thermistor in the motor connected to the inverter s TH terminal and will shut off the inverter output if the motor temperature rises When 01 has been specified for the Brake Control Enable b120 the inverter will trip if it cannot receive the braking confirmation signal within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 after the output of the bra
211. e Use only the power cables earth leakage breaker and magnetic contactors that have the specified capacity ratings Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not use the magnetic contactor installed on the primary and secondary sides of the inverter to stop its operation Tighten each screw to the specified torque No screws must be left loose Otherwise you run the risk of fire Before operating slide switch SW1 in the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Since the inverter supports two modes of cooling fan operation the inverter power is not always off even when the cooling fan is stopped Therefore be sure to confirm that the power supply is off before wiring Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Safety Instructions 3 Operation While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any terminal or internal part of the inverter check signals or connect or disconnect any wire or connector Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Be sure to close the terminal block cover before turning on the inverter power Do not open the terminal block cover while power is being supplied to the inverter or voltage remains inside Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch the terminal of the inv
212. e P073 is exceeded If a faulty connection i e mounting of the SJ FB connection feedback option board is detected the inverter will r7 m P19 OPZ error shut off its output and display the error code shown E63 E ASE BEI OEes on the right Note If the option board does not operate normally confirm the DIP switch settings on the option board Encoder disconnection OP1 1 OP2 1 Excessive speed Position control range trip Functions of the DIP ea on the feedback option board SJ FB DIP switch Switch No No Setting aa the detection of encoder disconnection when the encoder PE phases A and B are not connected Disabling the detection of encoder disconnection when the encoder SWENC OFF phases Aand B are not connected l Enabling the detection of encoder disconnection when the encoder 2 phase Z is not connected OFF ERA the detection of encoder disconnection when the encoder phase Z is not connected ke Enabling the terminating resistor between the SAP and SAN terminals 1 1500 OFF Disabling the terminating resistor between the SAP and SAN terminals SWR 2 i Enabling the terminating resistor between the SBP and SBN terminals 2 1500 OFF Disabling the terminating resistor between the SBP and SBN terminals Note For details refer to the instruction manual for the option board Chapt
213. e E aaa eins EN ead 7 1 External dimensions ccc tcc c ttt tte e eee n eee e eee a eee eeaes 7 4 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Precautions for Data Setting Splat auntie Eaa eyesore aperae Can tla Ee a nD E are E Ghevere tye eta e eperauars 8 1 Monitoring Mode 5rrrrrrsrsrrnnrnurunnnnuunnnnnunnnnnuunnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnunnnn 8 1 Function Mode Sc cc cc cc 8 2 Extended Function Mode ccc ttre tert tenet e ete teen eet e tetas 8 3 xii Appendix Appendix sccrcc ccc crete tte ete eee e eee eee e acne ence eae e acne eee n eee a eae eeeeaenaenaes A 1 xiii Chapter 1 Overview This chapter describes the inspection of the purchased product the product warranty and the names of parts 1 1 Inspection of the Purchased Product 1 1 1 1 2 Method of Inquiry and Product Warranty 1 2 1 3 Exterior Views and Names of Parts 1 3 Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 Inspection of the Purchased Product 1 1 1 Inspecting the product After unpacking inspect the product as described below If you find the product to be abnormal or defective contact your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor 1 Check the product for damage including falling of parts and dents in the inverter body caused during transportation 2 Check that the product package contains an inverter set and this Instruction Manual 3 Check the specification label to confirm that the product is the one you ordered Specification label
214. e count wae motot A i operation Operation Time 2 MD1 Forward reverse operation command with pulse train SAP T LLT eee LNT es SAN Input of pulse da E ES eae ee SBP SBN Forward reverse operation command Detected pulse count ae motor operation Reverse motor operation Time 3 MD2 Forward operation pulse train with reverse operation pulse train SAP Lo L L SAN H i i Input of forward operation pulse string SBP SBN Input of reverse operation pulse string Detected pulse count Forward motor Reverse a operation operation Time 4 100 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 7 Electronic gear function The electronic gear function allows you to set a gain on the position command or position feedback data to adjust the ratio between the main motor and sub motor speeds during the synchronous operation of the motors Data or range of data Description Electronic gear set position P019 00 Position feedback FB side selection 01 Position command REF side Electronic gear ratio numerator setting Note 4 P020 1 to 9999 Electronic gear ratio denominator setting Note 4 eel Io 9999 Feed forward gain setting P022 0 00 to 655 3 Note 2 all loop gain setting Note P023 0 00 to 99 99 or 100 0 rad s Related code P019 Electronic gear set position selection P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator setting P
215. e counter monitor The cumulative count of input pulses can be monitored by the pulse counter monitor d028 function The value of cumulative counter cannot be stored The counter value is cleared to zero when the inverter power is turned on or the inverter reset Turning on the PCC pulse counter clear terminal clears the cumulative counter The frequency resolution of the input pulse can be calculated by the formula shown below for pulse signal input with a duty ratio of 50 Frequencies not less than the relevant resolution cannot be input It is recommended to use this function up to 100Hz For the input terminal response see Section 4 2 79 Frequency resolution Hz 250 input terminal response time setting C160 to C168 1 Example When the input terminal response time is 1 the frequency resolution is 125 Hz Input terminal response Input pulse ON PCNT OFF 1 4 Value of counter 2 4 59 3 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 58 Intelligent output terminal setting You can assign the functions described below to the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 The intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 are used for open collector output and the alarm relay terminal is used for relay output You can select the a contact or b contact output for individual output terminals by using functions C031 to C035 and C036 When 01 3 bits or 02 4 bits i
216. e data on an optional operator SRW or SRW EX If you copy parameter data from the SJ700 or SJ300 series inverter in which the slide switch SW1 is set to OFF to the SJ700 series inverter in which the slide switch SW1 is set to ON the operator may momentarily display an error message R ERROR COPY ROM This event occurs because the data on intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 cannot be copied because the copy destination SJ700 series has exclusively assigned special functions to these terminals according to the ON setting of the slide switch SW1 Other parameter data is copied In such cases confirm the parameter settings on both copy source and copy destination inverters before using the copy destination SJ700 series After copying the data be sure to power off and on again to reflect the copied data 3 Option boards You can use the option boards SJ FB SJ DG SJ DN SJ LN and SJ PB mounted in the SJ300 series for the SJ700 series To mount the option boards in the SJ700 series follow the same mounting procedure as that used for the SJ300 series For details refer to the instruction manual for each option board Precaution Since the SJ700 series has many new functions and additional parameters some functions of the SJ DN SJ LN and SJ PB option boards conforming to the open network specifications cannot be implemented on the SJ700 series A cumulative power monitoring 0 0 6 4 4 Cumulative power on tim
217. e functions Overcurrent protection overvoltage protection undervoltage protection electronic thermal protection temperature error protection instantaneous power failure protection phase loss input protection braking resistor overload protection ground fault current detection at power on USP error external trip emergency stop trip CT error communication error option board error and others 7 2 Chapter 7 Specifications 3 Common specifications of 200 V class and 400 V class models continued eet tl type 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 SJ700 XXXXXFF FEFFUF L H L H L H L H L H L H LM UH L H L H Ambient temperature storage 10 C to 50 C ambient 20 C to 65 C storage 20 to 90 RH no condensation allowed temperature humidity gece eis 5 9m s 0 6G 10 55Hz 2 94m s 0 3G 10 55Hz Installation environment Coating color Gray Feedback option Vector control with sensor Operating environment Environment without corrosive gases and dust at an altitude of 1 000 m or less Digital input option 4 digit BCD input 16 bit binary input O E DeviceNet option Option to support the open network DeviceNet function c LonWorks option Option to support the open network LonWorks function Qa O Profibus DP option Option to support the open network Profibus DP function Other optional Braking resistor AC reacto
218. e i ooo i 1280h__ Reserved Inaccessible Z ii i oo i 1281h OI L input active range A101 high RW fo to 40000 0 01 Hz 1282h_ start frequency A101 low 1283h OI L input active range A102 high RW fo to 40000 0 01 Hz 1284h Jend frequency A102 low 1285h IC LIC input ative range A103 0 to OI L input active range end current 1 een OIT pirani angs A104 Ol L input active range start current to 100 1 1287h Ea A105 0 external start frequency 1 0 Hz e wo OQ Q Q Q e e ee 128Dh__ O2 L input active range _A111 high RW J 128Eh start frequency A111 low eee Ae pend 128Fh O2 L input active range A112 high R 1290h lend frequency A112 low 40000 t040000 9 01 1H 1291h SEH e active rang A113 Rw 100 to O2 L input active range end voltage 1 1292h Ea eles active range A114 O2 L input active range start voltage to 100 1 1293h to 12aan_ Resorveo gt nsccessii EA Acceleration curve 12A5h constants setting A131 Rw hi smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling Loa Deceleration curve 12A6h constants setting A132 Rw h smallest swelling to 10 largest swelling 2 Reserved Inaccessible eee 0 digital operator 1 keypad potentiometer 2 input eal aaa R W via O 3 input via Ol 4 external communication 5 option 1 6 option 2 7 pulse train frequency input 4 147 Chapter 4 E
219. e inverter and commercial power supply to your system of which the load causes a considerable moment of inertia You can use the inverter to accelerate and decelerate the motor in the system and the commercial power supply to drive the motor for constant speed operation To use this function assign function 14 CS to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the CS terminal is turned off with an operation command being input the inverter waits for the retry wait time before motor restart b003 adjusts the output frequency to the speed of the free running motor and then accelerates the motor with the adjusted frequency The start mode is the starting with matching frequency However the inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the motor speed is no more than half the base frequency or 2 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly 3 If the motor speed falls to the restart frequency threshold b007 the inverter will start the motor with 0 Hz See Section 4 2 27 Remark Mechanically interlock the MC3 and MC2 contacts with each other Otherwise you may damage the drive If the earth leakage breaker ELB trips because of a ground fault the commercial power will be disabled Therefore connect a backup power supply from the commercial power line circuit ELBC to your system if needed Use weak current type relays for FWY RVY and CSY The figures below show the sequence and timing of operations f
220. e monitoring 4 4 4 63 Al o AEEA seeeteeeeeseeseeseeenteseeseeneeneseey 4 47 4 61 Cumulative running time scececsccccccccccssssssssesssesee 4 4 Absolute position control 4 106 4 107 Current position monitor 4 5 acceleration deceleration patterns 4 32 2CH POSION ONO bse gestern sashes 4 30 acceleration curve constant 43D SOM tes testes testes teeseeeteeetseteeeeentseneeeneteneeneeeacens acceleration time Acceleration 2 time ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteees D acceleration stop se teiteteteteeeeseneneneeseneceneetess data comparison display 1 4 74 4 75 actual frequency monitoring DB 4 20 pe ge nee es igipe eee cs pe tee et DG braking ei 2c dhoiedieee diag iii 4 21 ae ee DC voltage MONitOTiNG k 4 6 dlani code output E eee ew FA deceleration 2 time setting eee 4 31 PUL ceseesenseneseeseeneaneesesseees deceleration and stopping at power alarm relay terminal function failure 4 81 allowable under voltage power failure TO eager E oie ierk k i eoig veids A Me ee ee ae deceleration overvoltage restraint 4 42 AM ee 2 7 4 74 deceleration time aeee 4 10 analog command holding oo I NS 4 58 fo CTE MLA PEE E TT 4 12 N N AT Ay Neg ocr Detection of terminal disconnection 4 71 analog input filter 1 21 21 21 21121121 111111217511 el digital OPCratOr ececceceecceecseceeeeseneees 2 19 3 3 asic display
221. e output voltage AVR voltage select 100 A045 Base Maximum frequency frequency Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 17 VIF characteristic curve selection S Related code A044 A244 A344 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 b112 Free setting V f frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 b101 b103 b105 b107 b109 b111 b113 Free setting V f voltage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The V F characteristic curve selection function allows you to set the output voltage output frequency V f characteristic To switch the V F characteristic curve selection among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching V f characteristic 00 Constant torque characteristic VC ___ S Oe 01 Reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power of VP A044 A244 Free V f characteristic Available only for A044 and A244 Sensorless vector control SLV Available only for A044 and A244 See Section A344 03 4 2 96 04 0 Hz range sensorless vector Available only for A044 and A244 See Section control 4 2 97 Vector control with sensor V2 Available only for A044 1 Constant torque characteristic VC With this control system set the output voltage is in proportion to the output frequency within the range from 0 Hz to the base frequency Within the output frequency range over the base frequency up t
222. e sources Check the main circuit element for damage Main Cir Check the output circuit for a short circuit Check the IGBT Check the inverter for abnormality Repair the inverter Check the output circuit for a short circuit Check the output cables Check for the ground fault Check the output cables and motor Check the main circuit element for damage Check the IGBT Check the heat sink for clogging Clean the heat sink Check whether the motor temperature is high Check the motor temperature Check whether the internal thermistor of the motor has been damaged Check the thermistor Check whether noise has been mixed in the thermistor signal Separate the thermistor wiring from other wirings Check whether the brake has been turned on and off or not Check the brake Check whether the wait time b124 is too short Increase the wait time b124 Check whether the braking confirmation signal has been input Check whether an error has occurred in the external equipment since the emergency stop function was enabled Recover the external equipment from the error Check whether the motor load is too high Reduce the load factor OL LowSP Check whether the communication speed setting is correct Check whether the wiring distance is appropriate Check the connections Check whether the option board is mounted correctly Check the board mounting Check whether the option board is used corre
223. e speed during regeneration g b025 Overload restriction setting 2 0 20 x rated current to 2 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter x 1 50 x O o 5 ge 5 b026 A rate at overload restriction 0 10 to 30 00 s 1 00 x o g b027 Overcurrent suppression enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 01 x O 4 40 5 b028 Active frequency matching scan 0 20 x rated current to 2 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter x O g start frequency 3 S bo29 Active frequency matching 0 10 to 30 00 s 0 50 x o 4 33 scan time constant Active frequency matching restart 00 frequency at the last shutoff 01 maximum frequency 02 set b030 00 x 0 frequency select frequency P 00 disabling change of data other than b031 when SFT is on 01 disabling T x change of data other than b031 and frequency settings when SFT is on 02 8 b031 Software lock mode selection disabling change of data other than b031 03 disabling change of data 01 x O 4 51 8 Si other than b031 and frequency settings 10 enabling data changes during Chapter 8 List of Data Settings disconnection Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed or allowed or _FF _FEF FUF not not b034 Run power on warning time 0 to 9999 0 to 9
224. e to ground the inverter and motor to prevent electric shock According to the Electric Apparatus Engineering Regulations connect 200 V class models to grounding electrodes constructed in compliance with type D grounding conventional type lll grounding with ground resistance of 1000 or less or the 400 V class models to grounding electrodes constructed in compliance with type C grounding conventional special type lll grounding with ground resistance of 100 or less Use a grounding cable thicker than the specified applicable cable and make the ground wiring as short as possible When grounding multiple inverters avoid a multi drop connection of the grounding route and formation of a ground loop otherwise the inverter may malfunction Grounding bolt prepared by user Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 Layout of main circuit terminals The figures below show the terminal layout on the main circuit terminal block of the inverter Terminal layout Inverter model sg 7 R S T PD P N U V W L1 L2 L3 1 T1 T2 T3 Jumper connecting G Ground terminal with P terminals PD and P G jumper shaded in the figure to enable disable the EMC filter function When not using the DCL do not remove the jumper from terminals PD and P Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function SJ700 055 to SJ700 075LFF2 SJ700 055 to SJ700 075HFF2 RO and T0 M4 Ground terminal M6 Oth
225. easy sequence user parameters P100 to P131 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 84 Function code display restriction Nr er Related code The function code display restriction function allows you to arbitrarily b037 Function code display restriction switch the display mode or the display content on the digital operator U001 to U012 User parameters 00 Full display Beet ate tae Function specific display l oti User setting display restriction Data comparison display Basic display no No assignment User parameters U001 to U012 d001 to P131 Selection of the code to be displayed All codes are selectable 1 Function specific display mode If a specific function has not been selected the monitor does not display the parameters concerning the specific function The following table lists the details of display conditions AEN A005 A006 A011 to A016 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C081 to C083 and C121 to C123 A001 10 A141 to A143 A002 01 03 04 or 05 b087 A017 01 d025 to d027 P100 to P131 A041 01 A046 and A047 A044 00 or 01 A041 A042 and A043 H002 H005 H050 H060 H061 H020 to H024 H030 to H034 A044 and or A244 03 04 or 05 ene d010 d012 b040 to b046 H001 and H070 to b100 to b113 A052 and A056 to A058 A053 to A055 and A059 d004 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A072 to A078 A101 A071 01 or 02 A102 A111 to A114 orsotorae C044 C052 C053 C081 to C083 and C121 to C123 A14
226. ecified for the motor constant selection HO02 H202 the motor constants of Hitachi s general purpose motors are set as defaults When you drive a Hitachi s general purpose motor with the inverter you can usually obtain the desired motor characteristics without problems If you cannot obtain the desired characteristics adjust the motor constant settings as described in Section 4 2 92 or 4 2 93 If you intend to use the online tuning function described later be sure to perform offline auto tuning beforehand The offline auto tuning function applies only to the 1st motor and 2nd motor controls Do not apply this function to the 3rd motor control The motor constant data corresponding to the date of one phase of y connection at 50 Hz Data or range of data Description 00 Disabling the auto tuning 01 Enabling the auto tuning without Auto tuning Setting H001 motor rotation Enabling the auto tuning with motor 02 A rotation 00 Hitachi general purpose motor data Motor data selection H002 H202 01 A tomaticallytuned data 02 Automatically tuned data online auto tuning enabled 0 2 to 75 0 kW 2 4 6 8 or 10 poles 0 000 to 65 53 Q 0 000 to 65 53 kgm 0 00 to 655 3 mH 0 00 to 655 3 A 0 001 to 9999 kgm 30 to maximum frequency setting Base frequency A003 setting Hz DC braking enable A051 W Disabling DC braking 01 Enabling DC braking 200 215 220 230 or 240 A082 AVR voltage select 380 400 415
227. ected by the noise caused by other signal currents including the motor current Range of data oOo O O Disabling the external thermistor TH function Enabling the TH function resistor element with Thermistor for thermal 01 a oa a positive temperature coefficient PTC protection control Related code b098 Thermistor for thermal protection control b099 Thermal protection level setting C085 Thermistor input tuning 02 Enabling the TH function resistor element with a negative temperature coefficient NTC Th imial orotection level Setting of the thermal resistance level P b099 0 to 9999 2 according to the thermistor specifications at setting aa which to trigger tripping Thermistor input tuning C085 0 0 to 1000 Setting for gain adjustment Note Specifying 01 for the thermistor for thermal protection control b098 without an external thermistor connected makes the inverter trip 4 72 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 81 FM terminal You can monitor the inverter output frequency and output current via the FM terminal on the control circuit terminal block The FM terminal is a pulse output terminal CHS eenia r 1 FM siginal selection AEn Cun ere Select the signal to be output from the FM terminal among those shown below Related code C027 FM siginal selection b081 FM terminal analog meter adjustment C030 Digital current monitor reference value If you select
228. ed inaccessible Z O O O 124Fh Frequency upper limit setting A061 high Rin tae ee ive seater to maximum 0 01 Hz 1250h Ti A061 low R W_ 0 or maximum frequency limit to maximum 1251h Frequency lower limit setting A062 high R W frequency 0 01 Hz 1252h Jump center frequency A062 low 1253h setting 1 A063 high 0 t040000 0 01 Hz 1254h __ Jump hysteresis frequency _A063 low 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz 1255h width setting 1 A064 i 1256h ume T frequency A065 high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1257h __ Jump hysteresis frequency _A065 low 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz 1258h width setting 2 A066 1259h e e medugney A067 high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 125Ah__ Jump hysteresis frequency _A067 low 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz 125Bh width setting 3 A068 125Ch ES stop frequency Ao69 high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 125Dh_ Acceleration stop time A069 low 0 to 600 0 1 sec 125Eh frequency setting A070 i i 4 146 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Bree Monitoring and setting items Data resolution ee a na 125Fh PID Function Enable A071 Rw R 1 enabling 2 enabling inverted data o 1260h _ A072 01 1260h PID proportional gain A072 to 50 1261h PID integral time constant A073 to 36000 1262h__ PID derivative gain A074 to 10000 0 01 sec 1263h A075 to 9999 0 input via Ol 1 input via O 2 external 1264h PV source setting A076 R W communication 3 pulse train frequency in
229. ed below How to issue the Enter command With the command 06h to write data to registers write all register data to the internal memory To recalculate the motor constants use the same command to write the data shown in the following table to register 0900h Data to be written 0000 Recalculating the motor constants 0001 Storing the register data Other than the above Recalculating the motor constants and storing the register data Notes Execution of the Enter command requires considerable time To check whether data writing is in progress monitor the status of the signal coil No 001Ah that indicates whether data writing is in progress The internal memory device of the inverter is subject to a limitation on the number of rewriting operations about 100 000 times Frequent use of the Enter command may shorten the inverter life 4 138 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 6 List of registers The R W column of the list indicates whether the coils and registers are read only or readable and writable R indicates a read only coil or register R W indicates a readable and writable coil or register i List of coils 0000h Reserved d a O 0005h _ Reserved S o l O 0006h_ Reserved S o o S O 000Fh_ Operation status R J1 Run 0 Stop interlocked to d003 0010h Rotation directon R 1 Reverse rotation 0 Forward rotation interlocked to d003 0011h Inverter ready R 1 Read
230. ed current Rated current of inverter x O g b127 Braking frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O ir z F z 5 b130 Overvoltage suppression enable 00 disabling the restraint 01 controlled deceleration 02 enabling 00 x o acceleration b131 Overvoltage suppression level 330 to 390 V 200 V class model 660 to 780 V 400 V class model zor x O b132 Acceleration and deceleration 0 10 to 30 00 s 1 00 x o 4 41 rate at overvoltage suppression p133 Overvoltage suppression 0 00 to 2 55 0 50 o o propotional gain bisa Overvoltage suppression Integral 0 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 s 0 060 o o Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed allowed FF _FEF _FUF or not or not coo1 Terminal 1 function 2 01 RV Reverse RUN 02 CF1 Multispeed 1 setting 03 CF2 Multispeed 2 18 y o setting 04 CF3 Multispeed 3 setting 05 CF4 Multispeed 4 setting 06 JG 2 7 z Jogging 07 DB external DC braking 08 SET Set 2nd motor data 09 2CH 0002 Terminal 2 function 2 stage acceleration deceleration 11 FRS free run stop 12 EXT external trip 16 g 3 peta 13 USP unattended start protection 14 CS commercial power source enable 06 Q003 Terminal 3 function 2 15 SFT software lock 16 AT analog input voltage current select 17
231. ed off while the inverter is driving the motor for reverse operation or stopping the motor Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 EWI Foward roion sgia Alarm relay terminal function C026 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 75 Reverse rotation signal RVR Related code The inverter continues to output the forward rotation RVR Eesti Sarl ee signal while it is driving the motor for reverse operation The RVR signal is turned off while the inverter is driving the motor for forward operation or stopping the motor Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 f A Alarm relay terminal function C026 RVR Reverse fotation signal Output frequency Hz Forward rotation signal Reverse rotation signal 4 2 76 Major failure signal MJA Related code The inverter outputs the major failure MJA signal in addition to C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions an alarm signal when it trips because of one of the errors listed C026 Alarm relay terminal function below This signal function applies to the tripping caused by hardware No Error code Description 1 E10 CT error 2 E11 CPU error 3 E14 Ground fault protection 4 E20 Temperature error due to cooling fan fault 5 E23 Gate array communication error 6 E25 Main circuit error Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 MJA Major failure signal Alarm relay terminal fun
232. eeees 4 14 Operation MOE eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 33 operation time over signal RNT plug in time over signal ONT cereale ete etn ees noe 4 59 4 63 Operator seiigis eireto ppatatin 4 14 4 65 ORG nai E eE aaa o Ab areata 4 109 OR sein Rit EEE 4 109 ORT ett A ie ta es het 4 104 4 110 OTTO eaten E a rade oe ae at EA 4 65 output current monitoring ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 output frequency monitoring cceeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 output frequency Setting ccccccceeceseeeeeeeees 4 7 output signal delay hold ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 70 output voltage monitoring ceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 overcurrent restraint 4 41 overload notice advance signal 4 40 4 41 overload restriction 4 40 OVOMONQUE Er EAr E E E 4 64 P PI SWitCHING oiie 4 58 P24 Biel oe PA eS ened AN Re 2 7 2 18 PCC dist Facil tain cath tein cone ata 4 59 PGR ETEA E TAEPA T TET 4 96 PON Tic tech ress iar ideea enne ireas aint 4 5 4 59 phase loss input eee eee 2 10 4 37 phase loss input protection 2 10 4 37 PID steed tse feet eed ence ot ac ees 4 26 PUD Giese E veecects weave ces steer ence eeaseen ee es 4 29 POK ieri oecite kees Tieck ei EE ei eet 4 104 positioning end irrin ee 4 96 Position DIAS dese cceesccce cies cee cet cee eed ee eet 4 103 Position command Monitor 4 5 Position range specification 0000 4 110 Power MOnNItOrINg eea 4 3 PPa a E
233. efore do not touch any terminals of the inverter or any power lines e g motor cables Otherwise electric shock injury or ground fault may result When the emergency stop function is enabled intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 are used exclusively for this function and no other functions can be assigned to these terminals Even if other functions have been assigned to these terminals these are automatically disabled and these terminals are used exclusively for the emergency stop function Terminal 1 function This terminal always serves as the a NO contact for the reset RS signal This signal resets the inverter and releases the inverter from the trip due to emergency stop E37 Terminal 3 function This terminal always serves as the b NC contact for the emergency stop EMR signal This signal shuts off the inverter output without the operation by internal CPU software This signal makes the inverter trip due to emergency stop E37 Note If intelligent input terminal 3 is left unconnected the cable connected to the terminal is disconnected or the signal logic is improper the inverter trips due to emergency stop E37 If this occurs check and correct the wiring and signal logic and then input the reset RS signal Only the reset RS signal input from intelligent input terminal 1 can release the inverter from tripping due to emergency stop E37 The inverter cannot be released from the E37 status by any o
234. el 1 Confirm that all wirings are correct 2 Turn on the earth leakage breaker ELB to supply power to the inverter The POWER lamp red LED of the digital operator goes on When using an inverter with the factory setting proceed to step 5 3 Select the digital operator as the operating device via the frequency source setting function Display the function code A001 on the monitor screen and then press the os key once The monitor shows a _2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 02 and then press the key once to specify the digital operator as the operating device to input frequency setting commands The display reverts to A001 4 Select the digital operator as the operating device by the run command source setting function Display the function code A002 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a 2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 02 and then press the key once to specify the digital operator as the operating device to input operation commands The display reverts to A002 The operating device indicator lamp above the RUN key goes on 5 Set the output frequency Display the function code F001 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a preset output frequency With the factory setting 0 Hz is shown Use the and or 2 key to change the di
235. elect an earth leakage breaker ELB of which the rated sensitivity current matches the total length of cables connected between the inverter and power supply and between the inverter and motor Do not use a high speed type ELB Power supply Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 pottaa mmmn mm ma a M M a aM a a a MaMa MM MMM ELB Magnetic contactor Note 9 Note 10 but use a delayed type ELB because the high speed type may malfunction When a CV cable is used for wiring through a metal conduit the average current leakage is 30 mA km When an IV cable which has a high relative dielectric constant is used the leakage current is about eight times as high as the standard cable Therefore when using an IV cable use the ELB of which the rated sensitivity current is eight times as high as that given in the table below If the total cable length exceeds 100 m use a CV cable Total cable length Sensitivity current mA 100 m or less 300 m or less Reactor on input side for harmonic control power supply coordination and power factor improvement ALI XXX Noise filter for inverter NF XXX Radio noise filter Zero phase reactor ZCL X Radio noise filter on input side Capacitor filter CFI X DC reactor DCL X XX Braking resistor Regenerative braking unit Noise filter on the output side ACF CX Radio noise filter Zero phase reactor ZCL XXX AC reactor
236. election of restart mode b001 t0 Duration of instantaneous power failure t1 Allowable under voltage power failure time b002 t2 Retry wait time before motor restart b003 Example 1 Example 2 Power supply Power supply Inverter output Inverter output l Freerunning Free running Motor speed L Motor speed ale to t2 5 to 1 gt lt gt Example 3 When the motor frequency speed Example 4 When the motor frequency speed is more than the setting of b007 is less than the setting of b007 Power supply Power supply Inverter output Inverter output Motor frequency speed Free running Free running b007 Motor frequency speed Starting with l i matching o0 g _ frequency tO t2 D ith en gt lt gt i o le is 4 34 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Output of the alarms for instantaneous power failure and undervoltage in the stopped state Use function b004 to specify whether to output an alarm when instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs The inverter outputs the alarm providing the control power remains in the inverter Output of the alarms for instantaneous power failure and undervoltage in the stopped state Examples 5 to 7 show the alarm output operations with standard settings Examples 8 to 10 show the alarm output operations with the settings to supply DC power P N to control power supply terminals RO
237. emergency stop switch separately Otherwise you run the risk of injury If an operation command has been input to the inverter before the inverter enters alarm status the inverter will restart suddenly when the alarm status is reset Before resetting the alarm status make sure that no operation command has been input While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any internal part of the inverter or insert a bar in it Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Do not touch the heat sink which heats up during the inverter operation Otherwise you run the risk of burn injury The inverter allows you to easily control the speed of motor or machine operations Before operating the inverter confirm the capacity and ratings of the motor or machine controlled by the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury and damage to machine Install an external brake system if needed Otherwise you run the risk of injury When using the inverter to operate a standard motor at a frequency of over 60 Hz check the allowable motor speeds with the manufacturers of the motor and the machine to be driven and obtain their consent before starting inverter operation Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the motor and machine and injury During inverter operation check the motor for the direction of rotation abnormal sound and vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the machine driven by the motor Chapter 3 Operation
238. en the other control method is selected 4 1 12 Output voltage monitoring Peiatedi cod When the output voltage monitoring function d013 is selected the d013 Output voltage monitoring inverter displays the voltage output from the inverter The V monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the output voltage Display 0 0 to 600 0 in steps of 0 1 V remark Displayed value may not be accurate when the output voltage is differ from input voltage 4 1 13 Power monitoring R elated code When the power monitoring function d014 is selected the inverter d014 Power monitoring displays the electric power momentary value input to the inverter The kW monitor lamps V and A lamps light up while the inverter is displaying the input power Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 kW 4 3 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 14 Cumulative power monitoring When the cumulative power monitoring function is selected the inverter displays the cumulative value of electric power input to the inverter You can also convert the value to be displayed to gain data by setting the cumulative input power display gain setting b079 Related code d015 Cumulat ve power monitoring b078 Cumulative power clearance b079 Cumulative input power display gain setting Value displayed by function d015 calculated value of input power kW h cumulative input power display gain setting b079 The cumulative power input
239. enabled during operation 123Ah_ Reserved t SF 123Bh Ker cela method A041 R W manual torque boost 1 automatic torque boost 123Ch Manual torque boost value A042 R W_ O to 200 123Dh Manual torque boost A043 R w o to 500 frequency adjustment VIE characteristic curve VC 1 VP 2 free V f 3 Sensorless vector 123Eh A044 R W control 4 OHz range sensorless vector 5 vector selection 1st motor with sensor e oO 2n zamn EE Poe 123Fh_ 123Fh V f gain setting A045 R W 20 to 100 1 Voltage compensation gain 1240h setting for automatic torque A046 R W 0 to 255 1 boost 1st motor Slippage compensation gain 1241h__ setting for automatic torque A047 R W 0 to 255 1 boost 1st motor 1242h to1244h Reserved Inaccessible 1245h DC braking enable W JO disabling 1 enabling 2 set frequency only 1246h DC braking frequency setting A052 R W_ 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1247h DC braking wait time A053 R W_ 0 to 50 0 1 sec 1248h PC braking force during A054 RIW oto 100 1 deceleration DC braking time for 1249h DE braking A055 R w 0 to 600 0 1 sec 124Ah e braking edge or level A056 R W o edge operation 1 level operation detection for DB input 124Bh DC braking force for starting A057 R W_ O to 100 1 124Ch DC braking time for starting A058 R W_ 0 to 600 0 1 sec 124Dh eae carrier frequency 34059 R W 5 to 150 0 1 kHz 124Eh_ Reserv
240. ency setting If the motor operation is unstable check the motor capacity setting HO03 H203 and motor pole setting H004 H204 to determine whether the settings match the motor specifications If they do not match readjust the settings If the primary resistance of the motor is less than the standard motor specification try to increase the setting of HO06 H206 H306 step by step Try to reduce the setting of HO06 H206 H306 if the inverter is driving a motor of which the capacity is higher than the inverter rating You can also use the following methods to stabilize the motor operation 1 Reducing the carrier frequency b083 See Section 4 2 11 2 Reducing the V f gain setting A045 See Section 4 2 17 Stabilization constant H006 H206 0 to 255 Increase or reduce the setting to stabilize H306 the motor V f gain setting A045 20 to 100 Reduce the setting to stabilize the motor Carrier frequency setting b083 0 5 to 15 0 kHz Reduce the setting to stabilize the motor 4 2 88 Selection of operation at option board error You can select how the inverter operates when an error results from a built in option board between two modes In one mode the inverter trips In the other mode the inverter ignores the error and continues the operation When you use the feedback option board SJ FB as option board 1 specify 01 for P001 When you use the SJ FB as option board 2 specify 01 for P002 Operation mode on oO O O TR
241. ended start m protection USP commercial power supply switching CS software lock SFT analog input switching AT 3rd motor control SET3 reset RS starting by 3 wire input STA stopping by 3 wire input STP forward reverse switching by 3 wire input F R PID disable PID PID integration reset PIDC control gain switching CAS acceleration by remote control UP deceleration by remote control DWN data clearance by remote control UDC forcible operation OPE multispeed bit 1 SF 1 multispeed bit 2 SF2 multispeed bit 3 SF3 multispeed bit 4 SF4 multispeed bit 5 SF5 multispeed bit 6 SF6 multispeed bit 7 SF7 overload restriction selection OLR torque limit selection enabling disabling TL torque limit 1 TRQ1 torque limit 2 TRQ2 P PI switching PPI braking confirmation BOK orientation ORT LAD cancellation LAC clearance of position deviation PCLR permission of 90 shift phase STAT trigger for frequency addition A145 ADD forcible terminal operation F TM permission of torque command input ATR cumulative power clearance KHC servo on SON pre excitation FOC general purpose input 1 MI1 general purpose input 2 MI2 general purpose input 3 MI3 general purpose input 4 MI4 general purpose input 5 MI5 general purpose input 6 MI6 general purpose input 7 MI7 general purpose input 8 MI8 analog command holding AHD no assignment no Thermistor inpu
242. ent output torque unsigned output voltage input power electronic thermal overload LAD frequency motor temperature heat sink temperature and general output This terminal outputs one of the selected 0 to 10 VDC voltage output PWM output mode monitoring items The monitoring items available for selection include output frequency output current output torque Maximum allowable Digital monitor unsigned output voltage input power electronic thermal overload LAD current 1 2 mA voltage frequency motor temperature heat sink temperature general output Maximum frequency 3 6 digital output frequency and digital current monitor kHz For the items digital output frequency and digital current monitor this terminal outputs a digital pulse signal at 0 10 VDC with a duty ratio of 50 This terminal supplies 24 VDC power for contact input signals Interface power S f ee Maximum allowable output P24 If the source logic is selected this terminal is used as a common contact 3 supply current 100 mA input terminal This common terminal supplies power to the interface power supply P24 thermistor input TH and digital monitor FM terminals If the sink logic is selected this terminal is used as a common contact input terminal Do not ground this terminal put impedance 10kQ owable input voltages 3 to 12 VDC put impedance 10kQ owable input voltages 0 to 12 VDC Frequency command current
243. equency the output voltage is constant 4 16 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Free V f characteristic setting The free V f characteristic setting function allows you to set an arbitrary V f characteristic by specifying the voltages and frequencies b100 to b113 for the seven points on the V f characteristic curve The free V f frequencies 1 to 7 set by this function must always be in the collating sequence of 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4s5 lt 6 lt 7 Since all free V f frequencies are set to 0 Hz as default factory setting specify their arbitrary values begin setting with free setting V f frequency 7 The inverter cannot operate with the free V f characteristic in the factory setting Enabling the free V f characteristic setting function disables the torque boost selection A041 A241 base frequency setting A003 A203 A303 and maximum frequency setting A004 A204 A304 The inverter assumes the value of free setting V f frequency 7 as the maximum frequency i Spee t breakpoint of the Vif aha ceretoiive Free setting V f voltage 7 b113 Free setting V f voltage 6 b111 Free setting V f voltage 5 b109 peut a Ponpa Free setting V f voltage 4 b107 0 0 to 800 0 V Bteakoaiht of the V f Free setting V f voltage 3 b105 characteristic curve 1 Free setting V f voltage 2 b103 Free setting V f voltage 1 b101 Example Output voltage V V7 V6 V5 V4 V1 V2 V3 0 fi f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7
244. er 5 Error Codes 2 Error indications by protective functions with the digital option board SJ DG mounted Disol diaital Display on Name Description eR ae remote operator operator ERRI If timeout occurs during the communication between the inverter and digital option board the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right Note The input mode is determined by a combination of DI switch and rotary switch settings If the option board does not operate normally confirm the DIP switch and rotary switch settings on the option board SJ DG error Functions of the DIP and rotary switches on the digital option board SJ DG DIP switch Rotary Frediencv seitin Acceleration Torque limit Position switch q y g deceleration time setting setting setting Data resolution Switch No Code for 001 Hz o Rate 0 01 sec setting 0 OFF PAC batch input mode OFF BIN binary input ON BCD BCD input ON DIV divided inp ut mode O Input mode specified by switch settings Note For details refer to the instruction manual for the option board Chapter 5 Error Codes 3 Error indications by protective functions with the DeviceNet option board SJ DN mounted If the disconnection due to the Bus Off signal or timeout occurs during the DeviceNet operation using DeviceNet commands communicatio the i
245. er of restarts or power 00 16 times 01 unlimited 00 x o 2 failure under voltage trip events S b006 Phase loss detection enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 x O 4 36 5 b007 Restart frequency threshold 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O 9 00 tripping 01 starting with O Hz 02 starting with matching frequency 03 5 b008 Selection of retry after tripping tripping after deceleration and stopping with matching frequency 04 00 x O 5 restarting with active matching frequency 4 33 b009 Selection of retry after undervoltage 00 16 times 01 unlimited 00 x O D 8 b010 Selection of retry count after 1 to 3 times 3 x o overvoltage or overcurrent b011 Retry wait time after tripping 0 3 to 100 0 s 1 0 x O Electronic thermal setting b012 calculated within the inverter from 0 20 x rated current to 1 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter x O current output Electronic thermal setting b212 calculated within the inverter from 0 20 x rated current to 1 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter x O current output 2nd motor Electronic thermal setting b312 calculated within the inverter from 0 20 x rated current to 1 00 x rated current A Rated current of inverter x O 4 37 current output 3rd motor 5 b013 Electronic thermal characteristic 00 reduced torque characteristic 01 constant torque characteristic 02 00 01 01 x o 8 free setting 2 b213 Electronic thermal characteristi
246. er or insert a bar in it Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock or fire Do not touch the heat sink which heats up during the inverter operation Otherwise you run the risk of burn injury The inverter allows you to easily control the speed of motor or machine operations Before operating the inverter confirm the capacity and ratings of the motor or machine controlled by the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of injury Install an external brake system if needed Otherwise you run the risk of injury When using the inverter to operate a standard motor at a frequency of over 60 Hz check the allowable motor speeds with the manufacturers of the motor and the machine to be driven and obtain their consent before starting inverter operation Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the motor and machine During inverter operation check the motor for the direction of rotation abnormal sound and vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of damage to the machine driven by the motor Safety Instructions 4 Maintenance inspection and parts replacement Before inspecting the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply and wait for 10 minutes or more Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Before inspection confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off and the DC voltage between terminals P and N is 45 V or less Commit only a designated person to maintenance inspection and the replacement of parts Be sure
247. er parameter U 03 P103 Rw 0to65530 1 166Ah_ Easy sequence user parameter U 04 P104 Rw 0to65530 1 166Bh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 05 P105 Rw 0to65530 1 166Ch Easy sequence user parameter U 06 P106 Rw 0to65530 1 166Dh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 07 P107 Rw 0to6e5530 1 166Eh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 08 P108 Rw 0to65530 1 166Fh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 09 P109 Rw 0to65530 1 1670h _ Easy sequence user parameter U 10 P110 Rw 0to6e5530 1 1671h Easy sequence user parameter U 11 P111 Rw 0to65530 1 1672h_ Easy sequence user parameter U 12 P112 Rw 0to65530 1 1673h _ Easy sequence user parameter U 13 P113 Rw 0to65530 1 1674h Easy sequence user parameter U 14 P114 Rw 0to65530 1 1675h_ Easy sequence user parameter U 15 P115 Rw 0to65530 1 1676h _ Easy sequence user parameter U 16 P116 Rw 0to65530 1 1677h _ Easy sequence user parameter U 17 P117 Rw 0to65530 1 1678h_ Easy sequence user parameter U 18 P118 Rw 0to65530 1 1679h _ Easy sequence user parameter U 19 P119 Rw 0to65530 1 167Ah_ Easy sequence user parameter U 20 P120 RW 0to65530 1 167Bh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 21 P121 Rw 0to65530 1 167Ch Easy sequence user param
248. er terminals M6 SJ700 110LFF SJ700 11 OHFF RO and TO M4 Ground terminal M6 Other terminals M6 Ground terminal with jumper shaded in the figure to enable disable the EMC filter function When not using the DCL do not remove the jumper from terminals PD and P Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function NE S ECN s WN RUE P pt Ce Enabling the EMC filter Disabling the EMC filter factory setting SJ700 150 to SJ700 185LFF SJ700 150 to SJ700 220HFF RO and TO M4 Ground terminal M6 Other terminals M6 SJ700 220LFF RO and TO M4 Ground terminal M6 Other terminals M8 2 13 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal layout Inverter model G R an Ground terminal with jumper shaded in the figure to enable disable the EMC filter function Jumper connecting terminals PD and P pee ales When not using the DCL do not remove the jumper from terminals PD and P Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function Enabling the EMC filter Disabling the EMC filter factory setting G SJ700 300LFF RO and T0 M4 Ground terminal M6 Other terminals M8 SJ700 300HFF RO and TO M4 Ground terminal M6 Other terminals M6 SJ700 370LFF SJ700 370HFF RO and T0 M4 Ground terminal M8 Other terminals M8 j to o R S T PD P N U V W L1 L2 L3 1 11 T2 T3 DS Ground
249. eration The derivative D operation stands for the operation in which the operation quantity changes in proportion to the rate of change in the target value aipota ssia Large Large M A074 v Small The PI operation is a combination of the P operation 1 and operation 2 The PD operation is a combination of the P operation 1 and D operation 3 The PDI operation is a combination of the P operation 1 operation 2 and D operation 3 Operation quantity 3 PV source setting Select the terminal to be used for the feedback signal with the PV source setting function A076 The terminal to input the target value follows the frequency source setting A001 The terminal selected by the PV source setting A076 is excluded If the control circuit terminal block 01 has been specified for frequency source setting A001 the setting of AT selection A005 is invalid The table below shows how the PID target value is selected according to the setting of A006 when the analog input is selected by the PV source setting and the control circuit terminal block 01 is specified for A001 oon O oeeo csr on omer covers O Ea input to the OI terminal non reversible reversible result input to the O terminal non reversible reversible to the Ol and O terminals reversible Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions When you specify the 02 RS485 communication for the PV source setting A076
250. eration for the inverter operation specify the desired motor operation direction with function F004 and use the RUN and STOP RESET keys to start and stop the motor respectively If the start commands for both forward and reverse operations are input at the same time the inverter will assume the input of a stop command terminals FW and RV Run command remote operator communication terminals Terminal FW co19 00 Sst a NO contact sd C011 to C018 Note 1 If function 31 forcible operation or 51 forcible operation terminal is assigned to an intelligent input terminal the settings made with functions A001 and A002 will be invalidated when the said intelligent input terminal is turned on and those methods to input frequency setting and operation commands which are specified for the said terminal will be enabled Note 2 On the remote operator SRW being used to operate the inverter pressing the REMT remote key enables you to input both frequency setting and operation commands from the remote operator 4 8 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 6 Stop mode selection The stop mode selection function allows you to select one of two methods of stopping the motor when a stop command is input from the digital operator or via the control circuit terminal block One is to decelerate the motor according to the specified deceleration time and then stop it the other is to let the motor run freely until it stops If a s
251. erter even if it has stopped Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire If the retry mode has been selected the inverter will restart suddenly after a break in the tripping status Stay away from the machine controlled by the inverter when the inverter is under such circumstances Design the machine so that human safety can be ensured even when the inverter restarts suddenly Otherwise you run the risk of injury Do not select the retry mode for controlling an elevating or traveling device because output free running status occurs in retry mode Otherwise you run the risk of injury or damage to the machine controlled by the inverter If an operation command has been input to the inverter before a short term power failure the inverter may restart operation after the power recovery If such a restart may put persons in danger design a control circuit that disables the inverter from restarting after power recovery Otherwise you run the risk of injury The STOP key is effective only when its function is enabled by setting Prepare an emergency stop switch separately Otherwise you run the risk of injury If an operation command has been input to the inverter before the inverter enters alarm status the inverter will restart suddenly when the alarm status is reset Before resetting the alarm status make sure that no operation command has been input While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any internal part of the invert
252. erter output frequency reaches a set frequency When using the inverter for a lift use the frequency arrival signal as a trigger to start braking Use the over torque signal as the trigger to stop braking Assign the following functions to five of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 01 FA1 constant speed reached 02 FA2 set frequency overreached 06 FA3 set frequency reached 24 FA4 set frequency overreached 2 and 25 FAS set frequency reached 2 The hysteresis of each frequency arrival signal is as follows When the signal is on set frequency 1 of maximum frequency Hz When the signal is off set frequency 2 of maximum frequency Hz RUN Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C042 Frequency arrival setting for accel C043 Frequency arrival setting for decel C045 Frequency arrival setting for acceleration 2 C046 Frequency arrival setting for deceleration 2 The signal hysteresis at acceleration with function 06 FA3 or 25 FA5 set is as follows When the signal is on set frequency 1 of maximum frequency Hz When the signal is off set frequency 2 of maximum frequency Hz The signal hysteresis at deceleration with function 06 FA3 or 25 FAS set is as follows When the signal is on set frequency 1 of maximum frequency Hz When the sign
253. erter when the USP function has been enabled Reset the operation command and then turn on the inverter power Check for the ground fault Check the output cables and motor Check the inverter itself for abnormality Remove the output cables from the inverter and then check the inverter Check the main circuit for abnormality Check the main circuit with reference to Chapter 6 Repair the inverter Check whether the input voltage is high while the inverter is stopped Lower the input voltage suppress the power voltage fluctuation or connect an AC reactor between the power supply and the inverter input Check whether the power supply voltage has dropped Recover the power supply Check the MCB and magnetic contactors for poor contacts Replace the MCB and the magnetic contactor Inst P F Check whether the cooling efficiency has been lowered Replace the cooling fan Check the heat sink for clogging Clean the heat sink Check whether the inverter is installed vertically Check the installation Check whether the ambient temperature is high Lower the ambient temperature OH stFAN OH fin 3 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power Chapter 5 Error Codes Name Description Display on Display on Troubleshooting and corrective action Reference digital operator remote operator pag
254. ervoltage protection 9 SON or FOC operation in progress 9 CT error 10 CPU error 11 External trip 12 USP error 13 Ground fault protection 14 Input overvoltage protection 15 Instantaneous power failure protection 16 Power module temperature error with the 20 fan stopped Power module temperature error 21 Gate array communication error 23 Phase loss input protection 24 Main circuit error 25 IGBT error 30 Thermistor error 35 Braking error added 36 Emergency stop error 37 Electronic thermal protection at low speeds 38 Easy sequence error invalid instruction 43 Easy sequence error invalid nesting count 44 Easy sequence execution error 1 45 Easy sequence user trip 0 to 9 50 to 59 Option 1 error 0 to 9 60 to 69 Option 2 error 0 to 9 70 to 79 4 143 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iii List of registers monitoring Register Function name Function code 1001h d001 high 1002h Output frequency monitoring d00T low 1003h Output current monitoring d002 1004h Rotation direction minitoring d003 1005h__ Process variable PV PID d004 high 1006h feedback monitoring d004 low 1007h __ Intelligent input terminal status d005 R W Monitoring and setting items pala resolution 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 to 9999 01 A 0 Stopping 1 Forward rotation 2 Reverse 0 1 Hz rotation to 9990 0 1 2 0 Terminal 1 to 2 7 Terminal8 _ ___ 0 240 Terminal 1 to 247 Terminal 8 1 bit 2 i 40 Terminal
255. espectively 4 Function 64 EMR cannot be assigned to input terminal 3 by an operation from the digital operator The function is automatically assigned to the terminal when slide switch SW1 is set to ON 5 After slide switch SW1 has been set to ON once function assignments to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 are not returned to their original assignments If necessary re assign original functions to the intelligent input terminals 2 9 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Note e Zz Slide lever factory setting OFF oF G gt ON If the data of an optional operator SRW or SRW EX is copied If operator data is copied to your SJ700 series inverter whose slide switch SW1 is ON from another SJ700 series inverter whose slide switch SW1 is OFF or an SJ300 series inverter the digital operator on your SJ700 series inverter may display R ERROR COPY ROM for a moment This event may occur because the data on intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 cannot be copied since on your inverter exclusive functions have already been assigned to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 due to the slide switch SW11 setting to ON Note that other data is copied If this event occurs check the settings on both copy source and copy destination inverters Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 2 Wiring of the main circuit 1 Wiring instructions Before wiring be
256. ess of this setting STOP key enable Stop command with STOP key Trip reset command with STOP key Enabled Enabled b087 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 8 Acceleration deceleration time setting Related code Specify a longer time for slower acceleration or deceleration F002 F202 F302 P eaea Seal setting sv2n ra motors specify a shorter time for quicker acceleration or deceleration F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting The time set with this function is the time to accelerate or 4st 2nd 3rd motors decelerate the motor from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency or A004 A204 A304 Maximum frequency setting vice versa 1st 2nd 3rd motors If you assign the LAD cancellation LAC function to an P031 Accel decel time input selection C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions intelligent input terminal and turns on the terminal the set acceleration deceleration time will be ignored and the output frequency will immediately follow the frequency setting command To switch the acceleration and deceleration time among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SETS3 to intelligent input terminals see Section 4 2 38 Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching As the Accel decel time input selection by P031 select one of the 1 input from the digital operation 2 input from option board 1 3 input from option board 2 and 4 i
257. ess of whether or not the corresponding terminal is turned on 4 48 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 42 Jogging JG command settin The jogging command setting function allows you to set and finely tune the motor stopping position To use this function assign function 06 JG to an intelligent input terminal 1 Jog frequency setting Related code A038 Jog frequency setting A039 Jog stop mode C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Output frequency A038 Since the inverter operates the motor with a full voltage for the jogging operation the inverter can easily trip during the latter Adjust the jog frequency setting A038 properly so that the inverter will not trip Range of data Description Jog frequency 0 0 or start frequency Setting of the frequency to output during jogging A038 A setting to 9 99 Hz operation 2 Jog stop mode Data Description 00 Disabling jogging while the motor is operating and 02 See Note 2 A039 Jog stop mode 05 See Note 2 enabling free running when the motor is stopped Disabling jogging while the motor is operating and 01 enabling stopping after deceleration when the motor is stopped Disabling jogging while the motor is operating and enabling DC braking when the motor is stopped Enabling jogging while the motor is operating and 93 enabling free running when the motor is stopped Enabling jogging while the motor is operating and
258. eter U 22 P122 Rw 0to65530 _ 1 167Dh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 23 P123 Rw 0to65530 1 167Eh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 24 P124 Rw 0to65530 1 167Fh_ Easy sequence user parameter U 25 P125 Rw Oto65530_ 1 4 158 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register Eun tionname Function code R W Monitoring and setting items Data Register No resolution No 1681h Easy sequence user parameter U 27 P127 0 to 65530 1 1682h Easy sequence user parameter U 28 P128 0 to 65530 1683h Easy sequence user parameter U 29 P129 0 to 65530 30 1685h _ Easy sequence user parameter U 31 P131 0 to 65530 1686h to 1 The following table lists the code data for parameter H003 motor capacity selection Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Japan or U S A mode __ 0085 000r02 PAM OT S ee S EU mode b085 01 0 2 kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 4 0 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Japan or U S A mode P OOO ke ee eae E EU mode b085 01 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 4 159 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vi List of registers 2nd control settings vi o 2103h Acceleration 1 time setting 2nd 2104h motor 2105h Deceleration time 2nd motor 2106h 2107h to 2202h Reserved vii List of registers function modes for the 2nd con
259. etting 3 Over torque reverse 3 z 4 056 regenerating level setting 0 to 200 100 9 4 65 C057 Over torque reverse driving level 0 to 200 100 x o setting cosg Over torque forward 0 to 200 100 x o regenerating level setting co61 Electronic thermal warning level 0 to 100 80 x o 4 38 setting C062 Alarm code output 00 disabling 01 3 bits 02 4 bits 00 x O 4 65 C063 Zero speed detection level 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 Hz 0 00 x O 4 64 C064 Heat sink overheat warning level 0 to 200 0 C 120 x O 4 68 c071 Communication speed selection 02 loopback test 03 2 400 bps 04 4 800 bps 05 9 600 bps 06 04 x o 19 200 bps C072 Node allocation 1 to 32 1 x O 5 C073 Communication data length 7 7 bits 8 8 bits 7 x o kz selection 5 co74 Communication parity selection 00 no parity 01 even parity 02 odd parity 00 O 5 C075 Communication stop bit selection 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 1 O 4 113 oO 2 A 00 tripping 01 tripping after decelerating and stopping the motor 02 2 C076 Selection of the operation after ignoring errors 03 stopping the motor after free running 04 02 x G communication error 5 4 E decelerating and stopping the motor Q 8 Shag as a c077 Communication timeout limit 0 00 to 99 99 s 0 00 x o before tripping C078 Communication wait time 0 to 1000 ms 0 x O C079 Communication mode selection 00 ASCIl 01 Modbus RTU 00 x O C081 O input span calibration 0 to 9999 100
260. etting electronic thermal This function provides optimum overheat protection that is also frequency 1 2 3 designed with the lowering of the motor s cooling performance O Free setting electronic thermal curren at low speeds in mind l C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions You can configure this function so that the inverter outputs a C026 Alarm relay terminal function warning signal before it trips for electronic thermal protection C061 Electronic thermal warning level setting 1 Electronic thermal level Range of data Electronic thermal setting calculated within b012 b212 b312 0 2 x rated current o See the example below the inverter from current 1 0 x rated current output Example Setting on the SJ700 150LFF Trip tim Rated current 64 A Range of setting 12 8 A 20 to 64 0 A 100 When 64 Ais set as the electronic thermal setting 6012 the time limit characteristic is as shown on the right 60 3 0 0 oT TA ae Motor current A 109 150 200 Ratio to the rated 2 Electronic thermal characteristic eee The frequency characteristic set as the electronic thermal characteristic is integrated with the value of b012 b212 or b312 The cooling fan performance of a general purpose motor lowers when the motor speed is low So load current is decreased The reduced torque characteristic is designed to match the heat generation by Hitachi s general purpose
261. etting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O 4 47 g A026 Multispeed 6 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O 2 S A027 Multispeed 7 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O oO 3 A028 Multispeed 8 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O a e g A029 Multispeed 9 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O oO amp A030 _ Multispeed 10 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O e A031 Multispeed 11 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A032 Multispeed 12 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A033 Multispeed 13 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A034 Multispeed 14 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A035 Multispeed 15 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A038 Jog frequency setting Start frequency to 9 99 Hz 1 00 O O 00 free running after jogging stops disabled during operation 01 deceleration and stop after jogging stops disabled during operation 02 DC 4 49 A039 Jog stop mode braking after jogging stops disabled during operation 03 free running after 00 x o
262. eturn limit function 0000010000000000 0000000000000200 ORG Zero return trigger function 0000020000000000 0000000000000400 FOT forward drive stop 0000040000000000 0000000000000800 ROT reverse drive stop 0000080000000000 0000000000001000 SPD speed position switching 0000100000000000 0000000000002000 PCNT pulse counter 0000200000000000 0000000000004000 PCC pulse counter clear 0000400000000000 0000000000008000 0000800000000000 0000000000010000 0001000000000000 0000000000020000 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 0004000000000000 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 0000000000100000 0010000000000000 0000000000200000 0020000000000000 0000000000400000 0040000000000000 0000000000800000 0080000000000000 0000000001000000 0100000000000000 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 0000000004000000 0400000000000000 0000000008000000 0800000000000000 0000000010000000 1000000000000000 0000000020000000 2000000000000000 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 0000000080000000 8000000000000000 Example When activating the forward rotation Multispeed 1 setting and Multispeed 2 setting settings on the inverter with station No 01 specify the following in the Data part 0x0000000000000001 0x0000000000000004 0x0000000000000008 0x000000000000000D Consequently the whole transmission frame is as fol
263. f TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter ACK Control code acknowledgement 1 byte ACK 0x06 BCC Blockcheck code 2 bytes XOR of the items from Station No to ACK See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D ii Negative response Response frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter NAK Control code negative 1 byte NAK 0x15 acknowledgement Error code Content of communication error 2 bytes See Note 13 XOR of the items from Station No to Error BOE Block ees cade 2 bytes code See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 15 Error codes Error code Description 01H Parity error 02H Sum check error 03H Framing error 04H Overrun 05H Protocol error 06H ASCII code error 07H Receiving buffer overflow 08H Reception timeout 11H Command error 12H 13H Execution disabled 14H 15H 16H Parameter error 17H If a command is broadcasted to all inverter stations no response will be returned to the external control system 4 127 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 How to calculate the block check code BCC Example When using the 01 command frequency setting command to set the inverter output frequency
264. feedback data Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code P011 Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting P014 Home search stop position setting P015 Home search speed setting P016 Home search direction setting P017 Home search completion range setting P018 Home search completion delay time setting P023 Position loop gain setting C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function Item Data or range of data Encoder pulse per revolution P011 128 to 9999 or 1000 to 6553 PPR setting 10000 to 65535 pulses 4 3 11 Home search function The home search function allows you to make the inverter locate the motor shaft at a specified position You can use this function for example to stop a metal cutting machine to replace the tool attached to the main spindle When using the home search function be sure to insert a reference point pulse signal between the EZP pulse and EZN pulse signals from the encoder Home search stop position P014 0 to 4095 setting Home search speed setting P015 9 001039 iene See Note 1 Home search direction setting EE Home search completion range RiT 0 to 9999 or 1000 10000 ee setting pulses Home search completion delay P018 0 00 to 9 99 s time setting Position loop gain setting Terminal function C001 tocoos SP Operation command FW
265. fied in the query and the data read from the register or coil ii Response upon error Field configuration Slave address Exception code CRC 16 If the query includes an error other than a communication error the inverter returns an exception response without executing the function specified by the query To know the error check the function code set in the exception response The exception response in reply to a query includes a function code that is the sum of 80h and the function code specified by the query The exception code in the exception response indicates the content of the error Exception codes Writing to a register during tripping because of undervoltage Writing to a read only register coil The inverter restricts the execution of the specified function Rewriting a register that cannot be rewritten during the operation 22h Issuing an Enter command during the operation in undervoltage status iv No response The inverter ignores a query without returning any response if the query is a broadcast query acommunication occurs during the reception of the query the slave address specified in the query differs from that of the inverter the time interval between data items in the query message is less than the time corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters or the data length of the query is invalid Note In the master system set a timer to monitor the responses fro
266. for the output side For reducing vibrations and preventing thermal relay malfunction ACL X XX Use this reactor to control harmonic waves or when the imbalance of power supply voltage is 3 or more when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more or when the power voltage may change rapidly This reactor also improves the power factor This noise filter reduces the conductive noise that is generated by the inverter and transmitted in cables Connect this noise filter to the primary side input side of the inverter The inverter may generate radio noise through power supply wiring during operation Use this noise filter to reduce the radio noise radiant noise Use this noise filter to reduce the radiant noise radiated from input cables Use this reactor to control the harmonic waves generated by the inverter Use these devices to increase the braking torque of the inverter for operation in which the inverter turns the connected load on and off very frequently or decelerates the load running with a high moment of inertia Connect this noise filter between the inverter and motor to reduce the radiant noise radiated from cables for the purpose of reducing the electromagnetic interference with radio and television reception and preventing malfunctions of measuring equipment and sensors Use this noise filter to reduce the noise generated on the output side of the inverter This noise filter can be used on both the input and output s
267. g p constant speed operation Low current indication signal A 1427h detection level 9 C039 R W 0 to 2000 0 1 00 output during acceleration deceleration and 1428h Overload signal output mode C040 R W constant speed operation 01 output only during constant speed operation 1429h Overload level setting C041 R W_ 0 to 2000 0 1 P3 g PJESES ss 4 153 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions No T42Ah l 7142Bh Frequency arrival setting for accel 142Ch 142Dh Frequency arrival setting for decel 142Eh PID deviation level setting Frequency arrival setting for acceleration 2 Frequency arrival setting for 1432h deceleration 2 1433h to 1437h Reserved 1438h Maximum PID feedback data Function code C042 high C042 low C043 high C043 low C045 low C046 high C046 low Monitoring and setting items Data resolution eas 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 to 1000 0 1 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz Inaccessible to 1000 0 1 to 1000 0 1 143Ah_ Reserved R W setting level setting setting level setting _ Inaccessible i o oo __ Inaccessible _ _ C062 R W 0 disabling alarm output 1 3 bits 2 4bits C063 R W C064 R W 1445h to 3 ec 144Bh Communication speed selection C071 R W cov bes Sonia 4 4 800 bps 5 a C072 RW 1 to032 o oo i e ce EA C074 R W _ 00 no parity 01 even parit
268. g Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed allowed FF _FEF _FUF or not or not H050 PI proportional gain for 1st motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O O H250 PI proportional gain for 2nd motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O 12 H051 PI integral gain for 1st motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O O H251 PI integral gain for 2nd motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 O 12 H052 P proportional gain setting for 1st 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 o o 4 58 motor H252 P proportional gain setting for 2nd 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 o o r motor S H060 Zero LV Imit for 1st motor 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 O O H260 Zero LV Imit for 2nd motor 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 O O oO 5 Ho61 Zero LV starting boost current for 0 to 50 50 o o E 1st motor 5 4 90 H261 Aah LV starting boost current for 0 to 50 50 o o nd motor H070 Terminal selection PI proportional 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 o o gain setting H071 Terminal selection PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 o o setting 4 58 H072 Terminal selection P proportional 0 00 to 10 00 1 00 o gain setting H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 ms 100 Q 8 14 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Optional functions Setting Change Default during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page allowed allowed
269. g between the 1st 2nd and 3rd when motor stops controls is disabled Switching the motor control is valid onlywhen the motor is stopped so change is reflected after the operation The above setting items printed in italic bold type can be adjusted even while the inverter is operating the motor Whether each item can be set during operation and whether it can be changed during operation are indicated in the list of data settings in Chapter 8 4 50 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 44 Software lock SFT function Related code The software lock function allows you to specify whether to disable b031 Software lock mode selection _ rewriting of the data set for functional items Use this function to ES to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 TA protect the data against accidental rewriting You can select the functional items to be locked and the method of locking as described below When using an intelligent input terminal for this function assign function 15 SFT to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 Data SFT terminal ON OFF Disabling rewriting of items other than b031 when SFT is on enabling rewriting when SFT is off Disabling the rewriting of items other than b031 F001 A020 01 ON OFF A220 A320 A021 to A035 and A038 when SFT is on or b031 enabling rewriting when SFT is off 02 Disabling the rewriting of items other than b031 EET 2a Disabling the rewriting of ite
270. g the Input Output Voltages Current and Power 0008 6 6 Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection Before inspecting the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply and wait for 10 minutes or more Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Before inspection confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off and the DC voltage between terminals P and N is 45 V or less Commit only a designated person to maintenance inspection and the replacement of parts Be sure to remove wristwatches and metal accessories e g bracelets before maintenance and inspection work and to use insulated tools for the work Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Never modify the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury 6 1 1 Daily inspection Basically check your system during the inverter operation to confirm that 1 the motor is operating according to the settings on the inverter 2 the installation environment is normal 3 the cooling system is normal 4 no abnormal vibrations and noise are generated 5 no equipment overheating and discoloration are found and 6 there are no unusual smells While the inverter is operating measure the inverter input power voltage with a multimeter to confirm that 1 the power supply voltage does not fluctuate often and 2 the voltages between the power supply wires are balanced
271. g this function follow the instructions below 1 Be sure to perform the offline auto tuning before the online auto tuning 2 Since the data for online tuning is calculated by the offline auto tuning perform the offline tuning at least once even when the inverter is used to drive a Hitachi general purpose motor 3 The online auto tuning operates for a maximum of 5 seconds after the motor has stopped DC excitation is executed once to tune constants R1 and R2 The result of tuning is not reflected in the data displayed on the monitor If an operation command is input during the auto tuning operation the online auto tuning ends midway because the operation command has priority over the online auto tuning In such cases the result of tuning is not reflected in the inverter settings 4 When the DC braking at stopping has been specified the online tuning is performed after the DC braking operation ends Operating procedure 1 Specify 02 enabling the online auto tuning for the motor constant selection H002 Specify 00 disabling the auto tuning for the Auto tuning Setting H001 2 Input an operation command The inverter will automatically perform the online auto tuning after the motor stops 4 2 94 Secondary resistance compensation temperature compensation function Related code P025 Temperature compensation thermistor enable b098 Thermistor for thermal protection control The secondary resistance compensation
272. gain can be set within the range 1 to 1000 in steps of 1 You can clear the cumulative power data by specifying 01 for the cumulative power clearance function b078 and pressing the STR key You can also clear the cumulative power data at an intelligent input terminal by assigning function 53 KHC cumulative power clearance to the intelligent input terminal When the cumulative input power display gain setting 0079 is set to 1000 the cumulative power data up to 999000 kW h can be displayed Display 0 0 to 999 9 in steps of 1 kW h or the unit set for function b079 1000 to 9999 in units of 10 kW h or the unit set for function b079 100 to 999 in units of 1000 kW h or the unit set for function b079 4 1 15 Cumulative operation RUN time monitoring Related code When the cumulative operation RUN time monitoring function d016 is 4016 Cumulative operation RUN time selected the inverter displays the cumulative time of the inverter monitoring operation Display 0 to 9999 in units of 1 hour 1000 to 9999 in units of 10 hours 100 to T999 in units of 1 000 hours 4 1 16 Cumulative power on time monitoring Related code When the cumulative power on time monitoring function d017 is selected d017 Cumulative power on time the inverter displays the cumulative time throughout which the inverter monitoring power has been on Display 0 to 9999 in units of 1 hour 1000 to 9999 in units of 10 hours 100 to 999
273. general purpose output 3 M03 general purpose output 4 M04 general purpose output 5 M05 general purpose output 6 M06 inverter ready IRDY forward rotation FWR reverse rotation RVR major failure MJA alarm code 0 to 3 ACO to AC3 Intelligent monitor output terminals Analog voltage output analog current output pulse string output e g A F D F n fold pulse output only A T V P Monitoring on display Output frequency output current output torque frequency conversion data trip history input output terminal status electric power and others Other functions Carrier frequency variation operation sensorless vector control of two motors by one inverter Free V f setting 7 breakpoints frequency upper lower limit jump center frequency acceleration deceleration according to characteristic curve manual torque boost level breakpoint energy saving operation analog meter adjustment start frequency setting carrier frequency adjustment electronic thermal function available also for free setting external start end frequency frequency rate analog input selection retry after trip restart after instantaneous power failure output of various signals starting with reduced voltage overload restriction initial value setting automatic deceleration at power failure AVR function fuzzy acceleration deceleration online offline auto tuning high torque multi motor 0 5 to 15 kHz Protectiv
274. gnal 1 selection 2 C143 02 FA2 Logical output signal 1 operator C143 00 AND Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Data or range of data 33 LOG1 Logical operation result 1 C142 C143 and C144 C021 to C025 C148 C149 and C150 C151 C152 and C153 terminal function C154 C155 and C156 38 LOG6 Logical operation result 6 C157 C158 and C159 Selection of 00 to 56 from the Selection of operation target 1 Logical output C142 C145 C148 signal selection 1 C151 C154 C157 7 ta except LOG1 to LOG6 output to intelligent output terminals Logical output C143 C146 C149 Selection of 00 to 56 from the Selection of operation target 2 signal selection 2 C152 C155 C158 92ta except LOG1 to LOG6 output 9 to intelligent output terminals AND Logical output pO AND signal operator selection 4 2 67 Capacitor life warning signal WAC Related code The inverter checks the operating life of the capacitors on the S en hi aon Ml m 5 functions internal circuit boards on the basis of the internal temperature PRA TR AY PANNA UNGAN and cumulative power on time You can monitor the state of the capacitor life warning WAC signal by using the life check monitoring function d022 If the WAC signal is output you are recommended to replace the main circuit and logic circuit boards Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 39 WAC Capacitor life warning signal Alarm relay terminal functio
275. gnal to be input to the O L terminal is 0 to 5 V specify 50 for A014 Example 1 A015 A105 00 Example 2 A015 A105 01 Out put frequency in the range from 0 to N01 3 8103 is 2 A011 A101 Out put frequency in the range from 0 to me A013 A103 is OHz Maximum frequency Maximum frequency A012 A102 A012 A102 A011 A101 A011 A101 1 O A013 A103 A014 A104 100 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA Analog input 0 01 Analog input 0 01 100 10 V 20 mA 0 A013 A103 A014 A104 0 V O mA 4 14 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Start end frequency settings for the O2 L terminal Range of data 02 start frequency A111 400 to 400 Hz Setting of the start frequency 02 end frequency A112 400 to 400 Hz Setting of the end frequency Example 3 02 start frequency Setting of the rate of the start frequency rate A113 100 to 100 to the external frequency command 10 to 10 V 1 02 end frequency Setting of the rate of the end frequency tale A114 100 to 100 to the external frequency command 10 to 10 V 1 1 The frequency rates correspond to the voltages Example 3 10 to 10 V of the external frequency command Maximum frequency for as follows forward operation 10 to 0 V 100 to 0 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 10V For example if the voltage of the signal to be input to 100 A113 the O2 L terminal is 5 to 5 V specify 50 for A114 a TETA EE A
276. h Trip monitoring 4 power on time high 0039h Trip monitoring 4 power on time low Output current at tripping DC input voltage at tripping Cumulative running time at tripping th Cumulative power on time at tripping th 4 141 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register Function name FUneNon R W Monitoring and setting items pata No code resolution 003Ah_ Trip monitoring 5 factor See the list of inverter trip factors below 003Bh_ Trip monitoring 5 inverter status See the list of inverter trip factors below 003Dh Trip monitoring 5 frequency low d085 003Ch Trip monitoring 5 frequency high 01040000 to 40000 0 01 Hz 003Eh Trip monitoring 5 current ee current at tripping 003Fh Trip monitoring 5 voltage DC input voltage at tripping 0040h Trip monitoring 5 running time high 0041h_ Trip monitoring 5 running time low Cumulative running time at tipping running Heat Cumulative running time at tipping h 0042h Trip monitoring 5 power on time high 0043h Trip monitoring 5 power on time low Cumulative power on time at tripping power on time at Cumulative power on time at tripping h Cumulative running time at tipping running time at Cumulative running time at tipping 004Ch Tap monitoring 6 Donen time Toh 004Dh_ Trip monitoring 6 power on time low Cumulative power on time af tripping 004Eh_ Programming error monitoring d090 R Wamingcode 004Fh to
277. he individual inverter models Model No Fuse circuit breaker A Type Rating SJ700 055LFF2 Inverse time 30A SJ700 075LFF2 Inverse time 40A SJ700 110LFF2 Inverse time 60A SJ700 150LFF2 Inverse time 80A SJ700 185LFF2 Inverse time 100A SJ700 220LFF2 Inverse time 125A SJ700 300LFF2 Inverse time 150A SJ700 370LFF2 Inverse time 175A SJ700 450LFF2 Inverse time 225A SJ700 550LFF2 Inverse time 250A SJ700 055HFF2 Inverse time 40A SJ700 075HFF2 Inverse time 40A SJ700 110HFF2 Inverse time 40A SJ700 150HFF2 Inverse time 40A SJ700 185HFF2 Inverse time 50A SJ700 220HFF2 Inverse time 60A SJ700 300HFF2 Inverse time 70A SJ700 370HFF2 Inverse time 90A SJ700 450HFF2 Inverse time 125A SJ700 550HFF2 Inverse time 125A 10 Field wiring of the inverter must incorporate UL listed CSA certified closed loop terminal connectors that match the wire gauge in terms of size The crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer must be used to secure each connector vii Contents Chapter 1 Overview N 3 Inspection of the Purchased Product sttctttcttttttt stresses teen eens 1 1 1 1 1 Inspecting the product ss crctcrcr crc t crete tet ete e eee nee e nena nanan enananes 1 1 1 1 2 Instruction manual this manual s 55sssssssssrrrrsrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrererrrnn 1 1 Method of Inquiry and Product Warranty lt 55st ttrt sete te terete eet e teen eee e ence eens 1 2 1 2 1 Method of inquiry ssc tctctc ttt t rete eee eee eee nas 1 2 1 2
278. he jumper from the control circuit terminal block Sink logic YTR48 type output module Inverter YTR48 type output module Inverter Source logic YTS48 type YTS48 type output module Inverter output module Inverter 5 Connecting a programmable controller to intelligent output terminals Sink logic Source logic Inverter XDC24D2H Inverter XDC24D2H 2 2 4 Wiring of the digital operator You can operate the inverter with not only the digital operator mounted in the inverter as standard equipment but also an optional digital operator OPE S OPE SR SRW OJ or SRW OEX When you intend to remove the standard digital operator from the inverter and use it as remote equipment request your local Hitachi Distributor to supply a connection cable ICS 1 1 meter cable or ICS 3 3 meter cable If you prepare the cable by yourself the following product is recommended HUTP5 PC 4P X X Straight cable equipped with connector at both ends made by Hitachi Cable Ltd The length of the connection cable must be 3 m or less If a cable over 3 m is used the inverter may malfunction Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 5 Selection and wiring of regenerative braking resistor on 5 5 kW to 22 kW models The SJ700 2 series inverter models with capacities of 5 5 to 22 kW have an internal regenerative braking circuit Connecting an optiona
279. he motor from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz When this function operates during deceleration the acceleration time is prolonged over the set time When you have selected the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor as the V F characteristic curve selection see Section 4 2 18 and 03 for b021 or b024 the inverter output frequency increases if the current over the overload restriction level flows during the regenerative operation If the value set as the deceleration rate at overload restriction b023 b026 is too small the inverter automatically decelerates the motor even during acceleration because of the overload restriction and may trip because of the overvoltage caused by the energy regenerated by the motor If this function operates during acceleration and the output frequency cannot reach the target frequency try to make the following adjustments Increase the acceleration time See Section 4 2 8 Increase the torque boost setting See Section 4 2 19 Increase the overload restriction setting 6022 b025 Data or range of data 00 Disabling the overload restriction acceleration and constant speed operation Overload Enabling the overload restriction during restriction b021 b024 constant speed operation operation mode Enabling the overload restriction during acceleration and constant speed operation increasing the frequency during regenerative operation
280. hen the FOC terminal is turned on If the FOC terminal is turned off while the inverter is operating the motor the inverter sets the motor into the free running state If the FOC terminal is turned on subsequently the inverter restarts the motor according to the setting of the restart mode after FRS b088 Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions FOC FW RV The inverter does not operate i i i the motor because the FOC i terminal is off Output frequency i Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code A044 A244 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions 4 2 100 Torque limitation function The torque limitation function allows you to limit the motor output torque when 03 sensorless vector control 04 OHz range sensorless vector control or 05 vector control with sensor is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 You can select one of the following four torque limitation modes with the torque limit selection b040 1 Quadrant specific setting mode In this mode individual torque limit values to be applied to four quadrants i e forward powering reverse regeneration reverse powering
281. hen the conditions above are met even if the J51 connector cables have been disconnected from terminals RO and TO and cables are connected from main circuit terminal P to terminal RO and from main circuit terminal N to terminal TO If momentary power failure only lasts a short time the inverter can continue operation without stopping its output Conversely if momentary power failure causes undervoltage the inverter stops its output immediately and ends the operation of this function When power is subsequently restored the inverter operates according to the selection of restart mode b001 When 03 is specified for b050 the inverter can be restored to normal operation if the input power is recovered from momentary power failure before the inverter stops its output The inverter however may decelerate and stop the motor if a specific setting has been made for b051 The table below lists the differences in operation according to the setting of b051 b050 b051 Operation Decelerating and stopping the motor DC voltage constant control Example 1 b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery Decelerating and stopping the motor Example 2 Decelerating and stopping the motor DC voltage constant control Example 1 b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at input power recovery Decelerating and stopping the motor Example 2 When this function operates and the inverter decelerates and stops the motor the motor is forcibly
282. her terminal on the control Intelligent input circuit terminal block 3 common Jumper terminals P24 and PLC for the sink logic jumper terminals CM1 and PLC for the sink logic To use an external power supply to drive the contact inputs remove the jumper and connect the PLC terminal to the external interface circuit Select five of a total 51 functions and assign these five functions to Voltage drop between each terminals 11 to 15 terminal and CM2 when If you have selected an alarm code using the function C062 terminals 11 output signal is on 4 V or to 13 or 11 to 14 are used exclusively for the output of cause code for alarm less e g inverter trip The control logic between each of these terminals and the CM2 terminal always follows the sink or source logic Maximum allowable voltage 27 VDC Intelligent output This terminal serves as the common terminal for intelligent output terminals common 11 to 15 Maximum allowable current 50 mA Maximum contact capacity AL1 ALO 250 VAC 2A Select functions from the 43 available and assign the selected functions to resistance or 0 2A these terminals which serve as C contact output terminals inductive load AL2 AL0 250 VAC 1A In the initial setting these terminals output an alarm indicating that the resistance or 0 2A inverter protection function has operated to stop inverter output inductive load Minimum contact capacity 100 VAC 10 mA 5 VDC 100 mA Allowable
283. hts up while the inverter is operating the motor in forward or reverse direction Display F Forward operation o Motor stopped r Reverse operation 4 1 4 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring When 01 enabling PID operation or 02 enabling inverted data output has been specified for function A071 PID Function Enable and the process variable PV PID feedback monitoring function d004 is selected the inverter displays the PID feedback data You can also convert the PID feedback to gain data by setting a PV scale conversion with function A075 Value displayed by function d004 feedback quantity x PV scale conversion A075 The PV scale conversion can be set by function A075 within the range 0 01 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 Display 0 00 to 99 99 in steps of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 in steps of 0 1 1000 to 9999 in steps of 1 100 to 999 in units of 10 Related code d004 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring A071 PID Function Enable A075 PV scale conversion Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 5 Intelligent input terminal status Relatsdic de When the intelligent input terminal status function d005 is selected the d005 Intelligent input terminal status inverter displays the states of the inputs to the intelligent input terminals The internal CPU of the inverter checks each intelligent input for significance and the inverter displays active inputs as those in
284. ia ge ae Aig A dal 4 74 4 76 display of trip monitoring sscccccssssssee 4 6 5 9 ascii MOdE cee Ate ee ce a ee 4 116 DSE 4 96 Alona tnea Ae eraser ete etre 2 7 4 12 BAN evi tig eee et art 4 56 ATR E E EE A eek atcha ok ol sett AS Te aan AL a Automatic carrier frequency reduction 4 44 automatic energy saving operation 4 33 E EASY SEQUENCE iieii seeded iiaii 4 5 4 92 electronic Gear ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 99 4 100 electronic thermal senenn 4 38 electronic thermal overload monitoring 4 6 B electronic thermal warning level setting 4 39 base irea ene 4 11 EMG aarre on en aaRS safety instructions BER q V a A E N AA 4 81 emergency Stop sssssesssrnrerreessrrrrereerr ee 2 7 2 8 binary operation cccccccccceseseseeeeeees 4 46 4 47 ae SPO eect ies a eiieeii at F bit operation 4 46 4 47 encoder pulse ARREO y E A A RS 4 93 a I E it E T eH end FrEQUENCY cceccecesecesceseeseesesteesesenseaes 4 15 BRD ee eee eee 9 7 4 45 end frequency rate rennene 4 16 BRD i OT EE E m ETE A i EXCESSIVE speed ececceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 5 5 oad factor Monitoring cceeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 extended funclion mode 3 8 BRK attire Ca te ha 4 81 external analog input ena se 4 13 external DC braking ccccceeeeeeeees 4 21 4 22 C external thermistor eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 70 Capacitor life WAITING ssss
285. ication Multistage position setting 0 P067 reverse to position range specification forward Zero return mode selection P068 01 02 Zero return direction selection P069 os For forward rotation For reverse rotation Low speed zero return frequency P070 0 00 to 10 00 Hz High speed zero return P071 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 frequency Hz Position range specification P072 0 to 268435456 When APR2 is selected forward 0 to 1073741823 When HAPR is selected Position range specification P073 0 to 268435456 reverse 0 to 1073741823 00 Multistage position setting 0 P060 01 Multistage position setting 0 P060 02 Multistage position setting 0 P060 03 Multistage position setting 0 P060 Teaching selection R074 04 Multistage position setting 0 BOG 05 Multistage position setting 0 P060 06 Multistage position setting 0 P060 07 Multistage position setting 0 P060 4 106 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Multistage speed position C169 0 to 200 X10ms determination time Position setting monitor d029 1073741823 to 1073741823 Position feedback monitor d030 1073741823 to 1073741823 54 SON Servo on 66 CP1 Position setting selection 1 67 CP2 Position setting selection 1 68 CP3 Position setting selection 1 69 ORL Zero return limit signal C001 C008 70 ORG Zero return start signal 71 FO
286. ication or main circuit error 1 001 E10 CTeror External trip USP error error 1 0 1 1 E14 Ground fault protection Invalid instruction in easy sequence Nesting error in easy a 1 1 E43 E44 E45 sequence Easy sequence execution command error Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Intelligent output terminals When 4 bits is selected When 3 bits is selected 14 13 12 11 AC3 AC2 AC1 ACO Factor code Cause of tripping Factor code Cause of tripping Temperature error due to 1 1 0 1 E20 E21 low cooling fan speed _ Temperature error 1 1 1 0 E24 Phase loss input protection Easy sequence user trip 0 9 1 1 1 1 E50 to E79 option 1 2 error 0 9 00 No output of alarm code Alarm code output Output of 3 bit code Output of 4 bit code 4 2 66 Logical output signal operation function LOG1 to LOG6 Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C142 Logical output signal 1 selection 1 C143 Logical output signal 1 selection 2 C144 Logical output signal 1 operator selection C145 Logical output signal 2 selection 1 C146 Logical output signal 2 selection 2 C147 Logical output signal 2 operator selection C148 Logical output signal 3 selection 1 C149 Logical output signal 3 selection 2 C150 Logical output signal 3 operator selection C151 Logical output signal 4 selection 1 C
287. ides Using the inverter to drive a general purpose motor may cause larger vibrations of the motor when compared with driving it directly with the commercial power supply Connect this AC reactor between the inverter and motor to lessen the pulsation of motor Also connect this AC reactor between the inverter and motor when the cable length between them is long 10 m or more to prevent thermal relay malfunction due to the harmonic waves that are generated by the switching operation on the inverter Note that the thermal relay can be replaced with a current sensor to avoid the malfunction Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 4 Recommended cable gauges wiring accessories and crimp terminals Note For compliance with CE and UL standards see the safety precautions concerning EMC and the compliance with UL and CUL standards under Safety Instructions The table below lists the specifications of cables crimp terminals and terminal screw tightening torques for reference Motor eae fae External braking Size of i Tightening Applicabi dovice output Applicable inverter Terminals R S Grounding resistor across terminal Crimp torque Magnetic kW model T U V W P PD cable mm termal P and Stew terminal N m Earth leakage contactor and N mm breaker ELB MC 5 5 SJ700 055LFF2 5 5 5 5 5 5 M5 R5 5 5 2 4 EX50B 50A
288. igher than the start frequency b082 2 Note that setting a low current may not ensure sufficient torque at brake releasing The inverter will trip with the braking error signal BER E36 brake error output in one of the following cases 1 The inverter output current brake remains below the brake release current even after the release wait time b121 2 During acceleration the braking confirmation signal BOK is not turned on within the braking wait time b124 During deceleration the braking confirmation signal BOK is not turned off within the braking wait time 6124 Otherwise the braking confirmation signal is turned off although the brake release signal is output Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 91 Deceleration and stopping at power failure nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure The nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure is the function making the inverter decelerate and stop the motor while maintaining the voltage below the overvoltage level when an instantaneous power failure occurs during the inverter operation You can select three modes with controller deceleration and stop on power loss b050 Related code b050 Controller deceleration and stop on power loss b051 DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b052 Over voltage threshold during power loss b053 Deceleration time setting during power loss b054 Initial output frequency decrease during power loss I
289. il e Use the TA operator function F001 or remote operator to set the frequency 03 Input the frequency setting command via an RS485 communication terminal ee Input the frequency setting command from the board connected to optional port 1 setting Input the frequency setting command from the board connected to optional port 2 Use the SJ FB to input the frequency setting command as a pulse train see 4 2 21 07 Use the SET Freq command of the easy sequence function as the frequency setting command Use the operation result of the set frequency operation function as the 10 frequency setting command see 4 2 12 4 2 5 Run command source settin Related code A002 Run command source setting C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C019 Terminal FW active state F004 Keypad Run key routing The run command source setting function allows you to select the method to input operation commands to start and stop the motor As the operation commands via control circuit terminals turn the FW signal for forward operation or RV signal for reverse operation on and off to start and stop the motor respectively Note that the factory setting assigns the FW signal to intelligent input terminal 8 To switch each intelligent input terminal between a and b contacts specify each terminal with function C011 to C019 and then perform input a b NO NC selection for each terminal When using the digital op
290. imum frequency Hz 3 Output current 0 to 200 Output torque 1 0 to 200 0 to 133 75 of full scale is CHL voled equivalent to 100 Input power 0 to 200 Electronic thermal 0 to 100 AM siginal overload o selection LAD frequency 0 to maximum frequency Hz AMI siainal C028 C029 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the AMI sigina Motor temperature ic 00 selection motor temperature is 0 C or less o Le te i Heat sink temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C is output when the motor temperature is 0 C or less Output T from the AM terminal 0 EE Output torque signed to 200 1 2 A Output only from the AM terminal 0 Ee General analog YA 1 4 to 100 A Output only from the AMI terminal 0 Oon General analog YA 2 4 to 100 4 This signal is output only when the V F characteristic curve selection see Section 4 2 18 is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or eine control with sensor 2 The specifications of the output torque signed are as follows AM output V When the AM gain C106 is 100 ee TA When the AM gain C106 is 200 When the AM offset C109 is 50 i Torque 0 100 200 3 The actually detected output frequency is output when the V F characteristic curve selection is the vector control with sensor A044 05 4 For detail of the function refer Programing software EZ SQ user manuaru 2 AM AMI adjustment Adjust the inve
291. in extended function mode U see the next page Chapter 3 Operation 3 Code data display and key operation in extended function mode U The extended function mode U differs in operation from other extended function modes because the extended function mode U is used to register or automatically record other extended function codes as user specified U parameters Key operation and Key operation and Key operation and transition Key operation and Di Pe of codes on display when iti transition of codes on transition of codes on displaying extended function transition of codes on display in monitor or display in extended mode parameters from the display in monitor function mode function mode U extended function mode U function or extended 1 2 The content of the display varies depending on the parameter type i y 1 2 Data display To update numerical data be sure to press the ACOH l key after changing the data DLF Fanion q mode A Lt Extended function mode B Pressing the key reflects the valu set herein AFO the corresponding parameter C T 0 Note that the value is not reflected in the corresponding AGT U parameter LEOD Extended function E 6 o mode C Extended function out ETD mode H i HON recone function de U moce OLF Extended pac ont Sir e function Display with the factory setting ASTO
292. in setting P023 to 10000 0 01 1618h _ Position bias setting P024 2048 to 2048 1 1619h Temperature compensation P025 R W 00 no compensation 01 compensation thermistor enable 161Ah Ta error detection level P026 Rw o to 1500 0 1 161Bh SPeed deviation error detection Po27 R w l0 to 12000 0 01 Hz level setting 161Ch Numerator of the motor gear ratio P028 RW 1 to 9999 1 161Dh Denominator of the motor gear ratio P029 R W 1 to 9999 161Eh_ Reserved inaccessible 161Fh Accel decel time input selection po31 rw 0 digital operator 1 option 1 2 option 2 3 easy sequence 1620h ae command input P032 Rw fo digital operator 1 option 1 2 option 2 1621h Torque command input selection P033 R W 0 O terminal 1 OI terminal 2 02 terminal 3 digital operator 1622h Torque command setting P034 R W 0 to 200 1 1623h Polarity selection at the torque P035 R W 0 as indicated by the sign 1 depending on the command input via O2 terminal operation direction 1624h Torque bias mode po36 rw 0 disabling the mode 1 digital operator 2 input via O2 terminal 7625h Torque bias value P037 R W 200 to 200 TTI 1626h Torque bias polarity selection Po38 rw s indicated by the sign 1 depending on the operation direction 1627h _ Speed limit for torque controlled P039 high RW wn F reraton dotuard TOs ion r P39 low Rw to maximum frequency 1629h S
293. in the V2 control mode You can use the inverter not only under the speed control or pulse train position control but also with this torque control function You can use this function effectively for inverter applications to for example a winding machine To operate the inverter to drive the motor under torque control assign function 52 ATR to an intelligent input terminal The torque command input is enabled when the ATR terminal is on You can select one of four torque command input methods digital operator and three analog input terminals by the torque command input selection P034 Related code P033 Torque command input selection P034 Torque command setting P035 Polarity selection at the torque command input via the O2 terminal P039 Speed limit for torque controlled operation forward rotation P040 Speed limit for torque controlled operation reverse rotation d009 d010 d012 Torque command monitoring P036 Torque biasing mode selection P037 Torque bias setting P038 Torque biasing polarity selection d010 Torque bias monitoring C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions _ eS ae Input from the O terminal Torque command input selection Torque command setting P034 0 to 200 doa eesti rat 3 input fromthe digital terminal Speed limit for X l 0 00 to 99 99 or 100 0 to torque controlled operation P039 400 0 Hz forward rotation Speed limit for X l 0 00 to 99 99 or 100 0 to torque
294. inal function C064 Heat sink overheat warning level Setting of the threshold Heat sink overheat warning level C064 0 to 200 C temperature at which to output the heat sink overheat warning signal Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 72 Low current indication LOC signal Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C038 Low current indication signal output mode selection C039 Low current indication signal detection level The inverter outputs the low current indication LOC signal when the inverter output current falls to the low current indication signal detection level C039 or less You can select one of the two signal output modes with the low current indication signal output mode selection C038 In one mode the LOC signal output is always enabled during the inverter operation In the other mode the LOC signal output is enabled only while the inverter is driving the motor for constant speed operation Data or range of data Description Terminal function C021 to C025 E AADA Alarm relay terminal function C026 43 LOC Low current indication signal 00 Enabling the signal output during Low current indication signal operation C038 output mode selection 01 Enabling the signal output only during constant speed operation 1 Low current indication signal C039 0 0 to 2 0 x rated e P er ee detection level current A rage aoa one indicatio
295. inertia J into the motor shaft data When the value of J is large the motor response is fast and the motor torque increases quickly When the value of J is small the motor response is slow and the motor torque increases slowly To control the response set the value of J and then adjust the speed response H005 H205 4 In the modes of sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control and vector control with sensor inverter may output reverse to given operation command in the low speed range as a nature of those control In case there is a specific inconvenience for example reverse rotation damage the machine enable the reverse run protection b046 see 4 2 101 Reverse run protection function Arbitrary setting of motor constants For the arbitrary setting of the motor constants the function codes requiring settings vary depending on the settings of the 1st 2nd control function and the motor constant selection When the 1st 2nd control function is enabled and 00 is specified for the motor constant selection gt Directly input the desired values for H020 to H024 When the 1st 2nd control function is enabled and 01 or 02 is specified for the motor constant selection Directly input the desired values for H030 to H034 When the offline auto tuning has not been performed the constants Hitachi general purpose motor constants of the motors in the same capacity class as the inverter have been set for H03
296. ing A001 If the setting of function A001 is other than 02 function F001 operates as the frequency command monitoring function The frequency set with function F001 is automatically set as the Multispeed frequency setting A020 To set the second and third multispeed s use the multispeed frequency setting 2nd motor function A220 and multispeed frequency setting 3rd motor function A320 or use function F001 for the setting after turning on the SET and SET3 signals For the setting using the SET and SET3 signals assign the SET function 08 and SET3 function 17 to intelligent input terminals If the set output frequency is used as the target data for the PID function PID feedback data will be displayed in percent 100 indicates the maximum frequency Range of data Description Output frequency setting F001 The frequency set with F001 is equal to the 0 0 start frequency to setting of A020 maximum frequency The second control frequency set with F001 1st 2nd 3rd motors is equal to the setting of A220 Hz The third control frequency set with F001 is equal to the setting of A320 Related code F001 Output frequency setting A001 Frequency source setting A020 A220 A320 Multispeed frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions A020 A220 Multispeed 0 A320 4 2 2 Keypad Run key routing Related code When you enter operation commands via the dig
297. ing errors 03 stopping the motor after free running 04 01 x x error 5 3 decelerating and stopping the motor P046 DeviceNet polled I O Output 20 21 100 21 x x instance number P047 DeviceNet polled 1 0 Input 70 71 101 1 x x i instance number A n 00 tripping 01 tripping after decelerating and stopping the motor 02 P048 Inverter action on DeviceNet idle ignoring errors 03 stopping the motor after free running 04 01 x x mode 4 f decelerating and stopping the motor DeviceNet motor poles setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 P049 0 x x RPM poles P055 Pulse string frequency scale 1 0 to 50 0 kHz 25 0 x O Time constant of pulse string P056 frequency filter 0 01 to 2 00 s 0 10 x O 4 112 P057 Pulse string frequency bias 100 to 100 0 O P058 Pulse string frequency limit 0 to 100 100 O 8 15 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Code Function name Monitored data or setting Position setting range reverse side to forward side Default Setting during operation Change during operation Page allowed or allowed or _FF _FEF _FUF not not 15 P060 Multistage position setting 0 upper 4 digits including 0 O P061 Multistage position setting 1 R eae side to forward side 0 O O P062 Multistage po
298. ing the storage of frequency settings selection 1 Do not operate the UP or DWN terminal after the inverter power is shut off Otherwise the frequency settings may not be stored correctly Operation command o He FW or RV DWN l Turning on the UP and DWN terminals at the same time disables acceleration and deceleration Output frequency Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 52 External trip EXT function Related code The external trip function allows you to make the inverter trip C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions according to the error trip signal generated by an external system To use this function assign function 12 EXT to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the EXT terminal is turned on the inverter trips with error code E12 displayed and stops the output After the inverter trips with error code E12 displayed it will not be recovered from tripping even when the error signal from the external system is reset i e the EXT terminal is turned off To recover the inverter from tripping reset the inverter or turn the inverter power off and on Terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 EXT External trip Note Do not turn on the EXT terminal after the inverter power is shut off Otherwise the error history may not be stored correctly e oo pS E ns Motor speed Free running 4 2 53 3 wire interface operation function STA STP and
299. ion 26 CAS control gain setting to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the CAS terminal is turned off the gain settings H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 and H252 are selected When the CAS terminal is turned on the gain settings H070 H071 and H072 are selected If function 26 CAS control gain setting is not assigned to any intelligent input terminal the same gain settings as those selected when the CAS terminal is off are selected Data or range of data Sensorless vector control V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 OS sensorless vector V2 not available for A244 Terminal function C001 to C008 CAS Control gain setting Motor speed constant 1st 2nd 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 PI proportional gain H050 H250 0 0 to 999 9 1000 eee PI integral gain H051 H251 0 0 to 999 9 1000 W o lt oO C oOo O O i e E II Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors H070 Terminal selection PI proportional gain setting H071 Terminal selection PI integral gain setting H072 Terminal selection P proportional gain setting P proportional gain H052 H252 0 01 to 10 00 Terminal selection PI prop
300. ion assign function 50 ADD to an intelligent input terminal When the ADD terminal is turned on the inverter performs the addition or subtraction of the value specified as A145 Related code A145 Frequency to be added A146 Sign of the frequency to be added C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions Description Setting of the frequency to be added Frequency command A145 Frequency command A145 ADD selection of the trigger for adding TUER the frequency A145 Note 1 If the sign of the frequency value in the frequency command changes from minus to plus or vice versa as the result of frequency addition the motor operation direction will be inverted Note 2 When the PID function is used the frequency addition function can apply to PID target data In such cases the data display by function A145 is in percentage in steps of 0 01 Item Data or range of data Frequency to be added A145 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Selection of the sign of the A146 00 ef frequency to be added 0 Terminal function 4 2 14 Start end frequency setting for external analog input The start end frequency setting function allows you to set the inverter output frequency in relation to the external analog inputs frequency commands via the following terminals O L terminal 0 to 10 V Ol L terminal 4 to 20 mA O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V A011 O L input active range start frequency A012 O L input ac
301. ion curve selection A097 A098 A131 A132 55555555 gt 4 31 4 2 26 Energy saver operation A085 A086 i eS ah Js ie Nm Sin wl ry ym aa i Rms E ROETE a EO 4 32 4 2 27 Retry or trip after instantaneous power failure b001 to b005 b007 b008 C021 to C026 ee 4 33 4 2 28 Phase loss power input protection D006 s7s sss ttt t ttre ttre tener ees 4 36 4 2 29 Electronic thermal protection b012 b013 b015 b016 C021 to C026 C061 4 37 4 2 30 Overload restriction overload notice b021 to b026 C001 to C008 C021 to C026 C040 C041 C111 AR A AR a Me A ee a T 4 39 4 2 31 Overcurrent restraint b027 a aa aie cing a Se ry wv Se sera pris cal Sa a perce et era a eri gee la 4 40 4 2 32 Overvoltage supression during deceleration b130 to b132 sss crtrtts teres 4 41 4 2 33 Start frequency setting b082 ah ER pa Sats dah garam ca ot pm ein es ny ae da Rn ee tne wa ea a oa 4 42 4 2 34 Reduced voltage start function 6036 b082 sss scr ttt t ste s settee eee ees 4 42 4 2 35 Carrier frequency setting ee 4 43 4 2 36 Automatic carrier frequency reducation ss cscs crtt sss s sss sees sees eens 4 44 4 2 37 Dynamic braking BRD function b090 b095 b096 sss str ttt ttre es 4 45 4 2 38 Cooling fan operation setting b092 ee ee ee 4 45 4 2 39 Intelligent input terminal setting SET SET3 C001 to C008 ss sssssttr stress 4 46 4 2 40 Input terminal a b NO NC selection C011 to C018 C019 sssssct ss st trees 4 47 4 2 4
302. ion frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No a OER of coniroltarget 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 02 Data Data to be transmitted 16 bytes See Note 5 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BOG Ripe CHec cogs Z pytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 5 The table below lists the functions of the intelligent input terminals and corresponding hexadecimal data For details see the explanation of the intelligent input terminal functions pata Description Data Description hexadecimal hexadecimal 0000000000000001 FW Forward rotation 0000000100000000 SF1 Multispeed bit 1 0000000000000002 RV Reverse rotation 0000000200000000 SF2 Multispeed bit 2 0000000000000004 CF1 Multispeed 1 setting 0000000400000000 SF3 Multispeed bit 3 0000000000000008 CF2 Multispeed 2 setting 0000000800000000 SF4 Multispeed bit 4 0000000000000010 CF3 Multispeed 3 setting 0000001000000000 SF5 Multispeed bit 5 0000000000000020 CF4 Multispeed 4 setting 0000002000000000 SF6 Multispeed bit 6 0000000000000040 JG Jogging 0000004000000000 SF7 Multispeed bit 7 0000000000000080 DB External DC braking 0000008000000000 OLR Overload restriction selection 000000000000
303. ion operation Over torque reverse driving level C057 0 to 200 Threshold level to output the OTQ signal setting during reverse powering operation Over torque forward Threshold level to output the OTQ signal regenerating level setting C058 0 to 200 during forward regeneration operation 4 2 65 Alarm code output function ACO to AC3 Related code The alarm code output function allows you to make the inverter C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions output a 3 or 4 bit code signal as the trip factor when it has C062 Alarm code output tripped Specifying 01 3 bits or 02 4 bits for the alarm code output C062 forcibly assigns the alarm code output function to intelligent output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 respectively The following table lists the alarm codes that can be output Intelligent output terminals When 4 bits is selected When 3 bits is selected Cause of tripping Normal operation Normal S i E01 to E03 E04 Overcurrent protection Overcurrent protection cungur Overload protection Overload protection E05 E38 Low speed overload Low speed overload protection protection A protection overvoltage protection Eanaeoee Eos Undarvoltage protection Undervoltage protection po To 1 ee eaeuare mere musa protection failure protection Oo 7 7 O E30 IGBTeror _ _ IGBT error Braking resistor overload ee Ee ro Other error EEPROM CPU GA E08 ane E23 commun
304. is function is effective when the V F characteristic curve selection is the sensorless vector control or OHz range sensorless control To use the function adjust the inverter settings required for the sensorless vector control see Section 4 2 92 or OHz range sensorless control see Section 4 2 93 except for the motor constant settings Adjust the motor constants as follows 1 For constants R1 R2 and L specify a value half as large as that normally specified for one motor 2 For constant lo specify a value twice as large as that normally specified for one motor 3 For constant J specify a value half as large as the total moment of inertia of the two motors and the load connected to them Select the motor capacity that is closest to the collective capacity of both motors If different loads are driven by the two motors operated by the inverter the load fluctuations on one motor may change the other motor s operation status and the inverter may be unable to normally control the motors Be sure to configure your system so that the motors drive only a single load or multiple loads that can at least be recognized as a single load Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 b045 Torque limit LADSTOP enable Torque limit selection Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors F001 Outp
305. is Instruction Manual may be reproduced in any form without the publisher s permission If you find any incorrect description missing description or have a question concerning the contents of this Instruction Manual please contact the publisher Revision History First edition Sep 2007 NT204AX The current edition of this Instruction Manual also includes some corrections of simple misprints missing letters misdescriptions and certain added explanations other than those listed in the above Revision History table Safety Instructions Safety Instructions Be sure to read this Instruction Manual and appended documents thoroughly before installing operating maintaining or inspecting the inverter In this Instruction Manual safety instructions are classified into two levels namely WARNING and CAUTION lt gt WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations which may result in serious personal injury or death N CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations which may result in moderate or slight personal injury or physical damage alone Note that even a N CAUTION level situation may lead to a serious consequence according to circumstances Be sure to follow every safety instruction which contains important safety information Also focus on and observe the items and instructions described under Notes in the text Many of the drawings in this Instruction Manual sh
306. isplay sequence of parameters matches their sequence shown in Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Key operation and Key operation and Key operation and Key operation and transition of codes on transition of monitored transition of codes on transition of monitored display in monitor or data on display in monitor display in extended data on display in function mode or function mode function mode extended function mode Pressing the Q or D key respectively scrolls up or down the code displayed in code display mode or increases or decreases the numerical data displayed in data display mode Press the AN or key until the desired code or numerical data is shown To scroll codes or increase decrease numerical data fast press and hold the key Monitor y The content of the display varies depending on the parameter type Monitor 2 To update numerical data be sure to press the display key after changing the data 4104 Funston ORL ae F 0 0 OLY Data display T 30 08 110 MoM OtLO FOGY 29 99 OHO ONO se Si a ED 2 Data display Extended function ALD 3 mode A BHO Extended function Extended function mode C Extended function mode H Extended function cam seas ems wes operation
307. it 00 4 Diagnosis subcode lower digit 00 4 Diagnosis subcode lower digit 00 5 Data upper digit Arbitrary 5 Data upper digit Arbitrary 6 Data lower digit Arbitrary 6 Data lower digit Arbitrary 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit CRC 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit CRC 8 CRC 16 code lower digit CRC 8 _CRC 16 code lower digit CRC 1 This query cannot be broadcasted The diagnosis subcode only conforms to the echoing of query data 00h 00h It cannot be used for other commands vi Writing data to multiple coils OFh This function rewrites data in sequential coils Example When updating the status of the intelligent input terminals 1 to 6 of the inverter at slave address 5 The status of the intelligent input terminals is updated to the status shown in the following table Intelligent input termina 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coilnumber_ 7 8 9 10 1 12 Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample hexadecimal setting 1 Slave address 1 05 hexadecimal 2 Function code OF 1 Slave address 05 3 Starting coil number 00 2 Function code OF upper digit 2 3 Starting coil number upper digit 00 4 Starting coil number 06 4 Starting coil number lower digit 06 lower digit 2 5 Number of coils upper digit 00 5 Number of coils upper digit 00 6 Number of coils lower digit 06 6 Number of coils lower digit 06 7 _CRC 16 code upper digit 34 7 __ Number of data bytes
308. it power is lost and the alarm signal cannot be retained To retain the alarm signal connect control circuit terminals RO and TO to a power supply In details connect the control circuit power supply terminals RO and TO to the primary side of the magnetic contactor as shown below Connection method Power receiving specifications 200 V class model 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 282 to 339 VDC 400 V class model 380 to 480 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 537 to 678 VDC Note the following when connecting separate power supplies to control circuit power supply terminals RO and TO and main circuit power supply terminals R S and T Use a cable thicker than 1 25 mm to connect the terminals RO and TO terminal screw size M4 Connect a 3A fuse in the control circuit power supply line If the control circuit power supply connected to RO and TO is turned on earlier than the main circuit power supply connected to R S and T ground fault is not checked at power on When supplying DC power to the control circuit power supply terminals RO and TO specify 00 as the a b NO NC selection function code C031 to C036 for intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 and intelligent relay terminals ALO AL1 and AL2 If 01 is specified as the a b NO NC selection output signals may chatter when the DC power supply is shut off 2 17 Remove the connected cables Remove the J51 connector
309. ital operator the Keypad F004 Keypad Run key routing Run key routing function allows you to select the direction of motor operation This function is ineffective when you use the control terminal block or remote operator to input operation commands Description Forward operation Keypad Run key routing F004 Reveiseoperation 4 2 3 Rotational direction restriction Related code The rotational direction restriction function allows you to restrict the b035 Rotational direction restriction direction of motor operation This function is effective regardless of the specification of operation command input device e g control circuit block or digital operator If an operation command to drive the motor in a restricted direction is input the inverter digital operator will display Description Rotational direction Both forward and reverse operations are enabled b035 Only forward operation is enabled restriction Only reverse operation is enabled Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 4 Frequency source setting Related code The frequency source setting function allows you to select the method to A001 Frequency source setting input the frequency setting command Motor rotation direction is inverted when 10 to OV is given as frequency command to 02 L terminals Use the control provided on the digital operator to set the frequency Input the E setting command via a control circuit terminal 0 L B
310. ization mode parameters or trip history Overvoltage suppression enable Overvoltage suppression level Terminal 11 function Terminal 12 function 29 4 2 85 Initial screen selection selection of the initial screen to be displayed after power on Related code The initial screen selection function allows you to specify the screen that Pose siniiahegieersciection is displayed on the digital operator immediately after the inverter power is turned on The table below lists the screens items selectable The factory setting is 01 d001 To adjust the screen selection setting of your SJ700 series inverter to an SJ300 series inverter select 00 the screen displayed when the STOP RESET key was last pressed Screen displayed when the STR key was pressed etter the stig on SRON Initial screen selection Note When 00 the screen displayed when the STR key was last pressed has been selected the monitor displays code entry to a group of functions if the functional item displayed last is not bo wiii or H e Example Ifthe inverter power is turned off immediately after the setting of A020 has been changed the monitor will display A as the initial screen after the next power on NININININININININ gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 4 78 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 86 Automatic user parameter setting The automatic user parameter setting function allows you to make the
311. k for abnormal vibrations Check vibrations and noise visually x and noise O by listening and with physical ppoe must be no abnormality eck for unusual smells o eck for any unusual smells caused by overheating or damage Insulation Check the ground resistance Remove the cables from the 500 VDC class resistance between all motor terminals and the inverter s main circuit terminals U V megger ground terminal with a megger and W connect the motor wires for F O three phases with one another and The measured ground resistance measure the ground resistance between the motor wires and the ground terminal The operating life of the smoothing capacitor is under the influence of the ambient temperature Refer to Section 6 6 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve as a standard for the operating life until replacement 2 The operating life of the cooling fan varies depending on environmen during daily inspections al conditions including the ambient temperature and dust Check the status of the cooling fan operation 3 The standard operating life number of years or operation cycles and the data described in Section 6 6 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve are based on the expected design life but they do not indicate the guaranteed life of any parts 6 2 Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 3 Ground Resistance Test with a Megger When testing an external circuit with a megger disconnect all the external circuit cables from
312. ke release signal If the EMR signal on three terminals is turned on when the slide switch SW1 on the logic board is set to ON the inverter hardware will shut off the inverter output and display the error code shown on the right If overload occurs during the motor operation at a very low speed at 0 2 Hz or less the electronic thermal protection circuit in the inverter will detect the overload and shut off the inverter output 2nd electronic thermal control Note that a high frequency may be recorded as the error history data If timeout occurs because of line disconnection during the communication in Modbus RTU mode the inverter will display the error code shown on the right The inverter will trip according to the setting of CO76 The inverter detects errors in the option board mounted in the optional slot 1 For details refer to the instruction manual for the mounted option board Check for the noise sources located near the inverter Remove noise sources GA COM Check whether the communication cable has been disconnected Check the connectors Check for the phase loss power input Check the power supply input wiring 3 Check the MCB and magnetic contactors for PH fail poor contacts Replace the MCB and magnetic contactors Check for the noise sources located near the inverter Remove nois
313. l testers may be inapplicable for the measurement because of the adverse effect of noise Output power Across U V and V W E Electrodynamometer type Effective value of 2 wattmeter method Wout Wo1 Woz wattmeter full waves or 3 wattmeter method Output power Calculated from the measured input Wout factor Pfour voltage Eour input current lout Pfour x 100 and input power Wour J 3 Eour lout Method to measure the output voltage Diode 600 V 0 1 Aor more 200 V class model 1 000 V 0 1 Aor more 400 V class model Effective value of fundamental wave Vac Vac 1 1 X Voc Moving coil voltmeter 300 V 200 V class model 600 V 400 V class model Chapter 7 Specifications are es This chapter describes the specifications and external dimensions of the inverter 7 1 Specifications cccecccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 7 1 7 2 External dimensions eeeereereenn 7 4 Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Specifications 1 Specifications of the 200 V class model Model name type name J700 XXXLFF LFU 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 Max applicable motor capacity 4 pole kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 Rated capacity 200V 8 3 11 0 15 9 22 1 26 3 32 9 41 9 50 2 63 0 76 2
314. l indicating 1 440 Hz Range of data Digital current monitor reference value Ore X rated current t9 2 0 x rated current A 1 440 Hz output 3 The actually detected output frequency is output when the V F characteristic curve selection is the vector control with sensor A044 05 4 For detail of the function refer Programming software EZ SQ user manual 5 When b086 frequency scaling conversion facto is set the value converted by gain is diplayed refer 4 1 7 Scaled output frequency monitoring 2 FM terminal analog meter adjustment Adjust the inverter output gain for the external meter connected to the FM terminal Range of data FM terminal analog meter C105 50 to 200 Setting of the gain for adjustment FM monitoring Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 82 AM and AMI terminals You can monitor the inverter output frequency and output current via the AM and AMI terminals on the control circuit block The AM terminal outputs an analog voltage signal 0 to 10 V The AMI terminal outputs an analog current signal 4 to 20 mA Related code C028 AM siginal selection C029 AMI siginal selection C106 AM gain adjustment C109 AM offset adjustment C108 AMI gain adjustment C110 AMI offset adjustment 1 AM siginal selection AMI signal selection Select the signals to be output from the AM and AMI terminals among those shown below Full scale value 00 Output frequency 0 to max
315. l regenerative braking resistor to RB and P terminals increases the regenerative torque Without a resistor With a resistor Minimum connectable connected connected resistor Minimum Resistanc Regenera BRD resistance during e of Resistanc continuous Motor capacity Regenerative tive usage a Model connecte e operation kW torque resistor torque Q rate Q 2 SJ700 055LFF2 5 5 20 16 100 16 10 50 SJ700 075LFF2 7 5 20 10 80 10 10 50 SJ700 110LFF2 11 10 10 70 10 10 50 SJ700 150LFF2 15 10 7 5 80 7 5 10 35 SJ700 185LFF2 18 5 10 7 5 60 7 5 10 35 SJ700 220LFF2 22 10 5 50 5 10 35 SJ700 055HFF2 5 5 20 70 100 70 10 200 SJ700 075HFF2 7 5 20 70 80 35 10 150 SJ700 110HFF2 11 10 50 80 35 10 150 SJ700 150HFF2 15 10 35 80 24 10 100 SJ700 185HFF2 18 5 10 35 70 24 10 100 SJ700 220HFF2 22 10 35 50 20 10 100 Chapter 3 Operation err aay This chapter describes typical methods of operating the inverter how to operate the digital operator and how to make a test run of the inverter 3 1 Operating Methods cata sat EIAN AERAR ANENA NRA 3 1 3 2 How To Operate the Digital Operator 3 3 3 3 How To Make a Test Run PORE RRER RON OR RI RT 3 10 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 Operating Methods While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch any terminal or internal part of the inverter check signals or connect or disconnect any wire or connector Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock
316. lay terminal C026 Specify the run power on warning time b034 2 Plug in time over ONT signal To use this signal function assign function 12 ONT to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 Specify the run power on warning time b034 4 2 63 0 Hz speed detection signal ZS The inverter outputs the 0 Hz speed detection signal when the inverter output frequency falls below the threshold frequency specified as the zero speed detection level C063 To use this signal function assign function 21 ZS to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 This signal function applies to the inverter output frequency when the V F characteristic curve selection is based on the constant torque characteristic VC reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power of VP free V f characteristic sensorless vector control or OHz range sensorless vector control It applies to the motor speed when the V F characteristic curve selection is based on the vector control with sensor Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 Related code A044 A244 A344 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C063 Zero speed detection level ZS 0H d detecti Zero speed detection level C063 0 00 to 100 0 Hz Setting of the frequency to be determine
317. lay terminal function C026 current monitoring 9 motor temperature 10 heat sink g a LOG2 logical operation result 2 35 LOG3 logical operation result 3 36 LOG4 logical operation result 4 37 LOGS logical operation result 5 38 LOG6 logical operation result 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning 40 WAF cooling fan speed drop 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF heat sink overheat warning 43 LOC low current indication signal 44 M01 general purpose output 1 45 M02 general purpose output 2 46 M03 general purpose output 3 47 M04 general purpose output 4 48 M05 general purpose output 5 49 M06 general purpose output 6 50 IRDY inverter ready 51 FWR forward rotation 52 RVR reverse rotation 53 MJA major failur 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCO window comparator Ol 56 WCO window comparator O2 When alarm code output is selected by C062 functions ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 ACn alarm code output are forcibly assigned to intelligent output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 respectively 0 output frequency 1 output current 2 output torque 3 digital output frequency 4 output voltage 5 input power 6 electronic thermal overload 7 LAD frequency 8 digital a g EIRA TE DEEA e time over 12 ONT plug in time over 13 THM thermal alarm signal 19 BRK brake release 20 BER braking error 21
318. lift disable the overcurrent restraint function If the overcurrent restraint functions during the lift operation the lift may slide down because of insufficient torque Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 32 Over voltage supression during deceleration The over voltage supression function allows you to prevent the inverter from tripping because of the overvoltage that can be caused by the energy regenerated by the motor during deceleration You can enable or disable the function by setting the overvoltage suppression enable b130 When 01 enabling the over voltage supression with deceleration stop is specified for the overvoltage suppression enable b130 the inverter will decelerate by keeping the voltage of the main circuit DC section at over voltage suppression level b131 When 02 enabling the overvoltage suppression with acceleration is specified for the overvoltage suppression enable b130 the inverter will start acceleration according to the acceleration and deceleration rate at overvoltage suppression b132 if the voltage of the main circuit DC section exceeds the overvoltage suppression level 6131 Subsequently the inverter will restart deceleration when the voltage falls below the level b131 Related code b130 Overvoitage suppression enable b131 Overvoltage suppression level b132 Acceleration and deceleration rate at overvoltage suppression Data or range of data p00 Disables o MoM
319. lly closed NC contact that operates as described below L Ke Inside the sad 2a inverter Example of operation as an alarm output terminal Setting Power Inverter Output terminal state Resistance load Inductive load of C036 supply status AL1 ALO AL2 ALO Maximum contact 250 VAC 2A 250 VAC 2A ON Error Closed Open AL1 ALO l capacity 30 VDC 3A 30 VDC 8A 00 Normal Open Closed Minimum contact 100 V AC 10 mA OFF Open Closed capacity 5 VDC 100 mA Error Open Closed Maximum contact 250 VAC 1A 250 VAC 0 2A 01 ON Normal Closed Open AL2 ALO capacity 30 VDC 1A 30 VDC 0 2A default Minimum contact 100 VAC 10 mA OFF Open Closed capacity 5 VDC 100 mA 4 61 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 60 Running signal RUN Related code While the inverter is operating it outputs the running RUN C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions signal via an intelligent output terminal 11 to 15 or the alarm relay terminal To use this signal function assign function 00 RUN to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 The inverter outputs the RUN signal even while operating the DC brake The following figure shows a timing chart for the signal output Output frequency 4 2 61 Frequency arrival signals FA1 FA2 FA3 FA4 and FA5 The inverter outputs a frequency arrival signal when the inv
320. log input Ol 15 functions disconnection C02 1 0025 O2Dc Detection of analog input O2 C026 29 s disconnection Alamrelay terminal 54 WCO Window comparator O function y 55 WCOI Window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 Window comparator O2 Maximum limit level of b060 O Minimum limit level hysteresis width 2 ARIN b063 Ol minimum of 0 to 100 me window comparators ETSE a a Setting of maximum limit level 0 01 02 b066 02 Minimum limit level hysteresis width 2 minimum of 100 to 100 Minimum limit level of b061 O 0 to maximum limit level hysteresis Se E b064 Ol width 2 maximum of 100 window comparators Setting of minimum limit level 100 to maximum limit level hysteresis O O1 02 Dee ee width 2 maximum of 100 Hysteresis width of b062 O 2 sie a Fae Setting of hysteresis width for a 0 to maximum limit level minimum limit ioe N oe window comparators b065 Ol level 2 maximum of 10 maximum limit and minimum limit O O1 02 b068 02 levels i b070 O 0 to 100 ene Setting of the analog input value to be Operation level at b071 Ol to or no ignore applied when WCO WCOI or WCO2 O OI O2 disconnection ODc OlDe or O2Dc is output b072 02 100 to 100 or no ignore O Ol or 02 Max 100 Hysteresis width b062 b065 b068 Maximum limit level of window comparator b061 b064 b067 Analog o
321. lows STX 01 02 O00000000000000D BCC CR Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 119 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iv 03 command This command reads all monitored data from the inverter Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 03 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format Station No Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Data Data 104 bytes See Note 7 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 7 Monitored data Monitoring item Unit Maona Data size Description Output frequency Hz x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code gt Output current A x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code amp Rotation direction 8 bytes 0 stopping 1 forward rotation or 2 z reverse rotation
322. lue of the currently input torque command 001 t0 C098 Terminal 1 to 8 The monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the torque command value Assign 52 ATR on intelligent input terminal and turn on to activate torque control Display 0 to 200 in steps of 1 4 1 10 Torque bias monitoring The torque bias monitoring function is effective when you have selected the vector control with sensor When the torque bias monitoring function d010 is selected the inverter displays the value of the currently set P037 Torque bias value value of torque bias P038 Torque bias polarity The monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the torque bias value Display 150 to 150 in steps of 1 Related code d010 Torque bias monitoring A044 V f characteristic curve selectcion P036 Torque bias mode 4 1 11 Torque monitoring Related code When the torque monitoring function d012 is selected the inverter d012 Torque monitoring displays the estimated value of the torque output from the inverter A044 Vit characteristic curve selectcion The monitor lamp lights up while the inverter is displaying the estimated output torque Display 300 to 300 in steps of 1 Note This monitoring function is effective only when you have selected the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor as the control mode Displayed value is not accurate wh
323. m the inverter and configure the master system so that when the inverter does not return the response to a query within a specified limit time the master system resends the query 4 132 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 Explanation of function codes i Reading the coil status 01h This function reads the coil status on or off Example When reading the status of the intelligent input terminals 1 to 6 of the inverter at slave address 8 Assume that the intelligent input terminals are in the status as shown below mteligentinputteminal 1 2 3 4 6 6 Coil number 12_ Coils 13 and 14 are off Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 08 1 Slave address 08 2 Function code 01 2 Function code 01 3 Starting coil number 00 3 Number of data bytes 01 upper digit 2 4 Coil data 4 17 4 Starting coil number 06 5 CRC 16 code upper digit 12 lower digit 2 6 _CRC 16 code lower digit 1A 5 Number of coils upper digit 00 4 The data as many as the specified number of data 3 bytes is transferred 6 Number of coils lower digit 3 06 7 CRC 16 code upper digit 5C 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 90 This query cannot be broadcasted 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the actual coil number of the coil to be read first 3 If 0 or a value more than 32 is specified as the number of coils
324. minals U V and W Use a cable thicker than the specified applicable cable for the wiring of output terminals to prevent the output voltage between the inverter and motor dropping Especially at low frequency output a voltage drop due to cable will cause the motor torque to decrease Do not connect a phase advanced capacitor or surge absorber on the output side of the inverter If connected the inverter may trip or the phase advanced capacitor or surge absorber may be damaged If the cable length between the inverter and motor exceeds 20 m especially in the case of 400 V class models the stray capacitance and inductance of the cable may cause a surge voltage at motor terminals resulting in a motor burnout A special filter to suppress the surge voltage is available If you need this filter contact your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor When connecting multiple motors to the inverter connect a thermal relay to the inverter output circuit for each motor The RC rating of the thermal relay must be 1 1 times as high as the rated current of the motor The thermal relay may go off too early depending on the cable length If this occurs connect an AC reactor to the output of the inverter 2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 3 DC reactor connection terminals PD and P Use these terminals to connect the optional DC power factor reactor DCL As the factory setting terminals P and PD are connected by a jumper Remove
325. minator of the motor gear ratio P011 Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting 4 3 8 Motor gear ratio setting function The motor gear ratio setting function allows you to make the inverter effectively control a specific machine in which an encoder is installed at the opposite end of the motor Specify the actual pulse count of the encoder as the encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting P011 Specify the ratio of the motor speed to the encoder speed as the motor gear ratio numerator P028 and denominator P029 According to the above settings the encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting data converted into motor shaft data is set in the inverter The encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting data converted into motor shaft data is used to detect speeds and positions The data specified as the encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting P011 is used to calculate the home search stop position speed to encoder speed Encoder pulse per revolution PPR P011 128 to 9999 1000 to 6553 Setting of the actual pulse setting 10000 to 65530 pulses count of encoder Note 1 The motor gear ratio N D must be within the following range 1 50 lt N D lt 20 N Numerator of the motor gear ratio D Denominator of the motor gear ratio lt Example of use gt Encoder Gear load 1 024 pulses If the ratio of the motor speed to the encoder speed is 1 10 set the following data Encoder pulse per revolution PPR
326. motor capacity Motor poles setting HooaHz04 2 4 6 8 or 10 poles Selection of the number of poles of the motor Voltage compensation gain x setting for automatic torque A046 A246 0 to 255 See tem 2 Automatic torque boost boost Slippage compensation gain x setting for automatic torque A047 A247 0 to 255 aera 2 Automatic torque boost 1 Automatic torque boost The inverter outputs the voltage according to the settings of the manual torque boost A042 A242 A342 and manual torque boost frequency adjustment A043 A243 A343 Use the manual torque boost value A042 A242 A342 to specify the rate of the boost to the voltage 100 set by the AVR voltage select The set rate of voltage corresponds to the boost voltage that is output when the output frequency is 0 Hz When increasing the value of the manual torque boost value be careful to prevent motor over excitation Over excitation may result in motor burnout Use the manual torque boost frequency adjustment A043 A243 A343 to specify the rate of the frequency at each breakpoint to the base frequency 100 To switch the settings among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings A041 to A043 A241 to A243 and A342 and A343 assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching Related code A041 A241 Torque boost selection 1st 2nd motors A042 A242 A342 Manual torque boost value 1st 2nd3rd moto
327. motors El cironie th ri al oO 1 Reduced torque characteristic hes b013 b213 b313 Constant torque characteristic characteristic 7 Free setting of electronic thermal characteristic a Reduced torque characteristic The time limit characteristic determined by the value of b012 b212 or b312 is integrated with each frequency multiplied by reduction scales Example Setting on the SJ700 150LFF rated current 64 A When b012 is 64 A the base frequency is 60 Hz and output frequency is 20 Hz Reduction Trip time s scale KO Boi X0 6 E D AE 3 0 i Inverter output oa H 0 5 16 50 frequency Hz 0 55 8 76 8 1054 Motor current A 0 6 20 60 87 2 120 160 Ratio to the rated current of inverter Base frequency Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions b Constant torque characteristic Make this setting when driving a constant torque motor with the inverter Example Setting on the SJ700 150LF rated current 64 A When b012 is 64 A and output frequency is 2 5 Hz Reduction Trip time s scale XT Oae X0 9 X0 8 60 ho Inverter output 3 0 frequency Hz 0 28 354 Ee Motor current A Ratio to the rated current of inverter 98 1 135 180 c Free setting of electronic thermal characteristic To protect the motor against overheating you can set the electronic thermal characteristic freely according to the load on the motor The range of setting is shown in the figures bel
328. ms other than b031 F001 A020 A220 A320 A021 to A035 and A038 Disabling rewriting except in the mode allowing changes during operation 4 2 45 Forcible operation from digital operator OPE function 0 1 Related code A001 Frequency source setting The forcible operation function allows you to forcibly enable the inverter operation from the digital operator when the digital operator is A002 Run command source setting not selected as the device to input frequency and operation C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions commands An intelligent input terminal is used to turn this function on and off When the intelligent input terminal to which the forcible operation function is assigned is off frequency and operation commands are input from the devices selected by functions A001 and A002 When the terminal is on the device to input frequency and operation commands is forcibly switched to the digital operator If the input device is switched while the inverter is operating the current operation command is canceled and the inverter stops the output When restarting the inverter operation turn off the operation command that was to be entered from each input device for safety s sake and then enter a new operation command Terminal function C001 to C008 OPE Forcible operation 4 2 46 Forcible operation from terminal F TM function Related code A001 Frequency source setting A002 Run c
329. n 01 terminal switching mode is specified for the torque limit selection b040 the torque limits 1 to 4 are set as shown in the example below The torque limits 1 to 4 are switched by the torque limit switches 1 and 2 assigned to intelligent input terminals Example When torque limit switch 1 41 and torque limit switch 2 42 are assigned to intelligent input terminals 7 and 8 respectively Intelligent input terminals 1 8 OFF OFF gt b041 ON OFF b042 OFF ON b044 ON ON b043 When applying the torque limitation function to the motor operation at low speeds also use the overload restriction function 4 2 101 Reverse Run protection function The reverse Run protection function is effective when 03 sensorless vector control 04 OHz range sensorless vector control or 05 vector control with sensor is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors b046 Reverse Run protection enable For control reasons especially during motor operation at low speed the inverter may output a frequency that instructs the motor to rotate in the direction opposite to that specified by the operation command If the counterrotation of the motor may damage the machine driven by the motor enable the counterrotation prevention function Data Description VIE characte isticcuive 03 Sensorless vector control sel
330. n C026 for on board capacitors 4 2 68 Communication line disconnection signal NDc Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function C077 Communication trip time This signal function is enabled only when ModBus RTU has been selected for the RS485 communication If a reception timeout occurs the inverter continues to output the communication line disconnection signal until it receives the next data Specify the limit time for reception timeout by setting the communication trip time C077 For details see Section 4 4 Communication Functions External control equipment Inverter Monitoring timer ommunication trip time C077 Communication line l disconnection signal NDc Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 32 NDc Communication line Alarm relay terminal function C026 disconnection signal Communication trip time C077 0 00 to 99 99 s l a o E Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 69 Cooling fan speed drop signal WAF The inverter outputs the cooling fan speed drop WAF signal when it detects that the rotation speed of its internal cooling fan has fallen to 75 or less of the full speed If 01 has been selected for the cooling fan control 0092 the inverter will not output the WAF signal even when the cooling fan stops If the WAF signal is output check the cooling fan cover for clogging You can monitor the state
331. n if the terminal selected for the target or feedback data is also selected for the terminal by A079 the terminal functions according to the setting of A079 Specifying the value to disable selection for A079 disables feed forward control 5 Output of inverted PID deviation Some sensor characteristics may cause the polarity of the deviation of feedback data from the target value to be inconsistent with the inverter operation command If the inconsistency occurs specify 01 for function A077 to invert the polarity of the deviation Example When controlling the compressor for a refrigerator Assume that the temperature and voltage specifications of the temperature sensor are 20 C to 100 C and 0 to 10 V and the target value is 0 C If the current temperature is 10 C and the inverter is under the normal type of PID control the inverter will reduces the output frequency because the feedback data is larger than the target value In such a case specify 01 for function A077 to invert the feedback deviation Then the inverter will increase the output frequency PID target value PID operation PID feedback data 6 Limitation on PID variation range You can limit the PID output to within a specific range with reference to the target value To use the PID variation limit function set the PID variation range A078 Set a value on the assumption that the maximum frequency corresponds to 100 The variation of PID output
332. n signal 1 When 01 control circuit terminal is selected as frequency source setting A001 there is a case that inverter does not recognize the sons as constant value due to sampling In this case adjusting is to be made by setting CO38 00 valid during operation or increasing analogue input filter A016 Output current A Low current indication signal detection level C039 Low current ON indication signal i 4 2 73 Inverter ready signal IRDY Related code The inverter outputs the inverter ready IRDY signal when it is ready fof C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions operation i e when it can receive an operation command C026 Alarm relay terminal function The inverter can recognize only the operation command that is input while the IRDY signal is output If the IRDY signal is not output check whether the input power supply voltage connected to the R S and T terminals is within the range of specification Signal is not output when the power is given only to control power supply Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 50 IRDY Inverter ready signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 4 2 74 Forward rotation signal FWR Related code The inverter continues to output the forward rotation FWR signal while C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions it is driving the motor for forward operation C026 Alarm relay terminal function The FWR signal is turn
333. n the RS signal is turned on See 00 example 1 When operation is normal Shutting off the inverter output When an error has occurred Resetting the trip Resetting the trip when the RS signal is turned off See 01 example 2 When operation is normal Shutting off the inverter output Reset mode When an error has occurred Resetting the trip selection Resetting the trip when the RS signal is turned on See 02 example 1 When operation is normal Disabling the inverter output When an error has occurred Resetting the trip Trip is reset See example 1 03 Internal data is not reset see 4 3 13 When operation is normal Disabling the inverter output When an error has occurred Resetting the trip Restart mode after au zar win gre reset 01 Start with matching frequency See example 3 02 Restart with input frequency See example 4 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Example 1 Example 2 Alarm Alarm Example 3 If you select 01 starting with matching frequency as the restart mode after reset C103 you can also make the inverter start the motor with matching frequency after the power reset When 00 starting with 0 Hz is selected as the restart mode after reset C103 the setting of the retry wait time before motor restart b003 is ignored Note that even when restarting with matching frequency has been selected the inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the output frequency is no more than half the ba
334. nary operation mode with up to 16 speeds operation selection Bit operation mode with up to 8 speeds 0 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency Hz A020 A220 A320 A021 to A035 Multispeed O to 15 settings Setting of the frequency as each speed Carefully note that during multispeed operation the rotation direction specified in an operation command is reversed if the sum of the frequencies specified by the main frequency and auxiliary frequency commands is less than 0 Hz when the following settings have been made The control circuit terminal block 01 is specified for the frequency source setting A001 The external analog input 0 02 01 mode set by a combination of AT selection A005 02 selection A006 and AT terminal On Off state allows reversible motor operation Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 1 Binary operation mode Assign functions 02 CF1 to 05 CF4 individually to the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 to make multispeed s 0 to 15 available for selection Specify the desired frequencies for speeds 1 to 15 by setting multispeeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 You can set speed 0 by using function A020 A220 A320 or F001 see Section 4 2 1 when you have specified the digital operator for the frequency source setting You can set speed 0 by using the O Ol or O2 terminal when you have specified the control circuit board for the frequency source setting Speed 11
335. ncluding the heat sink positioned outside the enclosure has a cooling fan Therefore do not place the enclosure in any environment where it is exposed to waterdrops oil mist or dust 9 Approximate loss by inverter capacity Loss with 100 oad i 325 425 00 800 ors 1160 1550 1900 2300 2000 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 2 Backing plate 1 For models with 22 kW or less capacity On the backing plate cut the joints around each section to be cut off with cutting pliers or a cutter remove them and then perform the wiring Q Joint Section to be cut off 2 For the models with 30 kW or less capacity 1 For wiring without using conduits Cut an X in each rubber bushing of the backing plate with cutting pliers or a cutter and then perform the wiring Je Backing plate 2 For wiring using conduits Remove the rubber bushings from the holes to be used for wiring with conduits and then fit conduits into the holes mo Note Do not remove the rubber bushing from holes that are not used for wiring with a conduit If a cable is connected through the plate hole without a rubber bushing and conduit the cable insulation may be damaged by the edge of the hole resulting in a short circuit or ground fault Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 Wiring Be sure to ground the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of electri
336. ncoder to be used You can select the speed control or pulse train position control mode by the pulse train mode setting P013 When using this function observe the following precautions 1 If you use the inverter to drive a motor of which the capacity is two classes lower than the maximum applicable capacity of the inverter you may not be able to obtain adequate motor characteristics 2 Ifthe inverter does not accelerate the motor normally or the overload protection operates check the phase sequence of the encoder signal For forward rotation phase B normally leads phase A by a phase angle of 90 You can check the direction of motor rotation with the actual frequency monitoring function d008 For checking with this monitoring function specify 00 VC for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 and make the inverter operate the motor Normally a positive frequency is monitored when a forward operation command is input and vice versa 3 If you cannot obtain the desired characteristics from the motor driven under the vector control with sensor readjust the motor constants according to the symptom as described in the table below Operation status Symptom Adjustment method aes Starting The motor generates a Reduce the motor constant J from the set value H024 H034 impact when it starts Decelerating The motor runs unsteadil Reduce the speed response setting ae y Reduce the motor constant J from the set value H024 H0
337. nction C008 140Dh ___ Terminal 3 active state C013 140Eh Terminal 4 active state C014 I 1410h Terminal 6 active state C016 12 EXT external trip 13 USP unattended start 1402h Terminal 2 function C002 control gain setting 27 UP remote control UP function selection 40 TL torque limit enable 41 TRQ1 torque forcible terminal operation 52 ATR permission of torque 1409h Reserved 1411h Terminal 7 active state C017 R protection 14 CS commercial power source enable 15 Terminal 3 function 28 DWN remote control DOWN function 29 DWN limit selection bit 1 42 TRQ2 torque limit selection bit 2 command input 53 KHC cumulative power clearance o ee 140Ah__ Reserved C011 1412h Terminal 8 active state C018 1413h Terminal FW active state C019 1414h Reserved oan 4 152 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 0 RUN running 1 FA1 constant speed reached 2 FA2 set frequency overreached 3 OL overload notice advance 1415h Terminal 11 function C021 signal 1 4 OD output deviation for PID control 5 AL alarm signal 6 FA3 set frequency reached 7 OTQ over torque 8 IP instantaneous power failure 9 UV 1416h Terminal 12 function C022 1417h Terminal 13 function C023 1418h Terminal 14 function C024 1419h Terminal 15 function C025 undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limited 11 RNT operation 141Ah_ Alarm re
338. nction is disabled the inverter waits for the Brake Wait Time for Acceleration b122 and then starts accelerating the motor up to the set acceleration frequency 5 When the operation command is turned off the inverter decelerates the motor down to the braking frequency b125 and then turns off the brake release signal BRK 6 When the braking confirmation signal BOK has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal that is when 44 is specified for one of C001 to C008 the inverter waits after turning off the brake release signal until the braking confirmation is turned off at least for the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 without decelerating the motor If the braking confirmation signal is not turned off within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 the inverter trips with the braking error signal BER output When the braking confirmation signal BOK has not been assigned to any intelligent input terminal the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 is invalid In such cases the inverter proceeds to the operation described in Item 7 after the brake release signal is turned off After the braking confirmation signal or the brake release signal when the BOK signal function is disabled is turned off the inverter waits for the Brake Wait Time for Stopping b123 and then starts decelerating the motor down to 0 Hz Brake Release Frequency Setting b125 Output frequency E T oO a E N
339. nction name Monitored data or setting operation operation FF _FEF _FUF aod ed P116 Ger Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P117 an Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P118 an Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P119 fio Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P120 eon Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P121 a Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P122 Dr Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P123 ey Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P124 on Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P125 oa Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P126 E Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P127 on Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P128 on Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P129 car sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P130 Go Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P131 Gh Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o 8 17 Chapter 8 List
340. ncy 1 0 to free setting V f frequency 2 Hz 0 x x b101 Free setting V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b102 Free setting V f frequency 2 0 to free setting V f frequency 3 Hz 0 x x o B b103 Free setting V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x 2 b104 Free setting V f frequency 3 0 to free setting V f frequency 4 Hz 0 x x S b105 Free setting V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b106 Free setting V f frequency 4 0 to free setting V f frequency 5 Hz 0 x x 4 17 5 b107 Free setting V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x 2 b108 Free setting V f frequency 5 0 to free setting V f frequency 6 Hz 0 x x D b109 Free setting V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x o e b110 Free setting V f frequency 6 0 to free setting V f frequency 7 Hz 0 x x b111 Free setting V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b112 Free setting V f frequency 7 0 to free setting V f frequency 8 Hz 0 x x b113 Free setting V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 x x b120 Brake Control Enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 x O b121 Brake Wait Time for Release 0 00 to 5 00 s 0 00 x O b122 Brake Wait Time for Acceleration 0 00 to 5 00 s 0 00 x O b123 Brake Wait Time for Stopping 0 00 to 5 00 s 0 00 x O 4 81 b124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation 0 00 to 5 00 s 0 00 x e b125 Brake Release Frequency Setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x O b126 Brake Release Current Setting 0 0 to 2 00 x rat
341. ncy of the PWM waveform output from the inverter Increasing the carrier frequency can lower the metallic noise from the motor but may increase the inverter noise and current leakage You can use this function effectively to avoid resonance of the mechanical system and motor Range of data Description Carrier frequency b083 0 5 to 15 0 kHz 1 setting 1 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the inverter capacity When increasing the carrier frequency fc derate the output current as shown in the following table Derated output current is to be set as electronic thermal protection level 4 2 29 Derating is not needed when electronic thermal level is already set to lower then derating level Voltage eass 200 V class 400 V class Inverter Maximum F Maximum fez capacity fo kHz Derating at fe 15 kHz fc kHz Derating at fe 15 kHz 15kW 12 95 60 8 A or less 14 95 30 4A or less 18 5kW 10 90 68 4A or less 10 90 34 2A or less 22kW 7 70 66 5A or less 6 75 36 0A or less 30kW 5 80 96 8A or less 10 75 43 5A or less 37kW 10 75 108 7A or less 8 80 60 0A or less 200 V class 400 V class 37kW 30kW 100 100 15kW S 95 S 95 2 90 f 2 90 t8 5kW 5 85 f 5 85 s 5 80 s 80 PEEVE IS ae corner EE Seema L LAE IE P ORE roan fin Sif SORT EN EE 75 75 O J O 70 ne 70 70 amp 65 EGI pA acc Gc ac a a g 60 e ee ee ad en ee
342. nd prevent the conveyor from being stopped by the overload protection of the inverter To use this function assign function 03 OK or 26 OL2 to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 Two types of overload notice signal are available for output Item Function code Data or range of data Description O e mode acceleration deceleration and constant 00 Disabling the warning output Specifying the current at which to output the OL signal overload notice advance signal 1 Specifying the current at which to output the OL2 signal overload notice advance signal 2 Overload signal output Overload level setting 0 1 to 2 0 x rated current A Overload setting 2 0 1 to 2 0 x rated current A Overload restriction setting b022 b025 Overload level setting C041 C111 Output current OIOL2 output J 4 2 31 Overcurrent restraint Related code The overcurrent restraint function allows you to restrain the b027 Overcurrent suppression enable overcurrent that can occur when the output current sharply increases because of rapid acceleration You can enable or disable the function by setting the overcurrent suppression enable b027 Data or range of data Overcurrent 00 Disabling the overcurrent restraint b027 suppression enable Enabling the overcurrent restraint Note When using the inverter for a
343. nd then perform the following procedure OPOWER FAITZAGIRI ont apm AITAGHIL ohz OH RUN O oV RUN 0 eye PRG O 8 8 6 8 ol PRE OL ad 3 P og kt Oh o SAQO SAQO ameo OPOHER HITACHI Gower OWz RUN oy PRG a fe 1 Holding down the FUNC and 2 2 Initialization is in progress 3 When the initialization is down keys press and hold down The above figure shows the completed the monitor displays the STOP RESET key monitor display indicating that the code d001 After the monitor starts blinking initialization is in progress Confirm that the settings have release only the STOP RESET intended for Japan Those been initialized key The display on the monitor intended for other regions and trip changes to that shown in the history clearance are shown middle figure above below Release the FUNC and 2 down keys Initialization in progress p display intended for Europe ea an C PEL USA G AL In the far left digit the lighting segments move round for r Initialization in progress display intended for the U S A r Initialization in progress display for trip history clearance S Gees bus dO Leis 4 Note 1 The initialization operation does not initialize the analog input settings C081 C082 C083 C121 C122 and C123 and thermistor coefficient setting C085 Note 2 The initialization operation does not initialize the settings of
344. ndervolage AL ee na ON IP OFF f____1__ IP re Example 10 b004 02 While the inverter is stopped While the inverter is operating Power supply 0 Power supply an ee oy 7 ws Operation command ON Operation command gy OFF off Inverter output ON Inverter output ON r _ _ _ _ _ lt OFF E Ne E ne R IP IP T S Note 1 You can assign the instantaneous power failure alarm signal IP 08 and the undervoltage alarm signal UV 09 to any of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 to output the alarm signals Note 2 For the alarm output following the occurrence of power failure of 1 second or longer see the explanation of reset Section 4 2 48 4 35 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Restarting methods Restart with matching frequency The inverter detects the frequency and rotation direction based on the residual voltage in the motor and then restarts the motor based on the detected frequency Restart with input frequency The inverter starts the output with the frequency specified for the start frequency selection b030 searches for the point where the frequency and voltage are balanced while keeping the current at the restart current level b028 and then restarts the motor If the inverter trips when it restarts the motor in this way reduce the setting of b028 After the inverter output has been shut off the digital opera
345. nds on the setting of function b038 For details see Section 4 2 81 Initial screen selection on page 4 76 When the setting of function b038 is 01 factory setting the monitor initially shows as the setting of function d001 output frequency monitoring Pressing the E key in this status changes the display to f Note The display contents on the monitor depend on the settings of functions b037 function code display restriction 0038 initial screen selection and b039 automatic setting of user parameters For details see Sections 4 2 80 Function code display restriction on page 4 74 4 2 81 Initial screen selection on page 4 76 and 4 2 82 Automatic user parameter setting on page 4 77 Item Function code Data Description 00 Full display 01 Function specific display Punon es gi piay b037 02 User setting restriction r 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display factory setting 00 Screen displayed when the STR key was pressed last same as the operation on the SJ300 series Initial screen selection b038 01 d001 output frequency monitoring Initial display at 1 02 d002 output current monitoring power on 03 d003 rotation direction minitoring 04 d007 Scaled output frequency monitoring 05 F001 output frequency setting Selection of automatic b039 00 Disable user parameter settings 1 01 Enable 41 Not displayed with the f
346. ng by A062 for reverse rotation b When operation commands are input from the digital operator A002 02 F004 Motor speed with 0 V input via O2 terminal 00 Frequency setting by A062 for forward rotation 01 Frequency setting by A062 for reverse rotation 4 24 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 21 Jump frequency function The jump frequency function allows you to operate the inverter so that it avoids the resonant frequency of the machine driven by the same Since the inverter avoids the motor operation with a constant output frequency within the specified range of the frequencies to jump when the jump frequency function is enabled you cannot set any inverter output frequency within the specified range of the frequencies to jump Note that while the inverter is accelerating or decelerating the motor the inverter output frequency changes continuously according to the set acceleration deceleration time You can set up to three frequencies to jump Related code A063 Jump center frequency setting 1 A064 Jump hysteresis frequency width setting 1 A065 Jump center frequency setting 2 A066 Jump hysteresis frequency width setting 2 A067 Jump center frequency setting 3 A068 Jump hysteresis frequency width setting 3 Range of data Jump center frequency A063 A065 x Setting of the center frequency of the settings 1st 2nd 3rd settings A067 9 0010 R090 R
347. ng made Setting made Released nd Setting made Emergency stop when SW 1 is 18 RS when SW 1 is 00 NO from No function when SW 1 is disabled 3 5 set ON set ON emergency assigned set ON retained retained stop function retained 01 NC 4 When function 18 RS is assigned to the input terminal a b NO NC selection is always 00 NO 2 When terminal setting C003 is 64 EMR terminal setting C013 is always 01 NC 3 If function 18 RS has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal other than intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 before slide switch SW1 is set to ON the input terminal setting for said terminal is automatically changed to no no function assigned when slide switch SW 1 is set to ON to prevent any duplication of terminal functions Even if slide switch SW1 is subsequently returned to OFF the original function setting for said terminal will not be restored If necessary the original function will have to be re assigned to said terminal Example If slide switch SW 1 is set to ON when function 18 RS has been assigned to input terminal 2 by terminal setting C002 terminal setting C002 is changed to no no function assigned and function 18 RS is assigned to input terminal 1 by terminal setting C001 Even if slide switch SW1 is subsequently returned to OFF terminal 2 function C002 and terminal 1 function C001 will remain as no no function assigned and 18 RS r
348. ning time b034 low R W 0 to 65535 1 10h 4 149 _ IO _ IO alo o Ol o Ola a eee ee ie 2 Sfx 2 Sf Z Oo Oo Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Register No code No 0 minimum reduced voltage start time to 255 1326h Reduced voltage start selection b036 maximum reduced voltaae start time 0 full display 1 function specific display 2 user 1327h Function code display restriction b037 Rw 3 lay 4 y 7 user 2 0 screen displayed Ata the STR key was pressed 1328h ___ Initial screen selection b038 Rw ee 1 d001 2 d002 3 d003 4 d007 5 F001 Automatic user parameter 1329h setting function enable bosa Rw 0 disabling 1 enabling ey quadrant specific setting 01 switching by 132Ah__ Torque limit selection b040 R W terminal 02 analog input 03 option 1 04 option 2 Torque limit 1 forward driving 132Bh in 4 quadrant mode b041 RW 0 to 200 255 no 1 Torque limit 2 132Ch reverse regenerating in b042 R W 0 to 200 255 no 1 4 quadrant mode Torque limit 3 reverse driving 132Dh ind quadrankimode boas Rw 0 to 200 255 n0 to 200 255 0 to 200 255 n0 1 Torque limit 4 132Eh forward regenerating in b044 R W 0 to 200 255 no 1 i quadrant mode 132Fh Torque limit LADSTOP enable b045 0 disabling 1 enabling 1330h Reverse Run protection enable b046
349. ning time hour x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 2 Output current A x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code A DC voltage V x10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 3 Cumulative power on time hour x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code a 4 122 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions vii 06 command This command reads a specified setting item from the inverter Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 06 Parameter Data parameter number 4 bytes See Note 12 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BEC POEK ENEEK code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 12 The parameters that can be specified for reading are F002 to F004 A001 to A153 b001 to b132 C001 to C159 H003 to H073 and P001 to P131 To read the F001 parameter use the 01 command Response frame Positive response Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter ACK Control code acknowledgement 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data to be sent decimal ASCII 8 bytes See Note 13 code XOR of the items from Station No to
350. nput from the easy sequence program Item Function code Range of data Description Acceleration 1 time F002 F202 Set the length of time to accelerate the motor from 0 0 01 to 3600 s h setting F302 Hz to the maximum frequency Deceleration 1 time F003 F203 Set the length of time to decelerate the motor from i 0 01 to 3600 s P setting F303 the maximum frequency to 0 Hz 00 Input from the digital operator OPE Accel decel time input P031 selection Output frequency Maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 a F A E a vz AN Set output frequency Actual Actual acceleration i deceleration time i time l F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 The actual time to accelerate decelerate the motor will be no less than the minimum acceleration deceleration time that depends on the inertial effect J due to the mechanical system and motor torque If you set a time shorter than the minimum acceleration deceleration time the inverter may trip because of overcurrent or overvoltage Acceleration time ts Jt Jm x Nm Ji Inertia effect J of the load converted to that of the motor shaft kg m 9 55 x Ts TL Ju Inertia effect J of the motor kg m Nm Motor speed rpm Ts Maximum acceleration torque driven by the inverter N m te HEJM Nw Ts Maximum deceleration torque driven by the inverter N m 9 55 x Ts T1 T Required running torque N m t Deceleration time tg Chap
351. nt mode b045 Torque limit LADSTOP enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 O 4 94 b046 Reverse Run protection enable 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 S 4 93 pa Controller deceleration and stop 00 disabling 01 nonstop deceleration to stop 02 DC voltage D b050 f p 00 x x on power loss constant control with resume 03 without resume Q 3 z gt bos4 DC bus voltage trigger level 0 0 to 999 9 1000 V 0 0 x x amp during power loss C g b052 Over voltage threshold during 0 0 to 999 9 1000 V 0 0 x x g power loss 5 pos3 Deceleration time setting during 9 94 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 1 00 x x 4 83 sE power loss amp b054 Initial output frequency decrease 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 00 x x a during power loss co b055 Proportional gain setting for 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 o o nonstop operation at power loss c 2 bose Integral time setting for nonstop 4 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 s 0 100 o o operation at power loss boso Maximum limit level of window 9 to 100 lower limit b061 b062 2 100 o o comparators O pos4 Minimum limit level of window to 100 lower limit 060 b062 2 0 o o comparators O pos2 Hysteresis width of window 0 to 10 lower limit b061 b062 2 0 o o comparators O bos Maximum limit level of window 9 to 100 lower limit b064 b066 2 100 o o comparators Ol bos Minimum imit level of window 4 to 490 lower limit
352. ntary speed variation and speed error Speed error at rated torque A Synchronous rotation speed at base frequency 4 2 56 Analog command holding function AHD Related code The analog command holding function allows you to make the inverter hold C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions the analog command input via the external analog input terminal when the C101 UP DWN holding function AHD terminal is on While the AHD terminal is on the up down function can be used based on the analog signal held by this function as reference data When 01 is specified for Up Down memory mode selection C101 the result of up down processing can be stored in memory If the inverter power is turned on or the RS terminal turned off with the AHD terminal left turned on the data held immediately before power on or turning off the RS terminal will be used Terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 AHD Analog command holding AHD terminal a IF ie e i Remark ie a Set frequency remains when inverter i is switched with SET SET3 terminal Input analog comma o p eee with AHD on Turn AHD terminal off rm to re hold the set frequency Momentary speed variation x 100 Frequency command 4 2 57 Intelligent pulse counter PCNT and PCC Related code The intelligent pulse counter function allows you to input a pulse C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to terminal 8 functions train via an intelligent input terminal 028 Puls
353. ntegral time setting for nonstop operation at momentary power failure b055 Proportional gain setting for nonstop operation at momentary power failure b056 Integral time setting for nonstop operation at momentary power failure Data or range of data Disabling the nonstop deceleration function Controller deceleration and stop on power loss b050 01 Enabling me nonstop deceleration function Se a 2 Se 1 ee DC bus voltage trigger level during powerloss bosa 0 0to1000 V y E Over voltage threshold during power loss 1 bos2 0 0to1000 V Deceleration time setting during power loss bosas 0 01to3600 9 y Ef Initial output frequency decrease during power loss b054 0 00to 10 00 Hz e Proportional gain at DC voltage Proportional gain setting for nonstop operation at b055 0 00 to 2 55 constant control Only when momentary power failure 02 or 03 is specified for b050 Integral time at DC voltage Integral time setting for nonstop operation at b056 0 0 to 9 999 constant control Only when momentary power failure 10 00 to 65 53 02 or 03 is specified for b050 lt 1 gt nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure 0050 01 The nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure is the function making the inverter decelerate and stop the motor while maintaining the voltage below the overvoltage level over voltage threshold during power loss b052 when an instantaneous power failure occurs
354. nts leaking from the inverter alone The values exclude current leakage from external devices and equipment e g power cables 200 V class model input power 200 VAC 50 Hz 400 V class model input power 400 VAC 50 Hz 5 5KW 11kKW 15kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 5 5kW 11kW 15kW 37kW 45kW 55kW Internal EMC filter enabled Ca 48mA Ca 23mA Ca 23mA Ca 95mA Ca 56mA Ca 56mA Internal EMC filter disabled Ca 0 1mA Ca 0 1mA Ca 0 1mA Ca 0 2mA Ca 0 2mA Ca 0 2mA Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 3 Applicable peripheral equipment See Item 4 Recommended cable gauges wiring accessories and crimp terminals Note 1 The peripheral equipment described here is applicable when the inverter connects a standard Hitachi 3 phase 4 pole squirrel cage motor Select breakers that have proper capacity Use breakers that comply with inverters Use earth leakage breakers ELB to ensure safety Use copper electric wire HIV cable of which the maximum allowable temperature of the insulation is 75 C If the power line exceeds 20 m cable that is thicker than the specified applicable cable must be used for the power line Use a 0 75 mm cable to connect the alarm output contact Tighten each terminal screw with the specified tightening torque Loose terminal screws may cause short circuits and fire Tightening a terminal screw with excessive torque may cause damage to the terminal block or inverter body S
355. nverter will shut off its output and n error display the error code shown on the right The inverter will trip according to the settings of p45 and P048 If two or more devices having the same MAC ID are detected in the same network the inverter will display the error code shown on the right Duplicate MAC ID If the Force Fault Trip bit of Attribute 17 in the Instance 1 of the Control Supervisory External trip object is set to 1 the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right If timeout occurs during the Inverter communication between the inverter and communicatio DeviceNet option board the inverter will n error shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right Display on Display on j Reference digital operator Troubleshooting and corrective action page Check whether the communication speed Refer to the setting is correct instruction Check whether the wiring distance is manual for appropriate the SJ DN Check the connections Check whether duplicate MAC IDs are used Check whether the Attribute 17 in the Instance 1 of Class 29 is 1 If so clear the bit to 0 Check whether the option board has been disconnected from the inverter Note If the option board does not operate normally confirm the DIP switch settings on the option board Functions of the DIP switches on the DeviceNet option board SJ DN Setting of DeviceNet baud rate DI
356. o 100 0 0 00 O A079 PID feed forward selection 00 disabled 01 O input 02 OIl input 03 O2 input 00 O 8 4 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Default Setting Change during during Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page _FF _FEF _FUF allowed or allowed or not not A081 AVR function select 00 always on 01 always off 02 off during deceleration 02 00 00 x x 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 V 4 11 z gt gt A082 AVR voltage select 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 V 200 400 230 400 230 460 x x A085 Operation mode selection 00 normal operation 01 energy saving operation 02 fuzzy operation 00 x x 4 32 A086 Energy saving mode tuning 0 1 to 100 0 50 0 G O A092 Acceleration 2 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 O O A292 Acceleration 2 time setting 9 44 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 o o c 2nd motor 2 F F z S asg2 Acceleration 2 time setting 9 94 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 o o 2 3rd motor 5 A093 Deceleration 2 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 O O ki x F A amp a293 Deceleration 2 time setting 0 04 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 g 2nd mo
357. o WH 1 2 2 Product warranty The product will be warranted for one year after the date of purchase Even within the warranty period repair of a product fault will not be covered by the warranty but the repair will be at your own cost if 1 the fault has resulted from incorrect usage not conforming to the instructions given in this Instruction Manual or the repair or modification of the product carried out by an unqualified person 2 the fault has resulted from a cause not attributable to the delivered product 3 the fault has resulted from use beyond the limits of the product specifications or 4 the fault has resulted from disaster or other unavoidable events The warranty will only apply to the delivered inverter and excludes all damage to other equipment and facilities induced by any fault of the inverter The warranty is effective only in Japan Repair at the user s charge Following the one year warranty period any examination and repair of the product will be accepted at your charge Even during the warranty period examination and repairs of faults subject to the above scope of the warranty disclaimer will be available at charge To request a repair at your charge contact your supplier or local Hitachi Distributor The Hitachi Distributors are listed on the back cover of this Instruction Manual 1 2 3 Warranty Terms The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions shall be two 2 years from the
358. o the maximum frequency the output voltage is constant regardless of the change in the output frequency Output voltage 100 Output frequency Hz 0 Base Maximum frequency frequency 2 Reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power of VP This control system is suited when the inverter is used with equipment e g fan or pump that does not require a large torque at a low speed Since this control system reduces the output voltage at low frequencies you can use it to increase the efficiency of equipment operation and reduce the noise and vibrations generated from the equipment The V f characteristic curve for this control system is shown below Output voltage 100 ed We vp ft Output frequency Hz 10 of base Base Maximum frequency frequency frequency YW Period a While the output frequency increases from 0 Hz to the 10 of the base frequency the output voltage follows the constant torque characteristic Example If the base frequency is 60 Hz the constant torque characteristic is maintained within the output frequency range of 0 to 60 Hz Period While the output frequency increases from the 10 of base frequency to the base frequency the output voltage follows the reduced torque characteristic In other words the output voltage increases according to the 1 7th power of the output frequency Period While the output frequency increases from the base frequency to the maximum fr
359. ode 4 1 23 Pulse counter monitor d028 Pulse counter monitor Pulse counter monitor allows you to monitor the accumulated pulse of intelligent input terminals pulse counter 74 PCNT 4 1 24 Position command monitor in absolute position control mode Related code The user monitor function allows you to monitor the results of operations d028 Pulse counter monitor in an easy sequence program For details refer to the Programming Software EzSQ Instruction Manual 4 1 25 Current position monitor in absolute position control mode The current position monitor function allows you to monitor the current EAER position in absolute position control mode osa positon feedback ionilor For details see Section 4 3 12 i 4 1 26 Trip Counter Related code When the trip counter function d080 is selected the inverter displays the 4080 Trip Counter number of times the inverter has tripped Display 0 to 9999 in units of 1 trip 1000 to 6553 in units of 10 trips Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 1 27 Trip monitoring 1 to 6 When the trip monitoring function d081 to d086 is selected the inverter displays the trip history data The last six protective trips the inverter made can be displayed Select the trip monitoring 1 d081 to display the data on the most recent trip Display contents 1 Factor of tripping one of E01 to E79 1 2 Output frequency at tripping Hz 3 Output current at tripping A
360. of Data Settings pete Sue She Code Function name Monitored data or setting operation operation Page FF rer _FUF O or hes or rd u001 User selected function 1 no d001 to P131 no O O U002 User selected function 2 no d001 to P131 no O O U003 User selected function 3 no d001 to P131 no O O U004 User selected function 4 no d001 to P131 no O O U005 User selected function 5 no d001 to P131 no O s 5 U006 User selected function 6 no d001 to P131 no C O 4 76 a U007 User selected function 7 no d001 to P131 no O O 8 U008 User selected function 8 no d001 to P131 no O O U009 User selected function 9 no d001 to P131 no O ei U010 User selected function 10 no d001 to P131 no O 8 U011 User selected function 11 no d001 to P131 no O O U012 User selected function 12 no d001 to P131 no O O 8 18 Appendix Upgrading from the SJ300 Series The SJ300 series inverter is upwardly compatible with the SJ700 series inverter Therefore you can mount the control circuit terminal block board of the SJ300 series in the SJ700 series without removing the connected cables copy the parameter settings from the SJ300 series into the SJ700 series and use the option boards mounted in the SJ300 series for the SJ700 series without removing the connected cables 1 Control circuit terminal block board You can mount the control circuit terminal block board of the SJ300 serie
361. of the WAF signal by using the life check monitoring function d022 Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function b092 Cooling fan control d022 Life check monitoring Terminal function C021 to C025 40 WAF Cooling fan speed Alarm relay terminal function C026 drop signal 4 2 70 Starting contact signal FR Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions The inverter outputs the starting contact FR signal while itis C026 Alarm relay terminal function receiving an operation command The FR signal is output regardless of the setting of the run command source setting A002 If the forward operation FW and reverse operation RV commands are input at the same time the inverter stops the motor operation Terminal function C021 to C025 41 FR Starting contact Alarm relay terminal function C026 signal Forward operation command Reverse operation command Starting contact signal FR 4 2 71 Heat sink overheat warning signal OHF The inverter monitors the temperature of its internal heat sink and outputs the heat sink overheat warning OHF signal when the temperature exceeds the heat sink overheat warning level C064 Data or range of data Terminal function C021 to C025 OHF Heat sink overheat warning Alarm relay terminal function C026 signal Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay term
362. of the maximum torque generated when the inverter outputs its maximum current on the assumption that the maximum torque is 200 Note that each torque limit value does not represent an absolute value of torque The actual output torque varies depending on the motor If the torque limited TRQ signal function is assigned to an intelligent output terminal the TRQ signal will turn on when the torque limitation function operates 0g Senearaasheemresnre V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 04 OHz range sensorless vector control 05 Vector control with sensor not ee 00 Quadrant specific setting mode Torque limit selection b040 Analog input mode ee ooo oo 1 mode 04 Option 2mode gt 2 mode Torque limit 1 b041 0 to o Forward powering in q quadrant specific setting mode b042 0 to 200 Reverse regeneration in ae b043 0 to 200 Reverse powering in ae b044 0 to 200 Forward regeneration in Whether to enable torque limitation Terminal function C001 to C008 Torque limit switch 1 Torque limit switch 2 Terminal function C021 to C025 Torque limited signal 4 92 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions When 00 quadrant specific setting mode is specified for the torque limit selection 0040 the torque limits 1 to 4 apply as shown below Torque Regeneration Powering b041 b042 Reverse rotation Forward rotation RV FW Powering Regeneration b043 b044 Whe
363. oltage select function A082 Base Maximum frequency frequency Range of data Description Maximum frequency A004 A204 gt A304 30 to 400 Hz The maximum output frequency is set Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 11 External analog input setting O Ol and O2 The inverter has the following three types of external analog input terminals O L terminal O to 10 V Ol L terminal 4 to 20 mA O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V Related code A005 AT selection A006 02 selection C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions The table below lists the settings of the external analog input terminals code 00 Switching between the O and Ol Turning on the AT terminal enables the OI L terminal terminals with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O L terminal Switching between the O and O2 Turning on the AT terminal enables the O2 L terminal terminals with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O L terminal Valid only when the OPE SR is used Turning on the AT terminal enables the pot on 02 Switching between the O terminal and OPE SR terminal the control with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the O L terminal Valid only when the OPE SR is used Turning on the AT terminal enables the pot on 03 Switching between the Ol terminal and OPE SR terminal the control with the AT terminal Turning on the AT terminal enables the OI L terminal Valid only when the
364. ommand source setting C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions The forcible operation function allows you to forcibly enable the inverter operation via control circuit terminals when the control circuit terminal block is not selected as the device to input frequency and operation commands An intelligent input terminal is used to turn this function on and off When the intelligent input terminal to which the forcible terminal operation function is assigned is off frequency and operation commands are input from the devices selected by functions A001 and A002 When the terminal is on the device to input frequency and operation commands is forcibly switched to the control circuit terminal block If the input device is switched while the inverter is operating the current operation command is canceled and the inverter stops the output When restarting the inverter operation turn off the operation command that was to be entered from each input device for safety s sake and then enter a new operation command Terminal function C001 to C008 F TM Forcible terminal operation Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 47 Free run stop FRS function The free run stop FRS function allows you to shut off the inverter output to let the motor start free running You can effectively use this function when stopping the b028 Active frequency matching scan start frequency motor with a mechanical brake e g electromagnetic b029 Active freq
365. ompletion range setting P017 The inverter continues to output the POK signal until the ORT terminal is turned off After home search operation has been completed servo lock status continues until the operation command is turned off 4 104 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Note 1 Since the inverter positions the motor shaft within two turns while decelerating the motor do not specify a high frequency as the home search speed Otherwise the inverter may trip during home search because of the overvoltage protection function Note 2 For setting the home search stop position the periphery of the motor shaft is divided into 4 096 sections to determine points No 0 to No 4095 beginning at the reference point in the direction of forward rotation The division into 4 095 sections is irrelevant to the encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting The reference point is specified as the point at which the Z pulse inserted between the EZP pulse and EZN pulse signals is detected Figure 7 2 shows the layout of the reference point and target stop positions on the periphery of the motor shaft viewed from the load side of the motor shaft in case of positive phase connection Position indicated by Z pulse Motor shaft viewed from Reference point the motor load side O 102 3072 2048 4 105 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 12 Absolute position control mode To use the absolute position control mode function specify 05 V2 f
366. on mode parameters or 00 clearing the trip history 01 initializing the data 00 x x trip history 02 clearing the trip history and initializing the data 4 75 b085 Country code for initialization 00 Japan 01 EU 02 U S A 00 01 02 x x b086 Frequency scaling conversion 0 1 to 99 0 1 0 o o 4 2 factor b087 STOP key enable 00 enabling 01 disabling 02 disabling only the function to stop 00 x O 4 9 2 b088 Restart mode after FRS 00 starting with 0 Hz 01 starting with matching frequency 02 starting 00 x o 4 52 with active matching frequency O F n pags Automatic carrier frequency 00 invalid 01 valid 00 x x 4 44 reduction b090 Dynamic braking usage ratio 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 x O 4 45 b091 Stop mode selection 00 deceleration until stop 01 free run stop 00 x O 4 9 b092 Cooling fan control 00 always operating the fan 01 operating the fan only during inverter 00 x o operation including 5 minutes after power on and power off b095 Dynamic braking control 00 disabling 01 enabling disabling while the motor is topped 02 00 x o 4 45 enabling enabling also while the motor is topped b096 Dynamic braking activation level 330 to 380 660 to 760 V ay x o b098 Thermistor for thermal protection 00 disabling the thermistor 01 enabling the thermistor with PTC 02 00 x control enabling the thermistor with NTC 4 72 b099 Thermal protection level setting 0 to 9999 Q 3000 x b100 Free setting V f freque
367. onse See Item 2 ii of this section 4 124 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions x 09 command This command checks whether set data can be stored in the EEPROM in the inverter Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 09 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter ACK Control code acknowledgement 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data 2 bytes 01 enabling data storage XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Negative response See Item 4 ii of this section xi QA command This command stores set data in the EEPROM in the inverter Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 byte
368. ontrol 18 RS reset 20 remote control data clearing 31 OPE forcible operation 32 SF1 multispeed bit 1 33 SF2 multispeed bit 2 34 1404h__ Terminal 4 function C004 43 PPI P PI mode selection 44 BOK braking confirmation 45 ORT orientation 46 LAC LAD 1405h Terminal 5 function C005 140Bh Terminal 1 active state C011 140Ch___ Terminal 2 active state C012 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register Function name Function R W Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Register No code No 1 RV Reverse RUN 2 CF1 Multispeed 1 setting 3 CF2 Multispeed 2 setting 4 CF3 Multispeed 3 setting 1401h Terminal 1 function c001 5 CF4 Multispeed 4 setting 6 JG Jogging 7 DB external DC braking 8 SET Set 2nd motor data 9 2CH 2 stage acceleration deceleration 11 FRS free run stop STA starting by 3 wire input 21 STP stopping by 3 wire input 22 F R forward reverse switching by 3 wire input 23 PID PID disable 24 PIDC PID reset 26 CAS SF3 multispeed bit 3 35 SF4 multispeed bit 4 36 SF5 multispeed bit 5 37 SF6 multispeed bit 6 38 SF7 multispeed bit 7 39 OLR overload restriction cancellation 47 PCLR clearance of position deviation 48 STAT pulse train position command input enable 50 ADD trigger for frequency addition A145 51 F TM 1406h Terminal 6 function C006 1407h Terminal 7 function C007 1408h Terminal 8 fu
369. ontrol circuit terminal block is specified as the device to input operation commands the FW terminal must be turned on by an instruction in the program The intelligent input output terminals of the inverter include general purpose input output terminals dedicated to the easy sequence function Those terminals can be used to freely write and read data to and from the inverter with instructions in the program You can assign the parameters e g frequency setting and acceleration deceleration time parameters that require adjustments on the actual inverter to user parameters P130 to P131 If you do so you can readjust the parameter data by using the digital operator without having to connect your personal computer to the inverter If you specify a program number in each program you created you will be able to check the program number on the monitor of the digital operator Each user program is compiled and stored as an intermediate code in the internal EEPROM of the inverter Data can be stored in EEPROM Even if the user data is initialized via the digital operator downloaded programs and user parameters P100 to P131 are not cleared You cannot copy the downloaded program by an operation from a remote operator You cannot copy the user parameter codes P either If necessary download the user parameter codes from your personal computer Personal computer Windows system Programming debugging support softw
370. operation operation Page allowed or not allowed or not d001 Output frequency monitoring 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz O 4 1 d002 Output current monitoring 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 A 4 1 d003 Rotation direction minitoring F forward rotation o stopped r reverse rotation 4 1 d004 Process variable PV PID feedback 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 4 1 monitoring 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 2 d005 Intelligent input terminal status FW Example ra i ny es Terminals FW 7 2 and 1 ON Terminals 8 6 5 4 and 3 OFF ee EE TE 8 76 54 32 1 d006 Intelligent output terminal status Example pa Terminals 12 and 11 ON Terminals AL 15 14 and 13 OFF IE tt tl a i AL 1514 1312 11 d007 Scaled output frequency monitoring 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 1000 to 3996 10000 to 39960 O 4 2 d008 Actual frequency monitoring 400 to 100 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 4 3 d009 Torque command monitoring 200 to 200 4 3 d010 Torque bias monitoring 200 to 200 4 3 d012 Torque monitoring 200 to 200 m 4 3 d013 Output voltage monitoring 0 0 to 600 0 V 4 3 d014 Power monitoring 0 0 to 999 9 kW 4 3 d015 Cumulative power monitoring 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 E R 4 4 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 9990
371. or ON ORT terminal HEHH Output Frequency 2 X Home search speed setting P015 Home search completion ranae settina P017 Z pulse i POK signal _ on lw Home search completion dela Speed control Position control time setting P018 lt _ 1 When the operation command is turned on with the ORT terminal turned on the inverter accelerates the motor to the speed specified by the home search speed setting P015 and then runs the motor at a constant speed If the motor is already running the inverter changes the speed to the home search speed when the ORT terminal is turned on 2 After the home search speed is reached the inverter switches to position control mode when it detects the first Z pulse 3 The inverter performs position control by rotating the motor by one turn as the target amount from the position specified by the home search stop position setting P014 when running the motor forward or by two turns as the target amount from the home search stop position P014 when running the motor reversely In this case the shorter the deceleration time the larger the position loop gain setting P023 becomes This deceleration time does not follow the deceleration time setting 4 The inverter outputs a POK signal when the time specified by the home search completion delay time setting P018 elapses after the remaining number of pulses enters the range specified by the home search c
372. or reference If the inverter trips because of overcurrent NFB _ELBC when it starts the motor with matching ood frequency increase the retry wait time pai before motor restart b003 For circuit connections and switching operations see the sample connection diagram and timing charts for commercial power supply switching as shown on the right The inverter can be set up so that it will automatically retry operation at power on In such cases the CS terminal signal shown in the figures below is not required For details see the explanation of the reset RS function 4 2 29 Sample connection diagram and timing charts for commercial power supply switching Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Timing chart for switching from the inverter to the Timing chart for switching from the commercial power commercial power supply supply to the inverter a o ea o eee _f 1____ O mM e Inverter output Inverter output lt gt K gt Retry wait time b003 frequency Operation frequency 0 5 to 1 second a Operation 2 Starting with matching frequency 4 2 49 Reset RS function The reset function allows you to recover the inverter from a tripped state To perform resetting press the STOP RESET key of the digital operator or turn the RS terminal off To use the control circuit terminal for resetting assign function 18 RS to an intelligent input terminal You can select the
373. or V F characteristic curve selection 1st motor A044 and 02 APR absolute position control for the control pulse setting P012 If 03 high resolution absolute position control has been specified for the control pulse setting P012 the quadruple number of pulses used for internal operations is applied to the control Then specify values of quadruple precision for the multistage position settings and position range specification Position settings can be switched in up to eight stages in combination with control pulse settings You can select zero return mode from one low speed and two high speed modes The home search function described in the preceding section cannot be used The teaching function allows you to specify position settings while actually running the machine If function 73 SPD is assigned to an intelligent input terminal you can switch between the speed control and position control modes during operation Only the four high order digits of data are displayed when the data e g position setting to be displayed consists of a large number of many digits Related code P012 Control pulse setting P023 Position loop gain setting P060 Multistage position setting 0 P061 Multistage position setting 1 P062 Multistage position setting 2 P063 Multistage position setting 3 P064 Multistage position setting 4 P065 Multistage position setting 5 P066 Multistage position setting 6 P067
374. or fire Be sure to close the terminal block cover before turning on the inverter power Do not open the terminal block cover while power is being supplied to the inverter or voltage remains inside Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock While power is supplied to the inverter do not touch the terminal of the inverter even if it has stopped Otherwise you run the risk of injury or fire If the retry mode has been selected the inverter will restart suddenly after a break in the tripping status Stay away from the machine controlled by the inverter when the inverter is under such circumstances Design the machine so that human safety can be ensured even when the inverter restarts suddenly Otherwise you run the risk of injury Do not select the retry mode for controlling an elevating or traveling device because output free running status occurs in retry mode Otherwise you run the risk of injury or damage to the machine controlled by the inverter If an operation command has been input to the inverter before a short term power failure the inverter may restart operation after the power recovery If such a restart may put persons in danger design a control circuit that disables the inverter from restarting after power recovery Otherwise you run the risk of injury The STOP key is effective only when its function is enabled by setting Prepare an
375. or or the reset button on the copy unit to switch to the normal setting screen Using the setting screen change the setting made in step 2 to that desired 4 115 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 4 1 Communication in ASCII mode 1 Communication protocol The communication between the inverter and external control system is based on the following protocol 1 External control system Inverter KG J Fire 2 Waiting time to be set with the digital operator 1 Frame that is sent from the external control system to the inverter 2 Frame that is sent from the inverter to the external control system The inverter sends frame 2 as a response always after receiving frame 1 The inverter does not actively output any frame to the external control system The following table lists the frames commands used for communication Commands Command Function Broadcast all Remarks stations Instructs the inverter to drive the motor for 00 P forward or reverse rotation or stop the motor 01 Sets the inverter output frequency 02 Turns specified intelligent input terminals on or off 03 Reads all monitored data 04 Reads the inverter status 05 Reads a specified setting item 06 Writes data to a specified setting item 07 Initializes specified settings This command can operate only Instructs the inverter to drive the motor for wher a oa 02 has been specified re forward or reverse rotation or stop the motor fo
376. orp IDidatavarnation with reference to the target value PO iwadi o O O L _ 0 10V la OIL 4 20mA O2L 10 10V PID deviation level setting C044 0 0 to 100 0 Level to determine the OD signal output Ot level or teedback C052 0 0 to 100 0 Level to determine the FBV signal output comparison signal Onlevel or feedback C053 0 0 to 100 0 Level to determine the FBV signal output comparison signal refer 4 2 12 Frequency operation function deviation PID feed forward selection 1 Basic configuration of PID control Feed Forward invalid 0 10V 0 20mA 10 10V Target value 0to10V Deviation Operation 4to20mA quantity REJ oa rmal contro gt gt Kp 1 TTo S 5 O ie the inverter Sensor Feedback F o x RN Transducer Kp Proportional gain Ti Integral time Td Derivative time s Operator Deviation 4 26 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 PID operation 1 P operation The proportional P operation stands for the operation in which the change in operation quantity is in proportion to the change in target value Change in steps Linear change Target value os ees Large Large UN A072 v Operation quantity Small 2 operation The integral I operation stands for the operation in which the operation quantity increases linearly over time Target value sma al Small A A072 Small a l A073 A073 H Vv Ny Operation quantity Large Large 3 D op
377. ortional Terminal selection P proportional Gain switching time H073 0 to 9999 ms Taper time at gain switching 4 2 55 P PI switching function PPI The P PI switching function allows you to switch the control compensation mode of the speed control system between the proportional integrated compensation and proportional compensation modes when the V F characteristic curve selection is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor To use this function assign function 43 PPI P PI mode selection to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 When the PPI terminal is turned off the proportional integrated compensation mode is selected When the PPI terminal is turned on the proportional compensation mode is selected If function 43 PPI P PI mode selection is not assigned to any intelligent input terminal the proportional integrated compensation mode is selected Data or range of data Sensorless vector control not available Para for A344 V F characteristic curve A044 A244 OHz range sensorless vector control not selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors A344 available for A344 V2 not available for A244 and A344 Terminal function C001 to C008 PPI P PI mode selection Related code A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI p
378. ositioning completed Orientation function 4 104 24 FA4 Set frequency overreached 2 Frequency arrival signals 4 62 25 FA5 Set frequency reached 2 26 OL2 Overload notice advance signal 2 Overload restriction overload notice advance signal 4 39 27 Odc Analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc Analog Ol disconnection detection Window comparators function 4 71 29 O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID feedback comparison PID function 4 26 32 _ NDc Communication line disconnection RS485 4 67 33 LOG1 Logical operation result 1 34 LOG2 Logical operation result 2 35 LOG3 Logical operation result 3 A 36 LOG4 Logical operation result 4 Logical p ration function vee 37 LOG5 Logical operation result 5 38 _ LOG6 Logical operation result 6 39 WAC Capacitor life warning Capacitor life warning 4 67 40 WAF Cooling fan speed drop Cooling fan speed drop 4 68 41 FR Starting contact signal Starting contact signal 4 68 42 OHF Heat sink overheat warning Heat sink overheat warning 4 68 43 LOC Low current indication signal Low current indication signal 4 69 44 M01 General output 1 45 M02 General output 2 46 _ M03 General output 6 Easy sequence function 47 MO04 General output 4 48 MO5 General output 5 49 MO6 General output 6 50 IRDY Inverter ready Inverter ready signal 4 69 51 FWR Forward rotation Forward rotation signal 4 69 52 RVR Reverse rotation Reverse rotation signal 4 70 4 60
379. otor position detected at power on is the origin lt 1 gt Low speed zero return ORL terminal C Output frequency 2 ose Low speed zero return speed P070 Origin Position lt 2 gt High speed zero return ORL terminal ANNEE Output frequency 2 High speed zero return A speed P071 3 Position 4 Low speed zero return speed P070 lt 3 gt High speed zero return 2 ORG terminal ORL terminal 2 Output frequency 3 Low speed zero return speed E ji P070 Origin Position GQ high speed zero return speed i P071 Z pulse 1 The inverter accelerates the motor for the specified acceleration time to the low speed zero return speed 2 The inverter runs the motor at the low speed zero return speed 3 The inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is input lt 1 gt The inverter accelerates the motor for the specified acceleration time to the high speed zero return speed lt 2 gt The inverter runs the motor at the high speed zero return speed lt 3 gt The inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on lt 4 gt The inverter runs the motor in the reverse direction at the low speed zero return speed lt 5 gt The inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is turned off lt 1 gt The inverter accelerates the motor for the specified acceleration time to the high speed zero return speed lt 2 gt
380. ow Range of data Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 2 ee 0 to 400 Hz Setting of frequency at each breakpoint 3 b016 b018 0 0 A Disabling the electronic thermal protection 0 1 to rated current A Free setting electronic thermal current 1 2 3 b020 Setting of the current at each breakpoint Output current A X1 0 ange of X0 8 setting b016 Inverter output 0 5 ap frequency H2 0 b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Example When the output frequency is equal Maximum frequency Hz to the setting of b017 Trip time s x setting of b018 rated current x 109 y setting of b018 rated current x 150 z setting of b018 rated current x 200 60 0 x y z 3 Thermal warning You can configure this function so that the inverter outputs a warning signal before the electronic thermal protection operates against motor overheat You can also set the threshold level to output a warning signal with the electronic thermal warning level setting C061 To output the warning signal assign function 13 THM to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm relay terminal C026 Electone ihermai aoe Disabling the warning output warning level setting 1 to 100 1 Setting of the threshold level to output the D thermal warning signal 1 Set the ratio of the warning level to the integrated value of
381. ow the inverter with covers and or parts blocking your view being removed Do not operate the inverter in the status shown in those drawings If you have removed the covers and or parts be sure to reinstall them in their original positions before starting operation and follow all instructions in this Instruction Manual when operating the inverter 1 Installation Install the inverter on a non flammable surface e g metal Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not place flammable materials near the installed inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire When carrying the inverter do not hold its top cover Otherwise you run the risk of injury by dropping the inverter Prevent foreign matter e g cut pieces of wire sputtering welding materials iron chips wire and dust from entering the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Install the inverter on a structure able to bear the weight specified in this Instruction Manual Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Install the inverter on a vertical wall that is free of vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or its parts are missing Otherwise you run the risk of injury Install the inverter in a well ventilated indoor site not exposed to direct sunlight Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to high temperature high humidity condensation dust
382. ow torque limiter level Powering Torque is insufficient at H020 H220 H030 Regenerating low frequencies several Hz b021 b041 to b044 frequency Low frequency M otor rotation Increase the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 operation inconsistent Motor runs backwards Set 01 enable on reverse run protection function staring MS short moment b046 ee Note 1 Always set the carrier frequency b083 to 2 1 kHz or more If the carrier frequency is less than 2 1 kHz the inverter cannot operate the motor normally Note 2 When driving a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than the inverter adjust the torque limit 6041 to b044 so that the value a calculated by the expression below does not exceed 200 Otherwise the motor may be burnt out a torque limit x inverter capacity motor capacity Example When the inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit value is calculated as follows based on the assumption that the value a should be 200 Torque limit 0041 to b044 a x motor capacity inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 W 0 75 kW 106 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 97 Sensorless vector 0 Hz domain control Related code A001 Frequency source setting A044 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors F001 Output frequency setting b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limit 1 to 4 H002
383. peed limit for torque controlled R W rd i s levee roA P040 nigh f RA lo to maximum frequency 162Bh_ Reserved J inaccessibe o i So oo i 162Ch Reserved inaccessible o S o o i i 162Dh Inaccessible _ _ o o i y 162Eh P044 0 01 sec 0 tripping 1 tripping after decelerating and Inverter action on DeviceNet comm stopping the motor 2 ignoring errors 3 teen error Poe stopping the motor after free running 4 R W decelerating and stopping the motor 1630h DeviceNet polled I O Output P046 RW 20 21 100 instance number 4631h DeviceNet polled I O Input instance P047 Rw 70 71 101 number W 0 tripping 1 tripping after decelerating and 1632h Inverter action on DeviceNet idle P048 R stopping the motor 2 ignoring errors 3 mode stopping the motor after free running 4 decelerating and stopping the motor 4 157 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Register Function name Function code R W Monitoring and setting items Data Register No resolution No 0 0 pole 1 2 poles 2 4 eae 3 6 poles 4 8 poles 5 10 poles 6 12 poles 7 14 poles 8 16 poles 9 18 Motor poles setting for RPM P049 poles 10 20 poles 11 22 poles 12 24 poles 13 26 poles 14 28 poles 15 30 poles 16 32 poles 17 34 ro ies 18 36 poles 19 38 poles 1634h to F 1639h Pulse train frequency scale P055 EN to 500 input frequency corresponding 9 4 fk
384. pending on motor capacity x x H224 Motor constant J 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 Depending on motor capacity x x H224 Motor constant J 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 Depending on motor capacity x x H030 Auto constant R1 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H230 Auto constant R1 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H231 Auto constant R2 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H231 Auto constant R2 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Q Depending on motor capacity x x H232 Auto constant L 1st motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH Depending on motor capacity x x 4 85 H232 Auto constant L 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH Depending on motor capacity x x H233 Auto constant lo 1st motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A Depending on motor capacity x x H233 Auto constant lo 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 A Depending on motor capacity x x H234 Auto constant J 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 Depending on motor capacity x x H234 Auto constant J 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 Depending on motor capacity x x 8 13 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Settin
385. peration from the digital operator To enable the emergency stop function set the slide lever of slide switch SW1 to ON With the factory setting slide switch SW1 is set to OFF to disable the function Note Before operating slide switch SW1 make sure that the input power supply is off Setting of slide switch SW 11 setting and function selection for intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 Intelligent input terminal 1 Intelligent input terminal 3 Setting of slide switch Jb NOINC selecti 7b NOINC selecti swt i a selection a selection Terminal 1 function C001 C011 1 Terminal 3 function C003 C013 1 2 SW 1 is OFF Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable arbitrarily 4 Emergency stop Fact Fact Fact Fact disabled perme 18 RS aC Ory 00 NO een 06 JG aC Ory 00 NO factory setting setting setting setting setting Automatic assignment of functions to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 and the terminal to which function 18 RS has been SW1 is ON assigned 3 Emergency stop Fixed function Fixed function Fixed function Fixed function enabled 5 cannot be 18 RS cannot be 00 NO cannot be 64 EMR cannot be 01 NC pees pres pial Soltis SW1 is ON after Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable arbitrarily 4 Selectable arbitrarily 4 setting to OFF once Setti
386. peration level at disconnection b070 b071 b072 Minimum limit level of window Min O 01 0 comparator b060 b063 b066 In 10 70 02 100 WCO WCOI WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Related code C130 Output 11 on delay time C131 Output 11 off delay time C132 Output 12 on delay time C133 Output 12 off delay time C134 Output 13 on delay time C135 Output 13 off delay time C136 Output 14 on delay time C137 Output 14 off delay time C138 Output 15 on delay time C139 Output 15 off delay time C140 Output RY on delay time C141 Output RY off delay time 4 2 78 Output signal delay hold function The output signal delay hold function allows you to set on delay and off delay times for each output terminal Since every output signal is turned on or off immediately when the relevant condition is satisfied signal chattering may occur if signal outputs conflict with each other Use this function to avoid such a problem by holding or delaying specific signal outputs To use this function set on delay and off delay times for individual output terminals a total of six terminals such as intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 and the alarm relay terminal Output terminal On delay time Off delay time Range of data C130 C132 C134 Output on C136 C138 C140 0 0 to 100 0 s Setting of on C131 C133 C135 Output off C137 C139 C141 0 0 to 100 0 s Setting of off 4 2 79 Input terminal res
387. ponse time The input terminal response time function allows you to specify a sampling time for each of intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 and the FW terminal You can use this function effectively to remove noise e g chattering Related code C160 to C167 Response time of intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 C168 FW terminal response time If chattering hinders constant input from an input terminal increase the response time setting for the input terminal Note that an increase in response time deteriorates the response The response time can be set in a range of about 2 to 400 ms corresponding to settings of 0 to 200 Range of data Response time of intelligent input terminals 1 to 8 C1S0 O 180 0 to 200 Variable in step of 1 4 2 80 External thermistor function TH The external thermistor function allows you to connect an external thermistor installed in external equipment e g motor to the inverter and use the thermistor for the thermal protection of the external equipment Connect the external thermistor to control circuit terminals TH and CM1 Make the functional settings according to the thermistor specifications as described below When using this function the wiring distance between the inverter and motor must be 20 m or less Since the thermistor current is weak isolate the thermistor wiring to the inverter from other wirings appropriately to prevent the thermistor signal from being aff
388. program lamp f 2 ae ait EN This lamp starts blinking to indicate a warning when the set value is invalid Monitor Displays a frequency output current or set value Indicates the type of value and units displayed on the monitor Hz frequency V voltage A current kW electric power and percentage Lights up when the inverter is ready to respond to the RUN key RUN key enable LED When this lamp is on you can start the inverter with the RUN key on the digital operator Starts the inverter to run the motor This key is effective only when the operating device is Monitor lamps the digital operator To use this key confirm that the operating device indicator lamp is on Decelerates and stops the motor or resets the inverter from alarm status Makes the inverter enter the monitor function or extended function mode STR storage key Stores each set value Always press this key after changing a set value Switches the inverter operation mode among monitor function and extended function 1 up or 2 down key modes or increases or decreases the value set on the monitor for a function Chapter 3 Operation 3 2 2 Code display system and key operations This section describes typical examples of digital operator operation in basic and full display modes and an example of special digital operator operation in extended function mode U The initial display on the monitor screen after power on depe
389. pter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 14 Multistage position switching function CP1 CP2 CP3 When functions 66 CP1 to 68 CP3 are assigned to terminal 1 function C001 to terminal 8 function C008 you can select a position setting from multistage positions 0 to 7 Use multistage position settings 0 to 7 P060 to P067 for the position settings If no position settings are assigned to terminals multistage position setting 0 P060 is assumed Position setting CP3 CP2 CP1 Multistage position setting 0 Multistage position setting 1 Multistage position setting 2 Multistage position setting 3 Multistage position setting 4 Multistage position setting 5 Multistage position setting 6 j jojojojo ojoj jojo oj joj oj o You can specify a delay to be applied at multistage position setting input until the relevant terminal input is determined Use this specification to prevent the application of fluctuating terminal input before it is determined You can adjust the determination time with the multistage speed position determination time setting C169 The input data is finally determined when the terminal input becomes stable after the delay set as C169 Note that a long determination time deteriorates the input terminal response Determination time C169 0 time C169 Determination time C169 specified Position command CP1 CP2 CP3 Determin
390. ptional board 1 Position to mount optional board 2 Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals Backing plate Exterior view of inverter with front and terminal block covers removed Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring SSS EE ee SS ss This chapter describes how to install the inverter and the wiring of main circuit and control signal terminals with typical examples of wiring 2 2 Wiring ee e s ee ee 2 s 5 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 Installation J N CAUTION Install the inverter on a non flammable surface e g metal Otherwise you run the risk of fire Do not place flammable materials near the installed inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire When carrying the inverter do not hold its top cover Otherwise you run the risk of injury by dropping the inverter Prevent foreign matter e g cut pieces of wire sputtering welding materials iron chips wire and dust from entering the inverter Otherwise you run the risk of fire Install the inverter on a structure able to bear the weight specified in this Instruction Manual Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Install the inverter on a vertical wall that is free of vibrations Otherwise you run the risk of injury due to the inverter falling Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or its parts are missing Otherwise you run the risk of injury Install the inverter in a well
391. put 10 operation result output 0 disabling 01 enabling ee R W _ 0 to 1000 disabled 1 O input 2 Ol input 3 O2 input 1268h_ Reserved S R W Inaccessible P il R W 0 always on 1 always off 2 off during deceleration __ 00 V class 0 200 1 215 2 220 3 230 4 240 126Ah_ AVR voltage select A082 R W 400 V class 5 380 6 400 7 415 8 440 9 460 10 480 126Bh_ Reserved R W Inaccessible ee 126Ch__ Reserved R W Inaccessible a 126Dh Operation mode selection A085 p w 0 normal operation 1 energy saving operation 2 fuzzy operation 126Eh_ Energy saving mode tuning A086 R W_ 0 to 1000 0 1 a i 126Fh to 7 1274h Acceleration 2 time A092 high RW to 360000 0 01 sec 1275h setting A092 low s 0 01 sec 1276h Deceleration 2 time A093 high 1277h setting A093 low Select method to switch to PONA Pao 1278h Acc2 Dec2 profile A094 Rw fo switching by 2CH terminal 1 switching by setting La 1279h__ Acc1 to Acc2 frequency A095 high RW fo to 40000 0 01 Hz transition point A095 low 127Bh_ Dec1 to Dec2 frequency A096 high RW Jo to 40000 0 01 Hz 127Ch _ transition point A096 low A Acceleration curve 0 linear 1 S curve 2 U curve 3 inverted U 127Eh Deceleration curve setting A098 Rew 0 near 1 S curve 2 U curve 3 inverted U curve 4 EL S curve a 127Fh__ Reserved Inaccessibl
392. put enabled for function A071 You can disable the PID function with an external signal during the PID operation For this purpose assign function 23 PID terminal disabling PID operation to an intelligent input terminal Turning the PID terminal on disables the PID function and makes the inverter perform the normal output With the PID function you can limit the PID output according to various conditions Refer to maximum frequency 4 2 10 frequency limiter 4 2 20 PID rariation range A078 Related code A001 Frequency source setting A005 AT selection A006 O02 selection A071 PID Function Enable A072 PID proportional gain A073 PID integral time constant A074 PID derivative gain A075 PV scale conversion A076 PV source setting A077 Output of inverted PID deviation A078 PID variation range A079 PID feed forward selection d004 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C044 PID deviation level setting C052 Off level of feedback comparison signal C053 Onlevel of feedback comparison signal 00 Disabling the PID operation _ PID Function Enable Kore EE Sai for unit conversion of PID feedback rE el PV source setting RS485 communication 00 Deina he weied sat Output of inverted PID 01 Enabling the inverted output deviation polarity inverted PID variation range A078 0 0 to 100 0 Range
393. r C046 FA4 0042 0045 0043 0046 yy fon 1 of maximum frequency V Toff foff 2 of maximum frequency Output frequency fon J FA2 FA5 3 Signal output only when the set frequency is reached 06 FA3 or 25 FA5 The inverter outputs the signal only when the output frequency reaches the frequency specified by a frequency setting C042 or C043 FA3 or C045 or C046 FA5 i natet Y __ 6043 0046 fon 1 of maximum frequency a fort foff 2 of maximum frequency Output frequency C042 CO45 fon FA3 FAS Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 62 Running time over and power on time over signals RNT and ONT Related code b034 Run power on warning time C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function d016 Cumulative operation RUN time monitoring d017 Cumulative power on time monitoring 0 Disabling the signal output x Setting in units of 10 hours Setting in units of 100 hours range 100 000 to 655 300 hours The inverter outputs the operation time over RNT signal or the plug in time over ONT signal when the time specified as the run power on warning time b034 is exceeded Run power on warning time 1 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1 Operation time over RNT signal To use this signal function assign function 11 RNT to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 and the alarm re
394. r DC reactor noise filter operator cables Harmonic wave suppressor unit components LCR filter analog operation panel regenerative braking unit controllers for various applications Note 1 The vibration tolerance was tested in compliance with JIS C0040 1999 Note 2 The insulation distance complies with the UL and CE standards Chapter 7 Specifications 7 2 External dimensions SJ700 055 to110LFF2 LFUF2 HFF2 HFEF2 HFUF2 lt lt C om a E a 3 Cable hole 33 x28 fC J eae SN J700 150 to 220 LFF2 LFUF2 HFF2 HFEF2 HFUF2 _ 1 T 1 1 om J 0 Brad r Y y a J p 3 Cable hole 42 x 42 5 vol Chapter 7 Specifications J700 300 LFF2 LFUF2 HFF2 HFEF2 HFUF2 AO e e g 2 J ag 5 Cable hole 25 OO 066 G YY Y WY WY J700 370 450 LFF2 LFUF2 HFF2 HFEF2 HFUF2 550 HFF2 HFEF2 HFUF2
395. r the initialization moge D084 i Otherwise only the trip history data is cleared 09 Checks whether set data can be stored in the EEPROM 0A Stores set data in the EEPROM 0B Recalculates the constants set in the inverter 4 116 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions The commands are described below i 00 command This command instructs the inverter to drive the motor for forward or reverse rotation or stop the motor To use this command set A002 to 03 RS485 Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No nee al of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 00 Data Data to be transmitted 1 byte See Note 1 XOR of the items from Station No to Data PoE Blockicheckieade 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 1 Stop command Forward rotation command s O Reverse rotation command gt S O Example When sending a forward rotation command to the inverter with station No 01 STX 01 00 1 BCC CR __Conversion into ASCII format Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 02130 31 30 30 31 33 30 0D ii 01 command This command set
396. r torque is 100 Since this function estimates the output torque from the motor current the accuracy of monitoring is about 20 when the inverter drives a motor that has the same output ratings as the inverter Related code A044 A244 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors C027 FM siginal selection C028 AM siginal selection C029 AMI siginal selection H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motor H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors Data or range of data Description 03 Sensorless vector control VIF characteristic curve A044 A244 04 OHz range Sensorless vector control selection 05 Vector control with sensor not available for A244 FM siginal selection C027 02 Output torque AM siginal selection C028 AMI siginal selection C029 11 Output torque signed only for C028 Motor capacity selection H003 H203 0 20 to 75 0 kW Motor pole selection H004 H204 2 4 6 8 or 10 poles 4 2 99 Forcing function FOC The forcing function allows you to apply an exciting current via an input terminal to the inverter to pre build magnetic flux when 03 sensorless vector control 04 OHz range sensorless vector control or 05 vector control with sensor is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 To use this function assign function 55 FOC to an intelligent input terminal After the FOC function is assigned the inverter will accept operation commands only w
397. r with other s to a control system Communication data length C073 selection Pp ts TERRE 00 No parity Communication parity C074 Even parity selection Odd parity Communication stop bit ae Tripping 01 Tripping after decelerating and stopping Selection of operation after the motor communication error Ignoring the errors Stopping the motor after free running Decelerating and stopping the motor Communication trip limit time C077 0 00 to 99 99 s Limit length of time to determine setting communication train disconnection Communication wait time C078 0 to 1000 ms Time to wait until the inverter returns a response Communication mode C079 o0 OE ASCII mode selection Modbus RTU mode 4 114 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 3 Communication test mode Use the communication test mode to check the hardware of the R8485 communication train Procedure for communication test 1 Remove all cables from the TM2 terminal block to perform a loopback test 2 Make the following setting with the digital operator of the inverter Specify 02 loopback test for the communication speed selection C071 3 Turn the inverter power off once and then turn it back on whereupon the communication test begins 4 After the test is completed the inverter displays one of the following When the communication is normal lle _ When the communication train is abnormal nf od 5 Press the STOP RESET key of the digital operat
398. range of input Connect to an external thermistor to make the inverter trip ifan abnormal voltages temperature is detected 0 to 8 VDC The CM1 terminal serves as the common terminal for this terminal Input circuit External Recommended thermistor properties thermistor input Allowable rated power 100 mW or more Impedance at temperature error 3kQ TH The impedance to detect temperature errors can be adjusted within the range 0Q to 9 9990 Function selection and logic switching Contact input Intelligent output 2 5 3 3 fo ke O 2 7 oO 5 a 5 s C a Intelligent relay output Relay contact output Status and alarm Analog input Thermistor CM1 3 Explanation of switch settings The internal slide switch SW1 is used to enable or disable the emergency stop function the function is disabled by factory setting For the location of the slide switch see page 2 9 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring About the emergency stop function disabled by the factory setting The emergency stop function shuts off the inverter output i e stops the switching operation of the main circuit elements in response to a command from a hardware circuit via an intelligent input terminal without the operation by internal CPU software Note The emergency stop function does not electrically shut off the inverter but merely stops the switching operation of the main circuit elements Ther
399. re than the es iis eal upper A061 A261 frequency lower limit setting up to the Sea tee limitotthe 9 maximum frequency Hz P q y 0 00 or a frequency not less than the me meny lower A062 A262 starting frequency up to the frequency See ates limit of the 9 upper limit setting Hz p q y 1 When the O L or OI L terminal is used Output frequency Hz Related code A061 A261 Frequency upper limit setting 1st 2nd motors A062 A262 Frequency lower limit setting 1st 2nd motors If 0 V or 4 mAis input as the frequency command when a frequency lower limit has been set for the frequency lower limit setting A062 the inverter will output the set frequency Maximum frequency A004 A204 A061 A062 Frequency command ov 10 4 mA 20 2 When the O2 L terminal is used Maximum frequency A004 A204 LOA Reverse rotation Forward rotation 10 V p Maximum frequency A004 A204 If the frequency lower limit is used with the frequency command input via the O2 L terminal the motor speed with 0 V input will be fixed to the frequency setting of the frequency lower limit A062 for forward rotation or the frequency setting of the frequency lower limit A062 for reverse rotation as shown below a When operation commands are input via the control circuit terminal block A002 01 Terminal Motor speed with 0 V input via O2 terminal FW ON Frequency setting by A062 for forward rotation RV ON Frequency setti
400. requency scale i ae P056 Time constant of pulse string frequency filter pulse train input via the SAP or SAN terminal as a frequency p057 Pulse string frequency bias command or PID feedback data in each control mode You P058 Pulse string frequency limit can use this function in every control mode A002 Frequency sourc setting A076 PV source setting Specify the input frequency corresponding to the allowable A141 Operation target frequency selection 1 maximum frequency as the pulse train frequency scale A142 Operation target frequency selection 2 P055 You cannot use the start end frequency setting function for external analog input together with this function To limit the input frequency specify the desired values for the pulse train frequency bias P057 and pulse train frequency limit P058 Related code Data or range of data Specification of the input frequency Pulse train frequency scale P055 1 0 to 50 0 kHz corresponding to the maximum allowable frequency Time constant of pulse train P056 0 01 to 2 00 s Setting of the filter time constant for frequency filter the ee train input Pulse train frequency bias P057 100 to 100 Pulse train frequency limit P058 0 to 100 Frequency source setting A001 o6 ssid PV source setting A076 selection 1 pulse train selection 2 Bias limitation Frequency requency measurement command Maximum frequency F004 Frequency
401. retry selection b008 Starting the motor with a matching frequency at retry 03 The inverter trips after decelerating and stopping the motor Restarting the motor with an input frequency at retry Retrying the motor operation up to 16 times after Selection of retry count b009 undervoltage after undervoltage 01 Retrying the motor operation an unlimited number of times after undervoltage Selection of retry count gt Number of retries to be made after the occurrence of after overvoltage or b010 1 to 3 times i A svercurrent overvoltage or overcurrent 5 Retry wait time anter b011 0 3 to 100 s Time to wait until restarting the motor overvoltage or overcurrent l 00 Frequency set when the inverter output has been shut off Active frequency matching b030 Maximum frequency restart frequency select Newly set frequency Active frequency matchin 0 20 X rated q y 9 b028 current to 2 00 x Current limit for restarting with active matching frequency scan start frequency rated current Active frequency matching Duration of frequency lowering when restarting with active scan time constant b029 0 10 to 30 00 s matching frequency 4 33 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 1 2 3 4 D 6 7 If the inverter trips because of overvoltage or overcurrent while decelerating the motor the inverter will display error code E16 instantaneous power failure and the motor will start free running If this error occ
402. ription The inverter trips E41 after reception timeout The inverter decelerates and stops the motor and then trips E41 after reception timeout The inverter ignores the error without tripping and alarm output The inverter stops the motor after free running without tripping and alarm output after reception timeout The inverter decelerates and stops the motor without tripping and alarm output after reception timeout Limit time to determine the reception timeout Time to wait until the inverter starts sending a response after reception of a query excluding the silent interval Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions The formats of the query and response frames are described below Message configuration Query iii Header silent interval Error check code Trailer silent interval Slave address The slave address is a number 1 to 32 that is assigned to the inverter slave beforehand A query is received by the inverter having the same slave address as that specified in the query The query with the slave address set to 0 is broadcasted to all the connected inverters With a broadcast query the master system can neither read inverter data nor perform a loopback test Data The data contains a functional instruction The SJ700 series inverter supports the following Modbus data format Coil data 1 bit binary data that can be referenced and changed Register data 16 bit data that can be referenced and change
403. rol circuit terminal block board from the SJ300 series 1 Remove two fixing screws from the control circuit terminal block board 2 Pull the control circuit terminal block board straight toward you to remove it from the SJ300 series Precautions Pull out the board slowly Be careful not to bend the connector pins Be careful not to break the board guide pins SJ700 series Mounting the removed control circuit terminal block board in the SJ700 series 3 Remove the original control circuit terminal block board from the SJ700 series beforehand as instructed in steps 1 and 2 4 Insert the control circuit terminal block board removed from the SJ300 series straight into the slot along the board guide pins and connector pins until it touches the fixing screw seats Precautions Push in the board slowly Be careful not to bend the connector pins Be careful not to break the board guide pins 5 Secure the control circuit terminal block board with two fixing screws Precaution Be sure to fix the board with the two fixing screws Appendix 2 Copying the parameter settings If you use an optional remote operator SRW OJ or SRW OEX you can copy import the parameter settings from the SJ300 series into the SJ700 series Note however that you cannot copy the parameter settings from the SJ700 series to the SJ300 series because the SJ700 series has many new functions and additional parameters Precaution Copying of th
404. roportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors Motor speed constant 1st 2nd PI proportional gain H050 H250 0 0 to 999 9 1000 eee PI integral gain H051 H251 0 0 to 999 9 1000 W o SSS P proportional gain H052 H252 0 001 to 10 00 oOo O OE Terminal selection PI Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions P control mode x 4 i f i PI control mode The speed control normally incorporates the proportional integrated compensation PI control and the motor speed is controlled so that Torque the difference between the frequency specified by the frequency command and the actual motor speed is zero However a specific operation mode called drooping operation in which one load is driven by multiple motors sometimes requires the proportional control P control To enable the proportional P control mode 100 er assign function 43 P PI switching function to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 and turn on the intelligent input terminal For the proportional control set the value of the P control proportional gain H052 as the KPP value The following formula generally represents the relation between the KPP value and momentary speed variation 10 Set value of KPP A Rotation speed Momentary speed variation The following formula generally represents the relation between the mome
405. ror 2 O 004Ch Framingerror Cd R 1 Erordetected 0 No error 2 004Dh_ Parity error R T Erordetected 0 No error 2 O 004Eh Sum check error R Ct Erordetected 0 No error 2 O 004Fh_ reserved S eS ef 0050h WCO window comparator O R 1t ONOFF S 0051h WCO window comparator OI R 1 ON 0 FF S e _0052h__ WCO window comparator 02 R 1 ON OFF 1 2 Normally this coil is turned on when the corresponding intelligent input terminal on the control circuit terminal block is turned on or the coil itself is set to on In this regard the operation of the intelligent input terminal has priority over the operation of the coil If disconnection of the communication train has disabled the master system from turning off the coil turn the corresponding intelligent input terminal on the control circuit block on and off This operation turns off the coil Communication error data is retained until an error reset command is input The data can be reset during the inverter operation 4 140 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions ii List of registers frequency settings and trip monitoring Register Function name tunetion R W Monitoring and setting items Data No code resolution 0001h F001 high 0 to 40000 valid when A001 03 0002h Frequency source setting F001 low 0 01 Hz 0 Initial status 1 Waiting for Vdc establishment 2 Stopping 3 Running 4 Free run stop FRS 0003h Inver
406. rrent d002 and DC voltage d102 Chapter 3 Operation 3 phase power supply rege OQO PDL D r actor Digital operator Braking unit Operating box OPE 4MJ2 OPE 8MJ2 Type D grounding 200 V class model 4 Type C grounding 400 V class model Operating procedure 1 Confirm that all wirings are correct 2 Turn on the earth leakage breaker ELB to supply power to the inverter The POWER lamp red LED of the digital operator goes on 3 Select the control circuit terminal block as the device to input frequency setting commands by the frequency source setting function Display the function code A001 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a 2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 01 and then press the key once to specify the control circuit terminal block as the device to input frequency setting commands The display reverts to A001 4 Select the control circuit terminal block as the device to input operation commands by the run command source setting function Display the function code A002 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows a 2 digit numeric value Use the and or key to change the displayed numeric value to 01 and then press the key once to specify the digital operator as the device to input operation commands The display reverts to A002
407. rs A043 A243 A343 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 1st 2nd 3rd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors Output voltage 100 A042 A242 A342 A043 A243 A343 Base frequency Output 100 frequency Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Automatic torque boost When automatic torque boost data 01 is selected by the torque boost selection A041 A241 the inverter automatically adjusts the output frequency and voltage according to the load on the motor During actual operation the automatic torque boost is usually combined with the manual torque boost When you select the automatic torque boost adjust the settings of the motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole selection H004 H204 according to the motor to be driven If the inverter trips due to overcurrent during motor deceleration set the AVR function select A081 to always enable the AVR function data 00 If you cannot obtain the desired operation characteristic by using the automatic torque boost make the following adjustments Symptom Adjustment method step by step 2 Increase the slippage compensation gain for automatic torque boost step by step 3 Increase the voltage compensation gain for automatic torque boost step by step 4 Reduce the carrier frequency setting Increase the slippage compensation gain for the is applied to the motor automatic
408. rter and Converter Circuits You can check the quality of the inverter and converter circuits by using a tester Preparation 1 Remove the external power supply cables from terminals R T and T the motor cables from terminals U V and W and the regenerative braking resistor cables from terminals P and RB 2 Prepare a tester Use the 1Q measuring range Checking method Measure the current conduction at each of the inverter s main circuit terminals R S T U V W RB P and N while switching the tester polarity alternately Note 1 Before checking the circuits measure the voltage across terminals P and N with the tester in DC voltage range mode to confirm that the smoothing capacitor has fully discharged electricity Note 2 When the measured terminal is nonconductive the tester reads a nearly infinite resistance The tester may not read the infinite resistance if the measured terminal flows a current momentarily under the influence of the smoothing capacitor When the measured terminal is conductive the tester reading is several ohms to several tens of ohms The measured values may vary slightly depending on the types of circuit devices and tester However if the values measured at the terminals are almost the same the inverter and converter circuits have adequate quality Note 3 Only inverter models with capacity of 22 kW or less have the BRD circuit Tester polarity red black R PD Nonconductive Conducti
409. rter output gain for the external meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals Range of data Setting of the gain for AM monitoring C106 50 to 200 Setting of the gain for AM monitoring Setting of the offset for AM monitoring C109 O to 100 Setting of the offset for AM monitoring Setting of the gain for AMI monitoring C107 50 to 200 Setting of the gain for AMI monitoring Setting of the offset for AMI monitoring C110 O to 100 Setting of the offset for AMI monitoring Note The offset data is in percentage Example When the current range of AMI terminal output is 4 to 20 mA default the offset of 4 mA is 20 4 74 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 83 Initialization setting The initialization function allows you to initialize the adjusted settings on the inverter to restore the factory settings You can also clear the trip history data alone The settings of initialization are described below The settings of P100 to P131 running time data and power on time data cannot be cleared 00 Clearing on the trip history data parameters or trip The factory settings are restored history settings Saun asio 00 Defaults intended for Japan aE Defaults intended for Europe Defaults intended for the U S A Related code b084 Initialization mode parameters or trip history b085 Country code for initialization Initializing procedure Adjust the above settings as required a
410. s 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes OA XOR of the items from Station No to Data PSC Block eheckicode 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 125 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions xii OB command This command recalculates the constants set in the inverter This command must be issued when the base frequency or the setting of parameter H has been changed for the RS485 communication Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 0B XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 126 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 Positive and negative responses i Positive response Response frame Frame format STX Station No ACK BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start o
411. s into the SJ700 series Note however that the backing plate is incompatible Procedure for replacing the control circuit terminal block board As shown in the figure on the right the fixing screw locations on the control circuit terminal block board are common to the SJ300 and SJ700 series To remove and install the control circuit terminal block board follow the steps 1 to 5 described below Precautions Control circuit terminal block board mounted in the SJ300 SJ700 series front view Fixing screw M3 x 2 Board guide pin x 2 Board guide pin Board guide pin Fixing screw Connector ae 60 poles Fixing screw Use care to prevent the control circuit terminal block board from twisting when removing or mounting it Otherwise the board guide pins and connector pins may be damaged Do not pull the cables connected to the control circuit terminal block board when you remove the board from the SJ300 series Do not forcibly insert the board into the mounting slot Make sure that the board is correctly fitted onto the board guide pins and the connectors are correctly fitted to each other SJ300 series Removing the cont
412. s power failure or tripping The inverter displays the code shown on the right when the inverter power is turned off When an operation direction has been restricted by the setting of b035 the inverter will display the error code shown on the right if the operation command specifying the restricted operation direction is input Waiting for retry Restricted operation command UV WAIT R ERROR COMM lt 1 R ERROR COMM lt 2 RESTART ADJUST RUN CMD DISABLE Check whether the option board is mounted correctly Check the board mounting Check whether the option board is used correctly Check the instruction manual for the option board Check whether the power supply voltage has fallen Refer to the instruction manual for the SJ FB SJ DG or SJ DN Recover the power supply Check the MCB and magnetic contactors for poor contacts Replace the MCB and magnetic contactors Check whether the voltage across the P and N terminals is normal Check the voltage across the P and N terminals Check whether the relay plug is fitted correctly Check the relay plug for connection Check whether the digital operator is connected correctly Check the digital operator for connection Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 1 2 Option boards error codes When an option board is mounted in the optional port 1 located near the operator connector the error co
413. s selection cc ccc eee eee eens 4 88 4 2 96 Sensorless vector control A001 A044 F001 b040 to b044 H002 to H005 H020 to H024 HO50 to H052 D aT RE EEE RN ORE ROR EOE E A WETE E OO A aw aa REI pe OS we 4 89 4 2 97 Sensorless vector 0 Hz domain control A001 A044 F001 b040 to b044 H002 to H005 HO20to H024 H050 to H052 H060 H061 ss sss ttt 4 90 4 2 98 Torque monitoring function A044 C027 to C029 H003 H004 gt gt 5555sssssss s gt 4 91 4 2 99 Forcing function FOC A044 C001 to C008 setts ttt ttt ttt treet eres 4 91 4 2 100 Torque limitation function A044 b040 to b044 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 4 92 4 2 101 Reverse Run protection function A044 b046 gt 55 sss t etter teers 4 93 4 2 102 Torque LAD stop function A044 b040 to b045 sss sce s ssc c ters r tees eens 4 94 4 2 103 High torque multi motor operation A044 F001 b040 to b044 H002 to H005 H020 to H024 H050 to H052 n u noson ssssnosusnusosnssususnuosusnusnsunsnsnn 4 94 4 2 104 Easy sequence function A017 P100 to P131 sss srt ttt ttre 4 95 4 3 Functions Available When the Feedback Option Board SJ FB Is Mounted 5555 ssss7 gt 4 96 4 3 1 Functions requiring the SJ FB Se 4 96 4 3 2 V2 control pulse setting Ree ian Ser Say a tat Te RR ic mI set ao ya Ses REI Rae RR eee ae Se SRNR ee an Ree 4 2 96 4 3 3 Vector control with encoder feedback 5rtsssrsrsrrersereresrerererreresrerrn 4 97 4 3 4 Torque biasing function
414. s specified for the alarm code output C062 see Section 4 2 65 the alarm code output is assigned to output terminals 11 to 13 or output terminals 11 to 14 ACO to AC3 respectively Subsequently the settings of C021 to C024 are invalidated Related code C021 to C025 Terminal 11 to 15 functions C026 Alarm relay terminal function Data Description Reference item Page 00 IRUN Running signal Running signal RUN 4 62 01 FA1 Constant speed reached Frequency arrival signals 4 62 02 FA2 Set frequency overreached 03 JOL Overload notice advance signal 1 Overload restriction overload notice advance signal 4 40 04 OD Output deviation for PID control PID function 4 26 05 JAL Alarm signal Protective functions 06 FA3 Set frequency reached Frequency arrival signals 4 62 07 OTQ Over torque Over torque signal 4 65 a Power talus Instantaneous power failure undervoltage 4 35 10 TRQ Torque limited Torque limitation function 4 92 11 RNT Operation time over Operation time over signal 4 64 12 JONT Plug in time over Plug in time over signal 4 64 13 THM Thermal alarm signal Electronic thermal protection 4 37 2 ERK are release Brake control function 4 81 21 ZS 0 Hz detection signal 0 Hz detection signal 4 64 22 DSE Speed deviation maximum V2 control mode selection function 4 96 23 POK P
415. s the inverter output frequency To use this command set A001 to 03 RS485 Transmission frame Frame format Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No eee of controltarget 2 bytes 01 to 32 or FF broadcast to all stations Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 01 Data Data to be sent decimal ASCII 6 bytes See Note 2 code XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 2 For example to set the output frequency of the inverter with station No 01 to 5 Hz the data is as follows p STX 01 01 000500 BCC CR L eson into ASO omat _ 92 30 31 30 31130 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D Note 3 The data indicates a value 100 times as large as the actual frequency value to be set Example 5 Hz 500 000500 Conversion into ASCII format 30 30 30 35 30 30 Note 4 When using the data as the feedback data for PID control set the most significant byte to 1 Example 5 gt 500 100500 Conversion into ASCII format 31 30 30 35 30 30 Response frame Positive response See Item 2 i of this section Negative response See Item 2 ii of this section 4 117 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iii 02 12 command This command turns the specified intelligent input terminals on or off Transmiss
416. se frequency or 2 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly 3 the restart frequency threshold b007 is set and the detected frequency is lower than that _t___t___ FW Starting with matching Free running frequency Motor speed Note The reset operation clears the inverter s internal counters that are used for protective functions Therefore if you intend to use an intelligent input terminal to shut off the inverter output use the free run stop FRS terminal Example 4 Restarting with active matching frequency After the retry wait time b003 the inverter restarts the motor with the a e fequency sot as 0090 The inerte subsequently decelerates the motor according to the setting of b029 RS while maintaining the output current B at the level specified for b029 When the output voltage matches Aa Deceleration according to the frequency the inverter the setting of b029 re accelerates the motor up to the Cs frequency that was set when the Output current Inverter output frequency inverter shut off the output to the A Frequency selected as the motor before the restart Occurrence of trip i setting of b030 If the inverter trips because of an overcurrent when it restarts the Motor speed motor with input frequency reduce 003 the setting of b028 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 50 Unattended start protection USP function Related code The
417. se is slow even after the P gain is increased Increase the D gain A074 If the feedback data becomes fluctuant and unsteady when the P gain is increased Reduce the D gain A074 9 Maximum PID deviation output OD You can set the PID deviation level C044 for PID control When the PID deviation exceeds the level set as the level C044 the signal is output to an intelligent output terminal A value from 0 to 100 can be set as the level C044 The range of values corresponds to the range of target values from 0 to the maximum To use this output function assign function 04 OD to one of the terminal functions C021 to C025 or the alarm relay terminal function C026 10 Feedback comparison signal A feedback comparison signal can be output to an intelligent output terminal when the PID feedback data exceeds the specified range To use this signal output function assign function 31 FBV to one of the terminal functions C021 to C025 or the alarm relay terminal function C026 C052 off level PID feedback C053 on level Time Fw ON OFF FBv ON l OFF 11 Process variable PV PID feedback monitoring d004 You can monitor the PID feedback data on the inverter When you set a PV scale conversion with function A075 the value to be displayed as the monitored data can be the product of the feedback data and the scale Monitored value feedback data x PV scale conversion A075
418. selection When using this function observe the following precautions 1 If you use the inverter to drive a motor of which the capacity is two classes lower than the maximum applicable capacity of the inverter you may not be able to obtain adequate motor characteristics 2 If you cannot obtain the desired characteristics from the motor driven under the sensorless vector control readjust the motor constants according to the symptom as described in the table below ee Symptom Adjustment method Adjustment item Momentary speed Increase the motor constant R2 step by step from the H021 H221 H031 variation is negative set value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value Momentary speed Reduce the motor constant R2 step by step from the set H021 H221 H031 variation is positive value down to 0 8 times as high as the set value Increase the motor constant R1 step by step from the set value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value Increase the motor constant lo step by step from the set H023 H223 H033 value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value Starting The motor generates an Reduce the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 impact when it starts Deceleratin The motor runs Reduce the speed response setting H005 H205 9 unsteadily Reduce the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 Torque is insufficient Torque limited during torque limited Reduce the overload restriction level to lower than the operation at a l
419. selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O S C146 Logical output signal 2 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O oO S x y E C147 Logical output signal 2 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o 5 selection 3 C148 Logical output signal 3 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O E C149 Logical output signal 3 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O c150 Logical output signal 3 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o selection C151 Logical output signal 4 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O 4 66 C152 Logical output signal 4 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 x O c153 Logical output signal 4 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o selection C154 Logical output signal 5 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O C155 Logical output signal 5 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O C156 Logical output signal 5 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o selection C157 Logical output signal 6 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O C158 Logical output signal 6 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 excep
420. setting P011 1024 Numerator of the motor gear ratio P028 10 Denominator of the motor gear ratio P029 100 In this case the periphery of the encoder shaft is divided into 4 096 sections to determine the points for home search Note that the conceptual layout of the home search stop position is inverted from that shown in Figure 7 2 4 3 9 Position biasing function Raiated code The position biasing function allows you to make the position P024 Position bias quantity command bias during operation in pulse train position control mode This function adds the specified number of pulses to the variation of position data every 2 ms Use this function to adjust the phase of the synchronization point during synchronous operation Specify the quantity to be added as the position bias quantity P024 4 3 10 Speed biasing function This function allows you to make the speed command bias during operation in pulse train position control mode Specify the bias quantity for the additional frequency setting A145 and select a sign through additional frequency sign selection A146 Assign function 50 ADD to an intelligent input terminal The speed command is biased by the specified quantity while the ADD terminal is on Speed biasing Related code A145 Additional frequency setting A146 Additional frequency sign selection Position biasing ol terminal Variation of position command Variation of position
421. sible oo 4 162 Chapter 5 Error Codes BEE This chapter describes the error codes of the inverter error indications by the functions and troubleshooting methods 5 1 Error Codes and Troubleshooting 17717 5 1 5 2 Warning Codes Raine ain oie WANA T ei osntaialagin wa eS Nene ei asiete sas 5 10 Chapter 5 Error Codes 5 1 Error Codes and Troubleshooting 5 1 1 Error Codes If the motor is constrained Check whether the load has fluctuated sharply or suddenly accelerated During Eliminate the load fluctuation or decelerated a high constant Check for the short circuit of output current will flow in the speed connections inverter and the inverter Spera Check the output cables may fail To avoid this P Check for the ground fault problem the inverter Check the output cables and motor shuts off its output and Check whether the inverter has decelerated the displays the error code Pt motor quickly OWT ON the right when it deceleration E Ue QC Decel oe Increase the deceleration time ae a earen higrier Check whether the inverter has accelerated the than a specified level motor quickly This protective function Increase the acceleration time uses a DC current During rr Check whether the motor has been locked detector CT to detect acceleration Li OC Accel Check the motor and wiring overcurrent Check whether the torque boost current has When a current as high as been set too high about 220 of the Re
422. sition setting 2 e eh side to forward side 0 B O P063 Multistage position setting 3 ieee eae side to forward side 0 O O P064 Multistage position setting 4 freee ps la eats side to forward side 0 D W Po65 Multistage position setting 5 Position setting range reverse side to forward side 0 o o S upper 4 digits including 5 Po66 Multistage position setting 6 Position Soang range reverse side to forward side 0 o o 3 upper 4 digits including 4 106 8 ae P067 Multistage position setting 7 Position setting range reverse side to forward side 0 o o 5 upper 4 digits including 8 P068 Zero return mode selection 00 Low 01 Hi1 00 Hi2 00 O O T P069 Zero return direction selection 00 FW 01 RV 00 O O P070 Low speed zero return frequency 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 00 O O po7z4 High speed Zero retUM 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to Maximum frequency setting 1 motor Hz 0 00 O O frequency Position range specification 0 to 268435455 when P012 02 P072 forward 0 to 1073741823 when P012 03 upper 4 digits 268435455 9 Position range specification 268435455 to 0 when P012 02 2 PO73 reverse 1073741823 to 0 when P012 03 upper 4 digits ORAIS 2 2 00 X00 01 X01 02 X02 03 X03 P074 Teaching selection 04 X04 05 X05 06 X06 07 X07 00 9 9 P100 on Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 o o P101 on Sequence user parameter U 9 to 9999 1
423. slide switch SW1 in the inverter be sure to turn off the power supply Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Since the inverter supports two modes of cooling fan operation the inverter power is not always off even when the cooling fan is stopped Therefore be sure to confirm that the power supply is off before wiring Otherwise you run the risk of electric shock and injury Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 1 Terminal connection diagram and explanation of terminals and switch settings 3 phase power supply 200 V class 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 poner O AGHI aarm 400 V class 380 to 480 V 10 15 Oke 50 60 Hz 45 ABBE 3 1 Y o When connecting separate Jumper J51 W Q power supplies to main and Motor control circuits remove J51 connector cables beforehand R Q See page 2 20 LS Braking resistor Jumper optional f o bar Models with 22 kW Default jumper position or less capacity for xFUF2 xFF2 models reo have a built in BRD sinking type inputs C Prc O circuit i Du 1 Default jumper position CII T oal eaii The dotted line indicates the alte re ts detachable control terminal Power supply for control circuit board I 0 j Intelligent relay output contact Forward rotation O Q default alarm output command Intelligent input O 8 contacts Loo i Digital monitor output PWM output C Al op a a ee ue O 0 to 10
424. specified by the position range specification forward P072 and position range specification reverse P073 respectively If the value of the current position counter exceeds one of these ranges a position control range error E63 or E73 causes the inverter to trip and enter free running status The values specified by P072 and P073 limit the maximum values of multistage position settings 0 to 7 POGO to P067 Position settings cannot exceed the specified position ranges Related code 4 3 19 Teaching function C001 C0u8 intelligent input terminals The teaching function allows you to make the inverter run and stop P012 Control pulse setting the motor arbitrarily and then store position data as a position P013 Home search stop position settina command in an arbitrary position command area of memory Assign function 45 ORT to an intelligent input terminal 1 8 C001 C008 The ORT terminal functions as the teaching terminal when 02 absolute position control or 03 high resolution absolute position control is specified for the control pulse setting P012 lt Teaching procedure gt lt 1 gt Select the position command to be set by teaching selection P074 lt 2 gt Move the workpiece Enter an operation command with the ORT terminal turned on The speed and acceleration deceleration settings selected at operation command input are applied Output frequency The speed setting selected at operation
425. splayed numeric value to the desired output frequency and then press the key once to determine the frequency The display reverts to F001 6 Set the operation direction of the motor Display the function code F004 on the monitor screen and then press the E key once The monitor shows 00 or 01 Chapter 3 Operation Use the A and or key to change the displayed value to 00 for forward operation or 01 for reverse operation and then press the key once to determine the operation direction The display reverts to F004 7 Set the monitor mode To monitor the output frequency display the function code d001 and then press the key once The monitor shows the output frequency To monitor the operation direction display the function code d003 and then press the oS key once The monitor shows for forward operation ae for reverse operation or i for stopping 8 Press the key to start the motor The RUN lamp green LED goes on 9 Press the a key to decelerate or stop the motor When the motor stops the RUN lamp green LED goes off During the test run confirm that the inverter does not trip while accelerating or decelerating the motor and that the motor speed and frequencies are correct Ifa trip due to overcurrent or overvoltage has occurred during the test run increase the acceleration and deceleration time Make sure that there is enough margin to trip level by monitoring the output cu
426. ssscccsscsccesessssssssssesee 4 46 external trip cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 57 Carrier freQUueNCy cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 4 12 CAS F CE CF1 CF2 CF3 CF4 oe ibn dA Pinan Aaa A Aa ae eee power supply switching 4 52 RR ee na ee en a es a communication function 00 0 00 4 66 4 105 EBV eee a a a EA 7 comm hic tion line disconnection B suse EER N ETAS signal srias keresestisenterennneesnnentntet 4 66 PETN T cele tacttaes oui constant torque characteristic Feed forward selection electronic thermal seeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 38 EM constant torque characteristic VC 4 17 4 85 ae ayadus stdin casa E Ss cada us reese usm control circuit terminal 0 00 eee eeeeeeeees 2 7 forcible operation RE ae egy NEA Por eg cytes coe Slide An ee as Fasc EET A forcible terminal operation cooling fan operation 4 44 4 67 ee rotation signal cooling fan speed drop signal oona 4 67 Eee ae ee res copying beteeeeeeeeeeees seernes 2 9 4 92 Appendix 1 free setting of electronic thermal counterrotation prevention esssrrreeeereerrn 4 90 characterietie 4 39 OPZ OPI aiie ii P free V f characteristic cc ccccccccecsecesseeseeeeeees 4 18 use duc TE T acre Mh tts trespass RESTUNEIOD E frequency addition sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 15 frequency arrival setting for accel 5 4 61 frequency arrival setting for decel
427. stantaneous power failure or undervoltage 4 34 intelligent input terminal 08 2 6 4 45 Intelligent input terminal status 0 0 0 4 2 intelligent output terminal 0 2 6 4 59 Intelligent output terminal status 0 4 2 internal DC braking 08 4 21 4 23 4 24 inverter ready Signal eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 68 A A R aitvceven EA 4 35 IRDY irice ieusi reend i tees EERTE eoii 4 69 EREA E TEER SEEE ETO EEE 4 49 JOOGING e ia a eee oS 4 48 jump center frequency cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 26 J300 Scie atl ETE EE 4 85 Keypad Run key routing seeeeeeeeeeees 4 7 KHG oseraies oiin ot etegini iaieiiea 4 4 A E E R T 2 7 2 18 LAC we icseeiiii eevee keee is iess ieie 4 10 4 32 AD N e ech a ate ee A 4 10 life check monitoring eeeeeeeeeeee 4 5 4 66 Index 2 POG inete ne e a E eye ae 4 69 LOG1 LOG2 LOG3 LOG4 LOG5 LOG6 4 66 logical output signal operation 006 4 65 low current indication signal 006 4 68 main circuit terminal ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 7 main circuit Wiring ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 10 maintenance and inspection eeee 6 1 major failure Signal eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 4 69 MaxXiMUM FreQUENCY eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 12 manual torque boost 4 19 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4
428. sure to confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off When the inverter power has been turned on once a dangerous high voltage remains in the internal capacitors for some time after power off regardless of whether the inverter has been operated When rewiring after power off always wait 10 minutes or more after power off and check with a multimeter that the residual voltage across terminals P and N is zero to ensure safety during rewiring work 1 Main power input terminals R S and T Connect an earth leakage breaker for circuit wiring protection between the power supply and main power input terminals R S and T Use an earth leakage breaker with a high rating of a high frequency sensitive current to prevent the breaker from malfunctioning under the influence of high frequency When the protective function of the inverter operates a fault or accident may occur in your system Therefore you are recommended to connect a magnetic contactor that interrupts the power supply to the inverter Do not use the magnetic contactor connected to the power input terminal primary side or power output terminal secondary side of the inverter to start or stop the inverter To start and stop inverter operation by external signals use only the operation commands FW and RV signals that are input via control circuit terminals This inverter does not support a single phase power supply but supports only a three phase power supply If
429. t terminal 1 terminal positive temperature coefficient negative temperature coefficient switchable for resistor Intelligent output terminals Output 5 open collector output terminals NO NC switchable sink logic source logic switchable 1 relay 1c contact output terminal NO NC switchable Terminal functions Select six of 51 functions Running RUN constant speed reached FA1 set frequency overreached FA2 overload notice advance signal 1 OL output deviation for PID control OD alarm signal AL set frequency reached FA3 over torque OTQ instantaneous power failure IP undervoltage UV torque limited TRQ operation time over RNT plug in time over ONT thermal alarm signal THM brake release BRK braking error BER 0 Hz detection signal ZS speed deviation maximum DSE positioning completed POK set frequency overreached 2 FA4 set frequency reached 2 FA5 overload notice advance signal 2 OL2 PID feedback comparison FBV communication line disconnection NDc logical operation result 1 LOG1 logical operation result 2 LOG2 logical operation result 3 LOG3 logical operation result 4 LOG4 logical operation result 5 LOG5 logical operation result 6 LOG6 capacitor life warning WAC cooling fan speed drop WAF starting contact signal FR heat sink overheat warning OHF low current indication signal LOC general purpose output 1 M01 general purpose output 2 M02
430. t I EA AEREN EEA A ORKES AA EEA AATA EN ind 4 58 4 2 55 P PI switching function PPI A044 C001 to C008 H005 H050 to H052 H070 to H072 sia Sy tin yy KA ed E sm Se de EEE R E OTA J Sie E E D mm E me AE E E Se dea 4 58 4 2 56 Analog command holding function AHD C001 to CO08 sss sss r rrr r tree 4 59 4 2 57 Intelligent pulse counter PCNT and PCC ssssssctsscrtsct sss e esse seen e eee 4 59 4 2 58 Intelligent output terminal setting C021 to C026 ss cscs t ttt tt tt ttt eee 4 60 4 2 59 Intelligent output terminal a b NO NC selection C031 to CO36 sss sss e 4 61 4 2 60 Running signal RUN C021 to C025 sss srs ttre terete eens 4 62 4 2 61 Frequency arrival signals FA1 FA2 FA3 FA4 and FAS C021 to C025 C042 C043 C045 C046 Pe ee ee ee 2 4 7 62 4 2 62 Running time over and power on time over signals RNT and ONT b034 C021to C026 d016 d017 E tarts EE tay 5 cis jms etre TE E dah car setae aves E tener eit eral aided re 4 64 4 2 63 0 Hz speed detection signal ZS A044 C021 to C025 C063 sss strstr es 4 64 4 2 64 Over torque signal OTQ A044 C021 to C025 C055 to C058 sss s strstr 4 65 4 2 65 Alarm code output function ACO to AC3 C021 to C025 C062 sss ster 4 65 4 2 66 Logical output signal operation function LOG1 to LOG6 C021 to C026 C142 to C159 E oF aie ata alsa a fa ances fa aevGyer aba yale Atay sar acte cata ahadclvenaud a Atay e ar acetate lama Mav ale ataye 4 66 4 2 67
431. t those of LOG1 to LOG6 00 O C159 Logical output signal 6 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR 00 x o selection c160 nput terminal response time 0 to 200 X2ms 1 x o setting 1 C161 nput terminal response time 0 to 200 x2ms 1 x o setting 2 C162 Input terminal response time 0 to 200 x2ms 1 x o g setting 3 c s g C163 nput terminal response time 0 to 200 x2ms 1 x o Q setting 4 T C164 nput terminal response time 0 to 200 X2ms 1 x o 4 72 setting 5 2 C165 nput terminal response time 0 to 200 x2ms 1 x o 3 setting 6 ic 7 P C166 Input terminal response time 0 to 200 x2ms 1 x o setting 7 C167 Input terminal response time 0 to 200 x2ms 1 x o setting 8 Input terminal response time C168 setting FW 0 to 200 x2ms 1 x O f Multistage speed position 4 48 5 C169 determination time 0 to 200 x 10ms 9 i 9 4 108 8 12 Chapter 8 List of Data Settings Control constants Code Function name Monitored data or setting Default Setting during operation Change during operation Page allowed or allowed or _FF _FEF _FUF not not 00 disabling auto tuning 01 auto tuning without rotation 02 auto tuning H001 Auto tuning Setting with rotation 00 x x i002 motor asta soecton Tstmoror eae sancer aa ou ned aaa y o JE H202 Motor data selection 2nd motor
432. t to encoder quadruplex Home search completion P018 0 00 to 9 99 s delay time setting Electronic gear set position P019 00 FB Feed back side selection 01 REF Controller side Electronic gear ratio P020 1 to 9999 numerator setting Electronic gear ratio P021 1 9999 denominator setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 Feed forward gain setting P022 to 655 3 Position loop gain setting P023 0 00 ees 100 0 Position bias setting P024 ro By nao to 47 PCLR Clearance of position deviation i 3 data Terminal function C001 oe 48 STAT Pulse train position command input enable 1 In pulse train position control mode the frequency value of a frequency command is calculated as follows 6 AxPxK AP P Number of poles of the motor 4 xP xKV Ao g Frequency command Hz _ x Kv Position loop gain ENC 255 ENC Encoder pulse count ZAP Position deviation In position control mode the setting for the acceleration and deceleration time is invalid The LAD cancellation function operates automatically to ignore acceleration and deceleration patterns When the position loop gain is larger the acceleration deceleration time is shorter 4 99 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 2 The following timing charts show the detailed operations in pulse train input mode 1 MDO 90 phase shift pulse train SAP Nr er er N A SAN Input of pulse train i SBP SBN Input of pulse string Detected puls
433. tart command is input while the motor is in free running status the inverter will restart the motor according to the setting of the restart mode after FRS b088 See Section 4 2 47 Stop mode we 00 Normal stopping stopping after deceleration selection 01 Free running until stopping Related code b091 Stop mode selection F003 F203 F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors b003 Retry wait time before motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold b008 Restart mode after FRS 01 Restart mode after b088 Starting with 0 Hz FRS Starting with matching frequency 0 Hz Restart frequency b007 0 00 to 400 0 H Starting with 0 Hz if the frequency matching result is threshold less than the set lower limit Retry wait time Time to wait until the restart of the motor after b003 0 3 to 100 s before motor restart free running ends 4 2 7 STOP key enable Related code When the control circuit terminal block is selected as the device to input b087 STOP key enable operation commands the STOP key enable function allows you to enable or disable the motor stopping and trip reset functions of the STOP key of the digital operator This function is effective only when the digital operator 02 is not specified for the run command source setting A002 see Section 4 2 5 If the digital operator 02 is specified for A002 the motor stopping and trip reset functions of the STOP key are enabled regardl
434. tary speed Reduce the motor constant R2 step by step from the set H021 H221 HO31 variation is positive value down to 0 8 times as high as the set value free fs Increase the motor constant R1 step by step from the Torque is insufficient at set value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value H020 H220 H030 Regenerating low frequencies Increase the motor constant IO step by step from the set Several H4 value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value H023 H223 H033 z The motor generates an Starting impact when it starts Reduce the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 Deceleratin The motor runs Reduce the speed response setting H005 H205 g unsteadily Reduce the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 Reduce the motor constant I0 step by step from the set Immediately Overcurrent or value down to 0 8 times as high as the set value HO23 H223 H033 after overvoltage protection Specify 00 al 01 al FP for the AVR deceleration _ function operates peciy always on or always off for the A081 function select A081 Low frequency Motor rotation is Increase the motor constant J from the set value H024 H224 H034 Note 1 Always set the carrier frequency b083 to 2 1 kHz or more If the carrier frequency is less than 2 1 kHz the inverter cannot operate the motor normally Note 2 Adjust the torque limit b041 to b044 so that the value a calculated by the expression below does not exceed 200 Otherwise the mo
435. tem to the inverter 2 Response frame that is sent from the inverter to the external control system 3 Communication trip limit time C077 If the inverter cannot complete the reception of a query from the master system external control system within the communication trip limit time after having sent a response to the preceding query the inverter enters the status in which to receive the query from the beginning Subsequently the inverter returns no response to the master system After reception timeout occurs the inverter operates according to the setting of the selection of operation after communication error C076 For details see the table below Monitoring of reception timeout begins when the first communication is performed after the inverter power has been turned on or the inverter has been reset Reception timeout is monitored only when the inverter communicates with the master system Range of data 00 Tripping 01 Tripping after stopping the motor Selection of operation 02 Ignoring the errors after communication error 03 Stopping the motor after free running FRS 04 Decelerating and stopping the motor 0 00 to 99 99 s Communication trip limit C077 time setting Communication wait time C078 The inverter sends a response frame 2 always after receiving a query frame 1 The inverter does not actively output any frame to the external control system 0 to 1000 ms 4 129 Desc
436. ter Command Command to be transmitted 2 bytes 04 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format Station No Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station number of control target 2 bytes 01 to 32 inverter Data Data 8 bytes See Note 8 XOR of the items from Station No to Data BCC Block check code 2 bytes See Item 3 of this section CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note 10 The data indicating the status of the inverter consists of the following three status elements A B and Data C Status A Status B Status C 00 reserved Inverter status A Inverter status B Inverter status C Code Status Code Status Code Status 00 Initial status 00 Stopping 00 01 01 Running 01 Stopping 02 Stopping 02 Tripping 02 Decelerating 03 Running 03 Constant speed operation 04 Free run stop FRS in progress 04 Accelerating 05 Jogging JG in progress 05 Forward operation 06 DC braking DB in progress 06 Reverse operation 07 Retry in progress 07 Switching forward operation 08 Tripping to reverse operation 09 Undervoltage UV status 08 Switching reverse operation to forward operation 09 Starting forward operation 10 Starting reverse operation 4 12
437. ter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 9 Base frequency setting 1 Base frequency and motor voltage With the base frequency setting and AVR voltage select functions adjust the inverter outputs frequency and voltage to the motor ratings Related code A003 A203 A303 Base frequency setting 1st 2nd 3rd motors A081 AVR function select A082 AVR voltaae select The base frequency is the nominal frequency of the motor Output Set a base frequency that meets the motor specification voltage Carefully note that setting the base frequency to less than AVR voltage 50 Hz may result in motor burnout select A special motor requires a base frequency of 60 Hz or 100 more Your inverter model may not be suitable for such a special motor and one with a larger capacity may be required Select the motor voltage that meets the motor specification Selecting a motor voltage exceeding the motor specification 4 Output frequency may result in motor burnout Base frequency Hz To switch the base frequency among the 1st 2nd and 3rd settings assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals see Section 4 2 38 Use the SET and SET3 signals for switching Range of data Base frequency A003 A203 30 to maximum frequency setting A303 1st 2nd 3rd motors Hz AVR Volt ge s le ci A082 200 215 220 230 240 Selectable on 200 V class inverter models 9 380 400 415 440 460 480 Selectable on 400 V
438. ter status A 5 Jogging 6 DC braking 7 Frequency being input 8 Retrying operation 9 Undervoltage UV 0004h Inverter status B R 0 Stopping 1 Running 2 Tripping 0 1 Stopping 2 Decelerating 3 Constant speed operation 4 Accelerating 5 Forward rotation 6 Reverse rotation 7 Inverter status C Switching from forward rotation to reverse rotation 8 Switching from reverse rotation to forward rotation 9 Starting forward rotation 10 Starting reverse rotation 0006h PID feedback RW 0 to 10000 0 01 0007h to Reserved Inaccessible 0010h 0011h Trip Counter d080 R 0 to 65530 1 time rip monitoring actor ee the list of inverter trip factors below 0012h Tri itoring 1 fi See the list of i ip fi bel rip monitoring 1 inverter status ee the list of inverter trip factors below 0013h Tri itoring 1 i See the list of i ip f bel 0014h Trip monitoring 1 frequency high 0015h Trip monitoring 1 frequency low pee 0 01 HZ 0016h Trip monitoring 1 current d081 Output current at tripping 0017h Trip monitoring 1 voltage DC input voltage at tripping 0018h Trip monitoring 1 running time high 0019h Trip monitoring 1 running time low pumulative running timeat tripping h 001Ah Trip monitoring 1 power on time high F TE on 001Bh Trip monitoring 1 power on time low Cumulative Poweron tmeat tipping 1 001Ch Trip monitoring 2 factor See the list of inverter trip f
439. terminal with jumper shaded in the G Jumper connecting figure to enable disable the G Terminals PD and P EMC filter function charge lump When not using the DCL do not remove the jumper from terminals PD and P Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function Enabling the EMC filter SJ700 450LFF2 SJ700 450HFF2 SJ700 550HFF2 RO and T0 M4 Ground terminal M8 Other terminals M8 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal layout Inverter model G TO charge lump Ro 70 ag R S T PD P N U V W L1 L2 L3 1 T1 12 T3 ad G Jumper connecting G Terminals PD and P Ground terminal with jumper shaded in the When not using the DCL figure to enable disable the do not remove the jumper EMC filter function J700 550LFF2 from terminals PD and P Method of enabling disabling the EMC filter function RO and TO M4 SS s Ground terminal M8 Other terminals M10 NZ filter Disabling the EMC filter factory setting GO ELY Enabling the EM Reference Leakage current by inverter with model EMC filter enabled or disabled reference data The table below lists the reference currents that may leak from the inverter when the internal EMC filter is enabled or disabled Leakage current is in proportion to the voltage and frequency of input power Note that the values listed in the table below indicate the reference curre
440. terminals O supply O2 and Ol and analog output terminals AM and AMI Do not ground this common terminal Frequency setting power This terminal supplies 10 VDC power to the O O2 Ol terminals supply Frequency command voltage Al e load current 20 Power supply Input a voltage 0 to 10 VDC as a frequency command 10 V specifies the maximum frequency To specify the maximum frequency with a voltage of 10 V or less set the voltage using function A014 Auxiliary Input a voltage 0 to 10 VDC as a signal to be added to the frequency frequency command input from the O or OI terminal You can input an independent command frequency command from this terminal O2 terminal alone by changing the voltage setting Input a current 4 to 20 mADC as a frequency command 20 mA specifies the maximum frequency The OI signal is valid only when the AT signal is on Assign the AT function to an intelligent input terminal This terminal outputs one of the selected 0 to 10 VDC voltage output monitoring items The monitoring items available for selection include output frequency output current output torque signed or unsigned output voltage input power electronic thermal overload LAD frequency motor temperature heat sink temperature and general output This terminal outputs one of the selected 4 to 20 mA DC current output monitoring items The monitoring items available for selection include output frequency output curr
441. tern will be equivalent to the S curve pattern Output frequency rate 7 acceleration 2 gof A151 100 Curvature for deceleration 1 A152 Curvature for deceleration 2 deco Curvature for Time s acceleration 1 A150 4 2 26 Energy saver operation Related code The energy saver operation function allows you to automatically minimize A085 Operation mode selection the inverter output power while the inverter is driving the motor at A086 Energy saving mode tuning constant speed This function is suited to operating a fan pump or other load that has a reduced torque characteristic To use this function specify 01 for the operation mode selection A085 Use the energy saving mode tuning function A086 to adjust the response and accuracy of the energy saver operation The energy saver operation function controls the inverter operation comparatively slowly Therefore if a sudden change in the load occurs e g impact load is applied the motor may stall and consequently the inverter may trip because of overcurrent 00 Normal operation Operation mode selection A085 Energy saving operation Fuzzy operation Slow High Energy saving mode tuning A086 Quick Low Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 27 Retry or trip after instantaneous power failure 1 Retry restart after instantaneous power failure You can select tripping or retrying restarting the motor operation
442. the electronic thermal characteristic A setting of 100 corresponds to the inverter trip due to overload error code E05 4 38 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 30 Overload restriction overload notice 1 Overload restriction function The overload restriction function allows you to make the inverter monitor the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation and automatically reduce the output frequency according to the deceleration rate at overload restriction when the motor current reaches the overload restriction level This function prevents the moment of inertia from excessively increasing during motor acceleration and prevents the inverter from tripping because of overcurrent even when the load changes suddenly during the constant speed operation of the motor You can specify two types of overload restriction operation by setting functional items b021 b022 and b023 and functional items b024 b025 and b026 separately To switch the overload restriction operation between the two settings setting with b021 b022 and b023 and setting with b024 b025 and b026 assign function 39 OLR to an intelligent input terminal Turn the OLR signal on and off to switch between the two settings The overload restriction level specifies the current at which to trigger the overload restriction function The deceleration rate at overload restriction specifies the length of time to decelerate t
443. the inverter to prevent it from being exposed to the test voltage Use a tester in high resistance range mode for a conduction test on the control circuit Do not use a megger or buzzer for that purpose Apply the ground resistance test using a megger only to the main circuit of the inverter Do not carry out the test using a megger for its control circuit Use a 500 VDC megger for the ground resistance test Before the main circuit test with a megger remove the jumper for switching the inverter s internal filter function and then connect terminals R S T U V W P PD N RB RO and TO by wires as shown in the figure below Subsequently carry out the test After the test using the megger remove the wires from terminals R S T U V W P PD N RB RO and TO and connect the jumper for switching the inverter s internal filter function at the original position Note that only inverter models with a capacity of less than 22 kW have the RB terminal Power supply T Ground Ground W Do not connect RO terminal terminal power supply cables D Do not connect the to the inverter TO inverter cables to the 500 VDC megger O motor Be sure to remove the jumper for switching the internal filter function 6 4 Withstand Voltage Test Do not carry out a withstand voltage test for the inverter The test may damage its internal parts or cause them to deteriorate Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 5 Method of Checking the Inve
444. this to connect the DCL The cable length between the inverter and DCL must be 5 m or less Remove the jumper only when connecting the DCL If the jumper is removed and the DCL is not connected power is not supplied to the main circuit of the inverter and the inverter cannot operate 4 External braking resistor connection terminals P and RB and regenerative braking unit connection terminals P and N Inverter models with 22 kW or less capacity have a built in regenerative braking BRD circuit If you need increased braking performance connect an optional external braking resistor to terminals P and RB Do not connect an external braking resistor with resistance less than the specified value Such a resistor may cause damage to the regenerative braking BRD circuit Inverter models with capacity of 30 kW or more do not have a built in regenerative braking BRD circuit Increasing the braking performance of these models requires an optional regenerative braking unit and an external braking resistor Connect the P and N terminals of the optional regenerative braking unit to the P and N terminals of the inverters The cable length between the inverter and optional regenerative braking unit must be 5 m or less and the two cables must be twisted for wiring Do not use these terminals for connecting any devices other than the optional external braking resistor and regenerative braking unit 5 Inverter ground terminal G Be sur
445. ting l specify 00 for b037 7 A002 Run command source setting 8 A003 Base frequency setting 9 A004 Maximum frequency setting 10 A005 AT selection 11 A020 Multispeed frequency setting 12 A021 Multispeed 1 setting 13 A022 Multispeed 2 setting 14 A023 Multispeed 3 setting 15 A044 1st control method 16 A045 V f gain setting 17 A085 Operation mode selection 18 b001 Selection of restart mode 19 b002 Allowable under voltage power failure time 20 b008 Retry after trip selection 21 b011 Retry wait time after trip 22 b037 Function code display restriction 23 b083 Carrier frequency setting 24 b084 Initialization mode selection 25 b130 Selection of overvoltage suppression function 26 b131 Setting of overvoltage suppression level 27 C021 Setting of intelligent output terminal 11 28 C022 Setting of intelligent output terminal 12 29 C036 Alarm relay active state Chapter 3 Operation Key operation and transition of the Key operation and transition of the monitored data on display codes on display Pressing the A or key respectively scrolls up or down the code displayed in code display mode or increases or decreases the numerical data displayed in data display mode Press the A or ey key until the desired code or numerical data is shown To scroll codes or increase decrease numerical data faster press and hold the key Monitor mode Pressing the E key with a function
446. tion C021 to C025 DSE Speed deviation error signal Alarm relay terminal function C026 DSE Speed deviation error signal Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 3 3 Vector control with encoder feedback Related code A001 Frequency source setting A044 A244 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd motors F001 Output frequency setting b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 H002 H202 Motor data selection 1st 2nd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H020 H220 Motor constant R1 1st 2nd motors H021 H221 Motor constant R2 1st 2nd motors H022 H222 Motor constant L 1st 2nd motors H023 H223 Motor constant lo 1st 2nd motors H024 H224 Motor constant J 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 PI integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors P011 Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting P012 Control pulse setting To use this control function specify 05 V2 for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 You can specify the vector control with sensor only when the 1st motor control is selected Before using this function be sure to make optimum constant settings for the motor with reference to Section 4 2 95 Motor constant selection Also set the pulse count of the e
447. tive range end frequency A013 O L input active range start voltage A014 O L input active range end voltage A015 O L input start frequency enable A101 Ol L input active range start frequency A102 Ol L input active range end frequency 1 Start end frequency settings for the O L and OI L terminals Item O Ol L input active Function code Range of data Related code A103 Ol L input active range start current A104 Ol L input active range end current A105 Ol L input start frequency enable A111 02 L input active range start frequency A112 02 L input active range end frequency A113 02 L input active range start voltage A114 02 L input active range end voltage Description range start frequenc O Ol L input active range end frequency A012 A102 0 00 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 to Setting of the start frequency Setting of the end frequency O Ol L input active A Setting of the rate of the start frequency to the O Ol L input active v Setting of the rate of the end frequency to the Externally input start frequency The frequency set as A011 or A101 is output as the output frequency while the start frequency rate is 0 to the value set as A013 or A103 0 Hz 01 0 Hz is output as the output frequency while the start frequency rate is 0 to the value set as A013 or A103 O Ol L input start frequency enable If the voltage of the si
448. to 8 functions terminals To use this function assign functions 27 UP and 28 DWN to two of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 This function is only effective for multispeed operation when 01 terminal or 02 oprater has been specified for the frequency source setting A001 If 01 control circuit terminal block has been specified this function is only effective when the analog command holding function AHD is enabled see 4 2 56 This function is ineffective when the external analog input has been specified for the frequency source setting A001 This function cannot be used to set frequencies for jogging operation When the UP or DWN terminal is on the 1st 2nd and 3rd acceleration deceleration time follows the settings of F002 F003 F202 F203 F302 and F303 To switch between the 1st 2nd and 3rd controls assign function 08 SET and 17 SET3 to intelligent input terminals and turn on and off the SET and SET3 terminals for switching You can store the frequency settings adjusted using the remote control function UP and DWN signals Set 01 enable on C101 to store the frequency settings You can also clear the stored frequency settings Assign function 29 UDC to an intelligent input terminal and turn on or off the UDC terminal to clear or store respectively the frequency settings adjusted with the UP and DWN signals In this case OHZ is set as initial value C101 00 Disabl
449. to be read the inverter will respond with error code 03h The data received in the response indicates the status of coils 7 to 14 Read the received data 17h 00010111b as shown below The least significant bit indicates the status of coil 7 Coilnumber 14 13 12 n 10 9 8 7 If the query has specified the reading of an undefined coil the data on the said coil is represented by 0 in the response If the function to read the coil status cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 133 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions ii Reading registers 03h This function reads a specified number of registers beginning at a specified register address Example When reading the trip history data from the inverter at slave address 5 Assume that the conditions of the past three trips are as follows SJ700 command d081 factor of most recent trip d081 inverter state at most recent trip Register number 0012h 0013h Query Response Field name Sample setting Field name Sample setting hexadecimal hexadecimal 1 Slave address 1 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 03 2 Function code 03 3 Starting register number 00 3 Number of data bytes 3 04 upper digit 2 4 Starting register number 00 4 Starting register number 11 upper digit lower digit 2 5 Starting register number 07 5 Number of registers upper 00 lo
450. tor Deceleration 2 time setti 4393 Deceleration 2 time setting 4 44 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 s 15 00 fe fe G 3rd motor S A094 Select method to switch to 00 switching by 2CH terminal 01 switching by setting 02 switching only 00 x x 4 30 g Acc2 Dec2 profile when rotation is reversed 8 Select method to switch to 00 switching by 2CH terminal 01 switching by setting 02 switching only 3 A294 apa 00 x x S Acc2 Dec2 2nd motor when rotation is reversed oO B aogs Acct to Acc frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x ransition point c amp a295 Acct to Acc2 frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x T transition point 2nd motor oO G Anse 280 to Dec frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x ransition point A296 Dect to Dec2 frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x x transition point 2nd motor A097 Acceleration curve selection 00 linear 01 S curve 02 U curve 03 inverted U curve 04 EL S curve 00 x x 4 31 A098 Deceleration curve setting 00 linear 01 S curve 02 U curve 03 inverted U curve 04 EL S curve 00 x x A101 OHL input active range start 9 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o requency A102 OIML input active range end 9 99 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 x o frequency S A103 OI L input active range start 0 to Ol L input active range end current 20 x O current w R 5 3
451. tor continues to display O O until the inverter restarts the motor operation eb FRS b028 Output current j Deceleration according to the setting of b029 Inverter output frequency Frequency selected as the setting of b030 Motor speed b003 gt 4 2 28 Phase loss power input protection Related code The phase loss power input protection function gives a warning when b006 Phase loss detection enable phase loss power is input to the inverter Phase loss detection TAR 00 Disabling the protection enable Enabling the protection An phase loss power input may cause the following conditions resulting in an inverter failure 1 The ripple current increases in the main capacitor and the capacitor life will be shortened significantly 2 When the inverter is connected to a load the internal converter or thyristor of the inverter may be damaged 4 36 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 29 Electronic thermal protection Related code The electronic thermal protection function allows you to protect ee ae ee idly Sering ue calculated within the inverter trom current output the motor against overheating Make settings of this function 1st 2nd 3rd motors based on the rated current of the motor The inverter will trip for b013 b213 b313 Electronic thermal characteristic i i A 1st 2nd 3rd motors overheat protection according to the settings 5 b015 b017 b019 Free s
452. tor control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor from the following three types 1 Motor constants of Hitachi general purpose motor 2 Motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning 3 Arbitrarily set motor constants The motor constants set for the 1st motor control apply to the 3rd motor control Data or range of data 00 Constant torque characteristic VC Reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power or of VP pee Wa uae tee generat purpose motor canons eae Hoo2 H202 a a Motor capacity H003 H203 0 2 to 75 0 kW Motor constants tuned by online auto tuning ee ee Motor poles setting H004 H204 2 4 6 8 or 10 poles o O Motor constant R1 H020 H220 0 000 to 65 53 z gt Auto constantR1 HO30 H230 0 0000 65 53 2 S O AutoconstantR2 H031 H231 0 0000 65 53 2 S Eek Auto constantL HO32 H232_ 0 00to 655 3 mH S O Auto constantlo H033 H233 0 00to 655 3 A Auto constant J H034 H234 0 001 to 9999 kgm S O 1 Any of 00 to 05 can be selected fer the 1st motor FN Only 00 to 04 can be selected for the 2nd motor A244 Only 00 or 01 can be selected for the 3rd motor A344 2 If you copy the data from a J300 series inverter to your SJ700 series inverter set constants R1 R2 and lo as follows R1s 3700 R11 3390 1 125 R2s 700 R2 3300 1 2 lo VI 272 X 2 XxX M300 Lj300 Xx 10 V Voltage class 200 or 400 V 3 Convert the moment of
453. tor may be burnt out a torque limit x inverter capacity motor capacity Example When the inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit value is calculated as follows on the assumption that the value a should be 200 Torque limit 0041 to b044 a x motor capacity inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 98 Torque monitoring function The torque monitoring function allows you to monitor the estimated motor output torque when the V F characteristic curve selection is the sensorless vector control OHz range sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor To monitor the output torque on the digital operator select code d012 on the digital operator To monitor the output torque as a signal output from the control circuit terminal block see Section 4 2 77 FM terminal or 4 2 78 AM and AMI terminals If the constant torque characteristic VC reduced torque characteristic 1 7th power of VP or free V f characteristic is specified for the V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 this function is disabled and the display on the digital operator and the signal output from the control circuit terminal block are unpredictable The torque monitored by this function is displayed as a ratio to the torque the motor outputs when rotating in synchronization with the frequency corresponding to the motor s rated output The latte
454. trol settings Function name No Base frequency setting 2nd 2204h Maximum frequency setting 2nd motor ris Reserved 2216h Multispeed frequency setting 2217h 2nd motor 2218h to 223Ah Reserved 223Bh Torque boost method selection 2nd motor Manual torque boost value Manual torque boost frequency 223Dh adjustment 2nd motor 223Eh VIF characteristic curve selection 2nd motor 223Fh Reserved Voltage compensation gain 2240h setting for automatic torque boost 2nd motor Slippage compensation gain setting for automatic torque 2241h boost 2nd motor ee Reserved 224Fh Frequency upper limit setting 2250h 2nd motor 2251h Frequency lower limit setting 2252h 2nd motor prin Reserved 226Fh Acceleration 2 time setting 2270h 2nd motor 2271h Deceleration 2 time setting 2272h 2nd motor Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 2nd motor 2274h Acc to Acc2 frequency 2275h transition point 2nd motor 2276h Dec1 to Dec2 frequency 2277h transition point 2nd motor 2278h to R d 230Bh Reserved 2273h Function code F202 high F202 low F203 high F203 low Function code A203 A204 A220 high A220 low A241 A242 A243 A244 A246 A247 A261 high A261 low A262 high A262 low A292 high A292 low A293 high A293 low A294 A295 high A295 low A296 high A296 low R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W
455. uency A052 the inverter will start operation with the normal output Example 7 a Example 7 b Operation Operation command command A05 Frequency erequenen i command command Output Output frequency frequency How the inverter returns to the normal output varies depending on the setting of the DC braking edge or level detection for DB input A054 a Edge mode b Level mode Operation Operation command command A052 A05 Frequency Frequency command command Output Output frequency frequency Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 20 Frequency upper limit setting The frequency upper limit setting function allows you to place upper and lower limits on the inverter output frequency This function restricts the input of frequency commands that specify any frequencies outside the upper and lower limits Always set the upper limit before setting the lower limit Also be sure to keep the frequency upper limit A061 A261 larger than the frequency lower limit A062 A262 Be sure that upper limit lower limit does not exceed Maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 Be sure to set output frequency F001 and multiple speed 1 to 15 A021 to A035 in between uppelimit and lower limit If O Hz is set for the frequency upper and lower limits they will not operate The frequency limit setting function is disabled when the 3rd control system is selected Range of data 0 00 or a frequency mo
456. uency command or by an externally input command braking force time and frequency are variable Chapter 7 Specifications 3 Common specifications of 200 V class and 400 V class models continued Model name type Intelligent input terminals name 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 SJ700 XXXXXFEFEFFUE L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H om Standard F operator Setting with and keys oo External A F ES signal 0 to 10 VDC 10 to 10 VDC input impedance 10kQ 4 to 20 mA input impedance 1009 i i Setting via RS485 communication port D landed Start stop commands forward reverse switching by parameter setting av v Operator 2505 Ext Forward operation start stop commands reverse operation start stop possible when relevant commands 3 ESE xema are assigned to intelligent input terminals a g signal 3 wire input possible when relevant commands are assigned to control circuit terminals oO oO ic oe Setting via RS485 communication 8 terminals NO NC switchable sink logic source logic switchable Terminal functions Select eight of 69 functions Reverse operation RV Multispeed 1 setting CF1 Multispeed 2 setting CF2 Multispeed 3 setting E CF3 Multispeed 4 setting CF4 Jogging JG external DC braking DB 2nd motor control SET a 2 stage acceleration deceleration 2CH free run stop FRS external trip EXT unatt
457. uency prolongs the retry wait time Even when restarting with matching frequency has been selected the inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the output frequency is no more than half the base frequency or 2 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly 4 52 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions Example 3 Restarting with active matching frequency C d a Teatret p028 Output current j Deceleration according to the setting of b029 Inverter output frequency Frequency selected as the setting of b030 After the retry wait time b003 the inverter restarts the motor with the frequency set as b030 The inverter subsequently decelerates the motor according to the setting of b029 while maintaining the output current at the level specified for b029 When the output voltage matches the frequency the inverter re accelerates the motor up to the frequency that was set when the inverter shut off the output to the motor before the restart If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it restarts the motor with input frequency reduce Motor speed the setting of b028 p003 003 4 2 48 Commercial power source switching CS function Related code b003 Retry wait time before motor restart b007 Restart frequency threshold C001 to C008 Terminal 1 to 8 functions The commercial power source switching function allows you to switch the power supply between th
458. uency matching scan time constant brake If an attempt is made to forcibly stop the motor with 2030 Acv ees matching restart frequency a mechanical brake while the inverter keeps its output the co01 cae Terminal 1 to 8 functions inverter may trip because of overcurrent To use this function assign function 11 FRS to one of the terminal 1 to 8 functions C001 to C008 The free run stop FRS function operates as long as the FRS terminal is on When the FRS terminal is turned off the inverter restarts the motor after the retry wait time b003 However the inverter does not restart the motor if the digital operator 02 has been specified for the run command source setting A002 To restart the motor in such status enter a new operation command You can select the inverter output mode for restarting with the restart mode after FRS b088 from starting the motor with 0 Hz starting the motor with a matching frequency and restarting the motor with the input frequency See examples 1 2 and 3 Even when restarting with matching frequency has been selected the inverter restarts the motor with 0 Hz if it detects a frequency lower than the restart frequency threshold b007 The settings including that of the FRS terminal which you make for this function will affect the inverter operation at recovery of the motor from the free running status LaPeer 09 Start with OF See example b boss Retry Wait time before b003 0 3 to
459. und Control Operation 1 While performing a unit Measure the voltage between the The inter phase voltage balance Digital and operation of the inverter check o cables connected to the main circuit must be as follows multimeter protective the balance output voltage terminals U V and W 200 V class models 4 V or less _ rectifier circuits among the individual phases 400 V class models 8 V or less _ instrument and fe Ra ce SS eee Vliet 2 Carry out a sequential Short circuit or open the protective pone protection operation test and o circuit outputs as a simulation An error must be detected check the protective and display according to the sequence circuits for any abnormality Cooling Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal vibrations o Turn the fan manually during the The fan must rotate smoothly system and noise inverter power off status There must be no abnormality EEEE T Le I I en found 2 Check the joints for loosening Check visually Standard operating life until ie replacement 10 years 2 3 Heat sink Check for clogging o Check visually The heat sink must not be clogged Display Monitor 1 Check that all LEDs light up o Check visually The LEDs must light up normally normally 2 Clean the monitor O Clean the monitor with a rag Meter Check that meter readings are o Check the meter readings on the The readings must meet the Voltmeter and normal panel standard and control values ammeter Motor General 1 Chec
460. urs prolong the deceleration time If a DC voltage P N is supplied to control power supply terminals RO and TO the inverter may detect undervoltage and trip when the inverter power is turned off If this cause a problem in your system specify 00 or 02 for the trip selection The inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if 1 the output frequency is not more than half the base frequency or 2 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly Even when a retry operation 01 to 03 is specified for the selection of restart mode b001 and disabling tripping 00 or 02 is specified for the selection of a trip after instantaneous power failure or undervoltage in the stopped state the inverter will trip if the instantaneous power failure continues over the allowable under voltage power failure time See example 2 Even when a retry operation is specified for the trip selection the inverter will trip if the cause of trip is not removed by the end of the retry wait time before motor restart b003 If this occurs prolong the retry wait time Even when a retry operation is specified for the retry selection the inverter will trip if the undervoltage status continues for 40 seconds or more when starting the motor with matching frequency is selected inverter may restart suddenly by alarm resetting resetting and retry start The figures below show the timing charts for starting with a matching frequency when 02 is specified for the s
461. ut Output z a A055 A055 A052 A052 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 Internal DC braking triggered only when the output frequency reaches a set frequency A051 02 You can also operate the internal DC braking function so that DC braking is applied to the motor when the inverter output frequency falls to the DC braking frequency setting A052 or below When the internal DC braking function is used in this mode the external DC braking described in Item 2 and the internal DC braking described in Item 3 cannot be used In this mode DC braking operates only when the operation command signal is on i e the start command is input The inverter starts DC braking when both the frequency set by the frequency command and the current output frequency fall to the DC braking frequency setting A052 or below See example 7 a When the frequency set by the frequency command increases to the setting of A052 2 Hz or more the inverter stops DC braking and restores its normal output See example 7 a If the frequency set by the frequency command is 0 Hz when the start command is input via an analog input terminal the inverter will start operation with DC braking because both the frequency set by the frequency command and current output frequency are 0 Hz See example 7 b If the operation command signal start command is turned on when the frequency command specifies a frequency larger than the DC braking freq
462. ut frequency setting b040 Torque limit selection b041 to b044 Torque limits 1 to 4 H002 H202 Motor data selection 1st 2nd motors H003 H203 Motor capacity 1st 2nd motors H004 H204 Motor poles setting 1st 2nd motors H005 H205 Motor speed constant 1st 2nd motors H020 H220 Motor constant R1 1st 2nd motors H021 H221 Motor constant R2 1st 2nd motors H022 H222 Motor constant L 1st 2nd motors H023 H223 Motor constant lo 1st 2nd motors H024 H224 Motor constant J 1st 2nd motors H050 H250 PI proportional gain 1st 2nd motors H051 H251 Pl integral gain 1st 2nd motors H052 H252 P proportional gain setting 1st 2nd motors Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 4 2 104 Easy sequence function Related code You can create a user program with EZSQ the A017 Easy sequence function selection programming software dedicated to the SJ700 on a P100 to P131 Easy sequence user parameters personal computer and download the program to your SJ700 series inverter Thus you can convert your inverter to a special machine on which user defined functions are installed Please refer to programming instruction of EZSQ user manual The easy sequence function does not provide an operation mode exclusive for program based operation Therefore you can arbitrarily select the devices to input frequency and operation commands to the inverter On the other hand the FW terminal must be used exclusively to run the program If the c
463. uto tuning Setting H001 2 Input an operation command When the operation command is input the inverter performs an automatic operation in the following steps 1 First AC excitation The motor does not rotate 2 Second AC excitation The motor does not rotate 3 First DC excitation The motor does not rotate 4 Operation based on V f characteristic control The motor rotates at a speed up to 80 of the base frequency 5 Operation based on SLV control The motor rotates at a speed up to x of the base frequency 6 Second DC excitation The motor does not rotate 7 Display of auto tuning result Note 1 Steps 4 and 5 are skipped when the auto tuning without motor rotation H001 01 has been selected Note 2 The motor speed x in step 5 is as follows Assume that T is the acceleration or deceleration time in step 4 whichever is largest When Os lt T lt 50 s x 40 When 50 s lt T lt 100s x 20 When 100s lt T x 10 Note 3 The tuning result is displayed as follows Normat ena end Abnormal end end If the auto tuning has ended abnormally retry it To clear the result display press the STOP RESET key Note 4 If the inverter trips during the auto tuning the auto tuning is terminated forcibly In such cases the monitor does not display the abnormal end code but displays a trip indication code In such cases remove the cause of tripping and
464. utput terminal When using the brake control function you are recommended to select the sensorless vector control A044 03 OHz range sensorless vector control A044 04 or V2 A044 05 as the V F characteristic curve selection that ensures a high starting torque See Section 4 2 18 Settings required for the brake control function Item Function code Data or range of data Description Disabling the brake control function Brake Control Enab bto 00 Disabling the brake control function ANERE e Enabling the brake control function Time to wait after the output frequency Brake Wait Time for b121 0 00 to 5 00 s has reached the release frequency until Release the output current reaches the release current Brake Wait Time for Mechanical delay after the release b122 0 00 to 5 00 s signal has been output until the brake is Acceleration released Brake Wait Time for Mechanical delay after the release b123 0 00 to 5 00 s signal has been turned off until the brake Stopping is applied Wait time longer than the delay after the Brake Wait Time for release signal output until the release b124 0 00 to 5 00 s Confirmation completion signal output from the brake is input to the inverter Setting 400 0 Hz release signal 1 0 x rated current to Frequency at which to permit brake Setting 2 0x rated current releasing 2 0 00 to 99 99 or 100 0 to Frequency at which to apply the brake 1 Specify a frequency h
465. ve Nonconductive BRD circuit Conductive Converter circuit S IRB Nonconductive Conductive Conductive Nonconductive Conductive Nonconductive Conductive Nonconductive Nonconductive Conductive Nonconductive Conductive Nonconductive Conductive ie ees Se Conductive Nonconductive Conductive Nonconductive Conductive Nonconductive Nonconductive Conductive Nonconductive Nonconductive Measurement result D1 U vj D2 Inverter circuit D3 D4 Converter circuit D5 D6 TR1 TR2 TR3 l l I I I L TR4 Inverter circuit TRS TR6 TR7 Z 2 0 8 Zz Z lt Z Cc vl S U lt vlc zZz A z o z a 8 8go Ziz Pl S Zz lt Z Cc Z S v lt vlc v izlo zazi o BRD circuit Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 6 DC Bus Capacitor Life Curve Ambient temperature C When energized 24 hours a day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 Capacitor life number of years Note 1 The ambient temperature indicates the temperature measured at a position about 5 cm distant from the bottom center of the inverter body If the inverter is mounted in an enclosure the ambient temperature is the temperature within the enclosure Note 2 The DC Bus capacitor has a limited life because chemical reactions occur inside the capacitor during operation You should replace the DC Bus capacitor after about 10
466. ven when the motor load or the motor s moment of inertia changes 00 Normal operation Related code A044 A244 A344 VIF characteristic curve selection 1st 2nd 3rd motors A085 Operation mode selection b021 b024 Overload restriction operation mode 1 2 b022 b025 Overload restriction setting 1 2 Operation mode selection A085 Energy saving operation Fuzzy operation Observe the following precautions and instructions when using this function Note 1 This function is not suited for machines that require fixed acceleration and deceleration times This function varies the acceleration and deceleration time according to the changes in the load and the moment of inertia Note 2 If the inertial force produced in the machine becomes about 20 times as high as the motor shaft capacity the inverter may trip If this occurs reduce the carrier frequency Note 3 Even when the inverter is driving the same motor the actual acceleration deceleration time always changes according to current fluctuation Note 4 The selection of the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function is valid only when the control mode is a V f characteristic control mode When a sensorless vector control mode is selected the selection of this function is ignored normal operation is performed Note 5 When the fuzzy acceleration deceleration function is enabled the jogging operation differs from the normal jogging operation because of fuzzy acceleration
467. ventilated indoor site not exposed to direct sunlight Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to high temperature high humidity condensation dust explosive gases corrosive gases flammable gases grinding fluid mist or salt water Otherwise you run the risk of fire The inverter is precision equipment Do not allow it to fall or be subject to high impacts step on it or place a heavy load on it Doing so may cause the inverter to fail Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 1 Precautions for installation 1 Transportation The inverter uses plastic parts When carrying the inverter handle it carefully to prevent damage to the parts Do not carry the inverter by holding the front or terminal block cover Doing so may cause the inverter to fall Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or its parts are missing 2 Surface on which to install the inverter The inverter will reach a high temperature up to about 150 C during operation Install the inverter on a vertical wall surface made of nonflammable material e g metal to avoid the risk of fire Leave sufficient space around the inverter In particular keep sufficient distance between the inverter and other heat sources e g braking resistors and reactors if they are installed in the vicinity Keep enough clearance between the inverter and the wiring ducts located above and below the inverter to prevent the latter from obstructing the ventilation of the in
468. verter 1 10 cm or more Inverter 2 10 cm or more i A clearance of 22 cm or more is required for replacing the DC bus capacitors 5 cm or more gt 3 Ambient temperature Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the ambient temperature goes above or below the allowable range 10 C to 50 C as defined by the standard inverter specification Measure the temperature in a position about 5 cm distant from the bottom center point of the inverter and check that the measured temperature is within the allowable range Operating the inverter at a temperature outside this range will shorten the inverter life especially the capacitor life 4 Humidity Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the relative humidity goes above or below the allowable range 20 to 90 RH as defined by the standard inverter specification Avoid a place where the inverter is subject to condensation Condensation inside the inverter will result in short circuits and malfunctioning of electronic parts Also avoid places where the inverter is exposed to direct sunlight 5 Ambient air Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the inverter is subject to dust corrosive gases combustible gases flammable gases grinding fluid mist or salt water Foreign particles or dust entering the inverter will cause it to fail If you use the inverter in a considerably dusty environment install the inverter inside a totally enclosed panel Chapter
469. wer digit digit 6 Starting register number 1 00 6 Number of registers lower digit 02 upper digit 7 CRC 16 code upper digit 95 7 Starting register number 1 02 8 CRC 16 code lower digit 8A lower digit 1 This query cannot be broadcasted 8 _CRC 16 code upper digit 36 2 Note that the starting coil number is 1 less than the 9 CRC 16 code lower digit 37 actual coil number of the coil to be read first 3 The data equivalent to the specified number of data bytes is transferred In this example 4 bytes are transferred because the data on two registers is returned in the response Read the data received in the response as follows Response buffer 4 5 6 7 0 upper 0 lower 1 upper 1 lower Starting register number digit digit digit digit Response data Trip condition Trip due to overvoltage Decelerating If the function to read registers cannot be executed normally the inverter will return an exception response For details see Item viii Exception response 4 134 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions iii Writing data to a specified coil 05h This function writes data to a specified coil The following table shows the updating of the coil status ha Coil status OFF gt ON ON OFF Updating data lower digit 00h 00h Example When sending an operation command to the inverter at slave address 10 To start the inverter operation 03 must be set in parameter A00
470. xplanation of Functions 0 digital operator 1 keypad potentiometer 2 Operation target frequency A142 R W input via O 3 input via Ol 4 external selection 2 communication 5 option 1 6 option 2 7 pulse train frequency input i 0 addition A141 A142 1 subtraction A141 oom RW rw 0 acd 2 multiplication A x A142 or foowmeradenen __f_ ave _ e tata 12B3h a to be added A145 high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz IE 12B4h A145 low 12B5h Sign of the frequency to be A146 00 frequency command A145 01 frequency added command A145 12B6h to EL S curve 12B2N acceleration deceleration ratio 1 A150 0 to 50 EL S curve acceleration deceleration ratio 2 R W 0 to 50 EL S curve 12BBh deceleration deceleration ratio 1 A152 Rw lo to 50 1 EL S curve 12BCN deceleration deceleration ratio 2 A153 0 to 50 1 12BDh to isoon Reserves a es 4 148 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions oO code No 0 tripping 1 starting with O Hz 2 starting with matching frequency 3 tripping after deceleration 1301h Selection of restart mode b001 RAN and stopping with matching frequency 4 restarting with active matching frequenc 1302 Alowable under Voltage power b002 3 to 250 0 1 sec Tgog ee before motor b003 3 to 1000 0 1 sec Instantaneous power A F A 9 0 disabling 1 enabling 2 disabling during 1304h aes voltage trip alarm b004 row psan and decelerating to stop Number of
471. y 02 odd parity C075 RIW_ 1 1 bit 2 2 bits ree 0 tripping 1 tripping after decelerating and wn e of the operation after C076 stopping the motor 2 ignoring errors 3 LS communication error stopping the motor after free running 4 decelerating and stopping the motor C077 R W C078 R W C079 R W _ 0 ASCII 1 Modbus RTU __ Inaccessible _ _ _ C081 R W C082 R W C083 R W _ Inaccessible eg ei C085 R W 145Ah to f ee C091 R OM ee 8 a I C101 RIW oie storing the frequency data 1 storing the a requency data 14ean Resende secon resetting the trip when RS is on 1 resetting Le 146Ah Reset mode selection C102 the trip when RS is off 2 enabling resetting only upon tripping resetting when RS is on 0 starting with 0 Hz 1 starting with matching C103 R W frequency 2 restarting with active matching te frequency 146Dh_ FM gain adjustment C105 R W_ 50 to 200 1 C106 R W 146Fh_ AMI gain adjustment C107 R W 1 4 154 Chapter 4 Explanation of Functions 1470h __ Reserved 1471h__ AM bias adjustment C109 147Eh _ Ol input zero calibration C122 147Fh O2 input zero calibration C123 R W 148B Output 13 off delay time C135 R W R W 1492h Logical output signal 1 selection 1 C142 Rw pare ALON GOCE to C026 except Em 1493h Logical output signal 1 selection 2 C143 Rw pare aaoo to C026 except a 1494h Logical output signal 1 operator selection C144 R
472. y 0 Notready S 0012h _ Unused S T RS O RUN running R 1 Tripping 0 Normal FA1 constant speed reached OR 1 0N 0 OFF S 0015h _ FA2 set frequency overreached R 1 ON 0 OFF S O OL overload notice advance signal 1 R _ 1 ON 0 OFF S O 0017h _ OD output deviation for PID control R 1 ON 0 OFF _ S O 0018h _ AL alarm signa R 1 0N 0 OFF S 0019h _ FA3 set frequency reached R 1 ON 0 OFF S O 001Ah_ OTQ over torque R 1 ON 0 OFF S O IP instantaneous power failure R 001Ch_ UV undervoltage R 10N 0 OFF S O 001Dh_ TRQ torque limited R 1 ON 0 OFF S O 001Eh RNT operation time over R 1 ON 0 OFF S O 001Fh_ ONT plug in time over R 0020h __ THM thermal alarm signal R 0022h _ Reserved CT 0023h _ Reseved CT 0024h _ Reserved CT 0025h _ Reserved CT 0026h_ BRK brake release R 0027h _ BER brake erro R 0028h ZS 0 Hz detection signal R 0029h _ DSE speed deviation maximum R 002Ah_ POK positioning completed R 002Bh FA4 set frequency overreached2 R 002Ch_ FAS set frequency reached 2 R 1 ON 0 OFF S 002Dh a overload notice advance signal 1 ON 0 OFF 002Eh_ Odc Analog O disconnection detection S y 002Fh_ OlDc Analog Ol disconnection detection S O ECAC maa detection 0031h _ Reserved i oo T O 0032h __ FBV PID feedback comparison R 1 ON 0 OFF gt
473. z 0 00 o w frequency 2 e A013 OJ L input active range start 0 to O L input active range end voltage 0 x o 4 14 gt voltage A014 OJ L input active range end O L input active range start voltage to 100 100 x o voltage A015 O L input active range start 00 external start frequency 01 0 Hz 01 x o frequency selection A016 pene frequency filter time 1 to 30 or 31 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz with hysteresis 31 x o 4 15 A017 Easy sequence function 00 disabling 01 enabling 00 x x 4 95 selection Multispeed operation selection 00 binary 16 speeds selectable with 4 terminals 01 bit 8 speeds selectable A019 P 00 x x with 7 terminals A020 _ Multispeed frequency setting 0 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A220 Multispeed frequency setting 0 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor Hz 0 00 o o 2nd motor A320 Multispeed frequency setting 0 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 3rd motor Hz 0 00 o o 3rd motor A021 Multispeed 1 setting 0 0 or start frequency to 1st maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A022 Multispeed 2 setting 0 0 or start frequency to 2nd maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O A023 Multispeed 3 setting 0 0 or start frequency to 3rd maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O 2 A024 _ Multispeed 4 setting 0 0 or start frequency to n th maximum frequency Hz 0 00 O O D 8 A025 _ Multispeed 5 s
474. z range about 3 0 Hz or less The parameter value is expressed as a ratio of the output current to the inverter s rated current 2 The Zero LV starting boost current HO61 H261 is the parameter to specify the current for boosting at motor start up with a frequency in the 0 Hz range The parameter value is expressed as a ratio of the boost current to the inverter s rated current The value of the boost current is added to the current value specified by H060 H260 only at starting Range of data Zero LV Imit H060 H260 0 0 to 100 0 Current limiter for the low speed range Zero LV starting boost current H061 H261 0 to 50 Quantity of boost current at starting When using this function observe the following precautions 1 Be sure to use an inverter of which the capacity is one class higher than the motor to be driven 2 If you use the inverter to drive a motor of which the capacity is two classes lower than the maximum applicable capacity of the inverter you may not be able to obtain adequate motor characteristics 3 If you cannot obtain desired characteristics from the motor driven under the OHz range sensorless vector control readjust the motor constants according to the symptom as described in the table below Operation siatus Symptom Adjustment method Adjustment item Momentary speed Increase the motor constant R2 step by step from the P F Leora scien les value up to 1 2 times as high as the set value Oe 1221 M031 owering Momen

Hitachi INVERTER SJ700-2 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents